^mi •«% A NEW, EASY, AND COMPLETE GRAMM4|R^ OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE. 1 if^ Printed i FINSBURY giiVARE J. RICHARDSON, ROYAL EXCHANGE; LONGMAN, HURST, REES, ORME, AND BROWN, PATERNOSTER ROW ; AND T. BOOSEY, OLD BROAD SIBEET. 1810. /^ PCmo^ ADVEPaiSEMENT . ^ /. TO THE SECOND EDITION. The rapid circulation of this Grammar is some proof of its superiority over contemporary publica* tions; and while the Author acknowledges with gratitude its adoption by several eminent Teachers in this country, he is no less under obligations to those Merchants and Traders who have increased its circulation by the export of large numbers to the Caraccas, as well as to the Peninsula; where the Author has the satisfaction of knowing that his Grammar has not only proved an advantageous speculation to them, but has also been found highly acceptable and useful to the classes of Learners, namely the Commercial and Military, for whom it is more particularly adapted. # The honourable and rapidly increasing connexion between the British and Spanish Nations will, it is presumed, render its mility permanent: and with a view to the increase of that utility, as well as to manifest his sense of public favour, the Author has diligently revised his work throughout, and made such correcticms and improvements therein as he deemed it capable of receiving. London, ^ Oct. 1, 1810. a 3 117 In a few Days ivill he piiUished, hj the same Author y 1. SPANISH EXERaSES, adapted to this GRAM- MAR. 2. A complete VOCABULARY of the SPANISEI, EN- GLISH, FRENCH, and ITALIAN LANGUAGES. The same Boohellers have recently puUished New and Improved Editions of the following Spanish Works : 1. NEUMAN'S SPANISH and ENGLrSH and EN- GLISH and SPANISH DICTIONARY. 2 vols. 8vo. 1 /. 4^. 2.' The same Work abridged. 12^. 3. ELEMENTS of the SPANISH GRAMMAR, by John Vigier. 4s. 4. DON QUIXOTE, m Spanish, revised and corrected by Fernandez, with a Lite of Cervantes, &c. .4 vols, 1/. Is. 5. GIL BLAS, in Spanish, revised and corrected by the same, 4 vols. l6s. 6. GIL BLAS, in Portuguese, revised and corrected by the same. 4 vols. 14-?. 7. DA COSTA'S PilSTORY of PORTUGAL: in Portuguese. 3 vols. 15s. 8. PAUL and VIRGINIA, in Spanish. 4*. 9. SELECTIONS in Portuguese, from various Authors, with English Translations, 5s. (5d. 10. FLORIAN'S GONZALVA de CORDOVA, in Spanish. 6s. » 11. FLORIAN'S Smaller Novels, in Spanish. 3s. 6d. TABLE OF CONTENTS. Abbreviations made use of ly Spaniards in their writing . . .... . . ...... . . xiii PJRT I. OF PRONUNCIATION AND ORTHOGRAPHY. PAGE. Chapter I. Of pronunciation 1 Of ihe Spanish alphabet ib. Of the vowels ib. . Of the diphthongs 2 Of the consonants, and their pronunciation . . 3 Observations on the lettersG, J, LL, N, X . . ib. Of accents . . ." 6 Chapter IF. Of orthography ib. Of punctuation ib. Of capital letters . . 7 An easy method of learning Spanish feminine words ending in ad, and in English in y . . 8 P^RT IL OF THE PARTS OF SPEECH .. .. n Chapter I. Of the article ib. Chapter H. Of substantives 12 Of the declensions oj nouns 13 Of the declensions of adjectives . . . . . . 15 Vlll CONTENTS. PAGE. How to distinguish a noun feminine from a mas- culine ., .. 15 Observation 10 Of augmentatives 1/ Of diminutives ib. Chapter Til. Of adjectives IS Observation I9 Of comparatives and superlatives 20 Comparatives and superlatives irregularly formed 21 Of the cardinal numbers ib. . Observations vpon the cardinal numbers . . . . 24 Of the ordinal numbers 25 Chapter IV. Of pronouns ' 2Q Of personal pronouns ib. Declension of personal pronouns .. 2/ Declension of the reciprocal pronouns .... 30 Of compound pronouns .. ib. Of possessive pronouns . . . . ib. Of demonstrative pronouns ' . . 33 Of cuyo and cuya 35 Of pronouns relative and interrogative , . . , 36 Chapter V. Of verbs .. 38 Definition of verbs . . . . ib. Of the moods and tenses of verbs 40 Conjugation of the auxiliary vei'b haber, to have 41 Conjugation of the irregular verb tener, to have or to hold 46 Conjugation of the auxiliary verbs ser or estak, to be ' 51 Observation upon the verbs SER and EST kR .. 56 Of the regular conjugations ib. An alphabetical list of regular verbs in ar . . , . 60 The second conjugation ofregulnY verbs in er . , 63 A set of regular verbs of the second conjugation QQ CONTENTS. IX PAGE. The third regular conjugation in'w 6/ An alphabetical list of regular verbs in ir .'. , . yo Conjugation of a regular and reflective verb in ar yi Conjugation of a regular and reflective verb in er 74 Conjugation of a regular and reflective verb in ir 77 Conjugation of irregular verbs, in an alphabetical order »^ 81 Observation cm the irregularities of verbs . . . . 82 A collection of verbs whose infinitives end in cer 118 Several ways of conjugating a verb 119 Of impersonal verbs 120 Chapter VI. Of adverbs 122 Different sorts of adverbs ib* Of prepositions 126 jin alphabetical list of prepositions , . • . • , ib. Of conjunctions • . 1 45 Of interjections ., 14/ PJRT III. OF SYNTAX. 148 Chapter I. The use of Spanish articles .. •• ib. Articles used in Spanish and in English . . . . 149 Articles used in Spanish and not in English . , ib. Of the partitive article 151 Jf'^here no articles are used in either language . , 153 Of the preposition de , . 154 The transposition of words . . . . . , , . 155 Cases in which no article is used ib. Chapter II. Syntax of substantives .. .. 156 Two substantives in the same case ..... , . ib. The latter of two substantives is put in the genitive ex .. 157 A noun collective general ib. A noun cQllective partitive ib. X CONTENTS. PAGE. Chapter III. Syntax of adjectives 158 Concord and position of adjec ives ib. Government of adjectives l6l Adjectives of dimerision 162 Of comparatiues and superlatives ... . . . . l63 Chapter IV. Of personal pronouns ., .. 166 IVAen they are co?ij /motive or disjufictive . . . . 167 Of the impersonal pronouns it, they, them . . l6c) Of the right placing of pronouns . .' • . . . 173 Observations 174 Table of pronouns conjunctive 176 IVIien the personal pronouns are to be repeated . . 177 Distinction betweenitXy qW^, and %i ,. ,. .. 178 Chapter V. Of possessive pronouns ,, , . 179 Chapter VI. Of demonstrative pronouns .. 181 Chapter VII. Of relative pronouns .. .. 183 Chapter VIII, Of interrogative pronouns •. 185 Chaptkr IX. Of the different sorts of interrogation 180 Chjipter X. Of^the different sorts of ^«e .. 188 Chapter XI, Of indeterminate pronouns .. 19O Of todo, and its various constructions ... • . I94 Chapter XII. Several modes of negation .. 198 SYNTAX OF VERBS 201 Chapter XIII. Of the government of verbs .. ib. Chapter XIV. Of the infinitive mood .. .. 207 Of the infnitive present 203 Observations on the prepositions para and por , . 212 Of the gerund .. 213, Of the participle ,. .. ». .. .. .. 214 CONTENTS. XI PAGE. Concord of the v&rh with its nomi7iative .. .. 2l6 X)hservations ..217 Chapter XV. Of the indicative mood .. .. 218 Chapter XVI. Of the subjunctive mood .. .. 221 JVords which govern the subjunctive 222 Words which govern sometimes the subjunctive and sometimes the indicative , . 224 Which tense of the subjunctive must be used • . 225 Chapter XVII. Of irregular verbs 227 Chapter XVIil. Of impersonal verbs 229 Chapter XIX. Syntax of adverbs , 233 Chapter XX. Syntax of prepositions ,. .. 234 Of conjunctiojts and interjections 236 Chapter XXI. Of Spanish idioms 237 Chapter XXII. Of the different significations of andar 240- DiJJhent significations of the verb dar . . . . 242 DifJWent signif cations of the verb estar . . . , 246 DijU'trent significations of the verb H\Bi.hK ,. 247 Difj'erent significations of the verb hacer . . 248 Different significations of the verb IR . . . . 251 Dijfer-ent signif cations of the verb venir . . , . 252 PJRT IF. A vocabulary of words necessary to be known , . 254 Familiar dialogues . . , . 287 Commercial letters ..311 Bill of lading 331 Invoice ji 333 xu CONTENTS. PAGE. Bills of exchange 335 Extracts . . . . 336 Some recreative falles in verse 34/ Don Quixote's testament .. .. 352 The Lord's Prayer 356 The Creed ib. SPANISH ABBREVIATIONS. A. C. j4no de Crisio In the year of Christ a. a«. arroba o arrohas 25 pounds weight A. A. autdres authors Adai°'-. adrninistraddr administrator Agt-. j^gosto August - Ant«». Antonio Anthony Ap^o. sp*^*. apostolico, "ca apostolical Art. articulo article Vrzhp*^. arzolispo archbishop B. ledto blessed b. {in quoting) vuelta turn over B. L. M. leso las manos 6 hesal kiss the hands B.L.P. Icso los pies I kiss the feet J^mo pe leatisimo Padre most blessed Father C. M. B. cuyas manos leso whose hand I kiss C. P. B. cuyos pits heso whose feet I kiss Cam^. cdmara chamber Cap. capitulo chapter Cap". capitdn captain Capp°. capelldn chaplain Col. columna column Comis°. cojuiiorio commissary Comp'^. c"i^. CO nip nil ia company i:ons<>. consejo council Cor^^ corriente current, instant D". D^ don or dona don, donna D.D. doctor es doctors D^ D°^ doctor doctor D». Dios God Dho. dha. dicho, dicha said Dro. dcrecho duty or right b ' - XIV ABBREVIATIONS. En«. En^ro January Ex'"^. ex'"^. excelentUimo , -ma most excellent Exc^. excel encia excellency- Fha. fho. fecha, fecho date Feb°. Fehrero February Fol. folio folio Fr. fray brother Franco. Francisco Francis Frnz. Fernandex Fernandez Gue. gde. guarde save Gra. gracia grace Geni. generdl general Igla. iglesia church Ills ilustre illustrious Ill=»°. ill"^a. ilustrisimo, 'tna most illustrious Inq«'. inquisiddr inquisitor Jhs. Jesus Jesus Jph. Josef Joseph J'. Juan John Lib. libro book Lib«». libras pounds Lin. linea line M. P. S. mid poderoso senor most powerful lord M«. madre mother M'-. monsiur master M«. A«. muchos anas many years Mag<*. m fig est ad majesty Migi. Miguel Michael Mnro. ministro minister Mrd. me'rced favour Mrn. , Martin Martin Mrnz. Martinez Martinez ^^'ro. maestro master Mrs. maravedis maravedis M, S. manuscrito manuscript M. S. S. manuscritos manuscripts ABBKEVIATIONS. XV s. nuestro Senor our Lord s^ nuestra Senora our Lady . n". nuestro, nuestra our -•.9- N'lviembre November .po. obispo bishop :L'^ S""'. Octubre October on^ onza u onxas ounce, onnces ; \ ordV orns. , orden, or denes order, orders D. posdata postscript ^ para for , padre father . >. Pedro Peter r^ por for or by pits feet . plain raoney, silver, plate parte part puerto port J,-. patina page PubK publico public ^^Vr'. real, redles royal, royals . reverendisimo most reverend l'"'. recili I received ).q^ que that (juando when , auhn? who ? f/ nan to how much san sanlo saint -. M. su wages tad his majesty S^ S°'-. S"^. sehor, senora sir, lady Septe. 7bre, Septieth bre September Ser'"°. Ser™». serenisinio, -ma most serene SS"°. escrJbano notary Sup<^». suplica entreats Sup*^^ suplicanie petitioner Ten^«. ieniente lieutenant 'i om. tovio volume XVI ABBREVIATIONS. Tpo. tiempo time V. V«. venerable venerable V. A. vuestra alteza your highness V. E. vuecelencia your excellency V. G. verbi gratia for exaniple V. M. vuestra m erced. or usled you V. P. vuestra paterniddd your paternity V. S. vuestra sehoria, usiayour lordship V. S. I. vuesenoria ilustri- sima your grace V«n. vellun bullion Vol. voLumen volume XmO^ diezmo tenth Xp^«. Chrlsto Christ Xpf^^. Christidno Christian. PART I, OF PRONUNCIATION and ORTHOGRAPHY. Chapter I. PRONUNCIATION. X KONUNCiATioN is the right expression of the sounds of the words of a language. Words are composed of syllables, and syllables of let- ters. The letters of the Spanish language are as follow j Pron. A B c CH D E V ah lay thay cliuy day a ayft G H I J h LL M hfiny achey ee hhota ayle ellyc erne N N o V a R S me eiiye o pay coo ay re aysst T U V X Y Z. Iny 00 t ;«y equis eegnega thata. As the English vowels differ in sound from those of all other nations, the first care of a learner ought to be to ap- ply himself to the true pronunciation of the Spanish vowels, A E I O U Pron. nh a €e o oo. A is pronovinced as the English pronounce a in the words thaty ask, are } as a?7;a a nurse, amaca a hammock. E is pronounced like e in the following words, benefactor, henejicial, I is pronounced like ee in the word steel, sleep, steep; as bigamo, a bigamist. O is pronounced as in English, except in the following -£, PiJONUNClATlON. cases. 1st, in all monosyllables when not followed by another vowel, as /o, no, it is close. 2d, it is brogd when there is over it an acute accent, as amo he loved, (to distinguish it from«wo 1 love,) temio be feared, suhio he went up. 3d, it is long in doy I give, hoy to-day ; in all other cases it is pronounced as in English. U is pronounced like oo in the words goody cooky cool. Y has no other sound but that of ee. See I. When two vowels meet together in Spanish words, they must be pronounced distinctly, as acaecer to happen, cacr to fall, amais you love, cantdis you sing, &c. The same rule ought to be observed wlien ee meet together in the same word, as creer to believe, her to read. This must be considered as a general rule. Of Diphthongs. A diphthong is the meeting of two or more vowels In the same syllable. They are found in Spanish as follow : 1. ia, as dia A day, didcono a Aq^cow, diamante a dia- mond. 2. iavi, as carnejiawhre cold meat. 3. iaut as ^a«:5a security, jfacJor he who gives security for another. 4. iar, as Liar to tie, estudiar to study. 5. ie, as liebre a hare, rniel honey. 6. ien, as hien well, lienzo cloth. 7. ioj as navio a large ship, piorno Spanish broom. 8. ion, as porcion a portion, sion water parsnip. Observe, that all diphthongs cease to be so every time tlie i is thus accented (z), as aviarla I should love, daria I would give, filosojia. philosophy, &c, p. iia, as ([uarertta forty, ^uadro a frame. 10. uan, as tjuando when ? quanta how much ? 11. ucy as Z>z^ewo good, fweya a den, 12. uen, as cwe/2/a a reckoning, cincucnta fi{ly. Observe, that u after c or q takes the sound of a w. VROMUNClATiON. * and when thus accented (ii) it sounds like ©o> and makes a syllable by itseli'. 13. u«s, as pues but j u sounds like oa. J 4. ui, asguitarra a gaitar, guisado a ragmU > here the u is lost in })ronunciation. 15. uin, as ^uindas cherries, guindar to lift up. Of Consonants. B is pronounced in Spanish, as in English in the word benefice beneficio. C before e and i sounds like s, as Cecilia Cecily a wo- man's name 3 bat be fore, a, hr, I, 0, r, and u, it sounds like kf as Carolina Caroline, cahallo a horse» Christ^ Christ, Claudina Claudia, creacion the creation, criado a man servant, cronologia chronology, crucifero a cross- bearer, Cuba a cask for wine. C followed by h in the middle or at the end of words of two or three syllables, sounds as if there was a / before it, as in the words mucho much, muchachada a boyish trick, muchacha a little girl, muchacho sl boy. D is pronounced as in English. F is pronounced as in English. The Spaniards never double that letter in their writing. Observations. G, J, LL, N, X, being peculiar to the Spanish language, ' I will endeavour to give a true definition of their sounds and uses J but this must not hinder the pupil from pro- viding himself with a good master, in order to acquire their true pnjnnnciation. G is only gaitural before e and i, as in generacion genera- tion, gigantico gigantic. G before a, o, u, is not aspirated or guttural, but is pro- nounced as in other languages ; as oaban a great coat, gordo fat, gusano a worm ; in which instances it is easy t<» pRrceive that trie sounds ga, go, gu, answer t^ the English pronunciation. B2 4 FKvlNUNCIATiON. H is so lightly aspirated, that in many words it can hard- ly be perceived 3 as in ha' lar to speak, Aam /-re hun- ger, &c. L and LL. — The single L is pronounced as in English ; the LL, like the French liquid in the v^ordsJUle a daughter, famille a family j or like the gUo of the Ita- lian, mjiglio a son ; or the Ih of the Portuguese in the word Jilho a son,. yZ/Aa a daughter; &c. : 3S llamar to call, llaneza equality. Have a key, llegar. to arrive, llcvar to carry away. Hover to rain, lluvia rain: — read llamar^ lianexa, liavej liegar, Uevar, Hover, liuvia, &c. LL is never found at the end of words. M and N ?.re pronounced as in English. N. This letter is quite peculiar to the Spanish language, and has been adopted by them for the French gne, and they call it n conlilde : its greatest use is found in the words seiior sir, mafia dexterity, manana tomorrow., — read segnor, magna, magnana, &c. The pronunciation of this letter should be heard from a master's mouth. P, Q, R, are pronounced as in English. 5 is pronounced in Spanish words as if there w^ere ss, even between two vowels, as in the verb poder lo be able, preterite subjunctive que pudiese he might be able, (jue pudiescn they might be able. T is pronounced as in English. ' ^ X is guttural, and sounds almost like J.- these two letters are so much alike in pronunciation, that the one is often used for the other, except when x is directly at the end of words, as relax a clock or watch ; but in the middle, as lejos or lexos afar ofl', they are indiffe- rently written by the Spaniards : nevertheless, to write correctly one must be attentive to the etymology. Z is pronounced as in English. When the scholar has read attentively these rules, he may take every consonant separately and join it to each PRONUNCIATION. f vowel, in order to make syllables, and thus learn how to read. Bahud^jt, labear, leler, bigarro, hoho, luhilla, hralanfe, Iraceage, Iragillas, Irear, Bretana, hrillo, brnchado. Caballo, cebolla, cibcra, coartar, cubazo, chachara, cha- ckarero, chema, chichkveo, chocado, chufeta, daustro, clemente, cliente, clocar, clueco, crasitud, crecido, criador, cronografo, cruceras. Dable, dehaxo, dignidad, dobladillo, duena, duhura. Fabrica, Fehrero,forrage,fuerte, Jlagicio, Jlechar , fli- bote, fiacadura, fiuctuadoTiy fracasary fregacion, frlgS" rativo, Jrialdad, Jrogar, Jroniero, fructuosamente. Gabela, generadon, girasol^ golpe, gorgear, gladiator, gleba, globo, glutinoso, gnomomca, goberjiador, gobernalle, gracejar, graduadon, grajado, greguesquilLos , gricta, gru tador, groseza, grua, grueras, grueso, grumille, grunidor, gruta, guacamayoy guedeja, guedcjudo, guia, guitio, gur- rumina. Hadenda, hechizo, hidalgo, hofuela, huesped. Jabalif Jesu Christo, jocQ^amente, Jordan, Juegos. Labor, lecdon, librar, libro, lobariillo, lucema. Llamamiento, llevadUy lloradera, iloraduebsj lluvia, Macarron, mecha, mljero, moeeton, muneco. Nausea, negrear, niebla, nodvo, nutridon. Palellon, pecadilio, piadoso, pobladan, piibertad, pla- ceme, plegador, pliego, plomero, plumaxo, praticaj pre* ambulo, primado, probar, prueba. Quadema, quedar, (juemar, quipos, f/nocienU. ' Rabear, rejilla, riguroso, rogador, ruginow. Sabandija. secadillQS, siervo, sohnno, subdupio. Tablillas, iemeraso, tibieza, Uxston,, iwnuUo, iralajo, trebejo, trigesimo, irofeo, trujumoM. Vadeable, velador, viduno, uolvible, vulpeja. Xabalconar, xefe, xeque, aibion, xorgolin, xugoso. Yacija, T/ema, ycrro, yoguir, yugo, yusion. Zaborda, %eloso, zilorgano, zompo, zurrador, b3 » dRtHOGRAPHY. Of Accents. The Spanish language has but two accentSj the acute (') and the circumflex (*). The acute serves for the pro- longation of a svllable, as vdya I may go, veo I see, veia I did see, v6y 1 go, d6y I give, junto together. This accent is likewise put upon the live vowels a, e, i, 6, u. The circumflex serves to denote that the preceding letter^ if it is ch, sounds like k ; or if it is x it sounds like kc; as ch^mia chemistry, exdminar to try. Chapter 1L ORTHOGRAPHY. Of Punctuation. Punctuation is used in writing ^nd printing to de- note the place where the readier ought to stop to take breath j or to distinguisli more easily the diflferent parts of a sentence. The stops are of six sorts, of which the names and shapes are as follow : ( , ) Virgula u Coma A Comma. ( J ) Pun to y coma .A Semicolon; (- : ) Dos puntos^ A Colon. ( . ) Punto A Full Stop. ( ? ) Nota de ^nterrogacion. . A Note of Interrogation. ( ! ) Nota de Admiracion ... A Note of Admiration. These stops are necessary to avoid obscurity, to pre- vent misconstruction, and for the better understanding of what we read or write. Here follows the Use which- good authors make of them, and which is grounded upon reason: A comma is used, 1st, in an enuneration to di- stinguish the fhings enumerated, as Las partes de La ora' don son el suhtantiuo, el adjectivOj el pronomlre, elverho^ ORTHOGKAPHY. 7 elpartidpio, el adverhio, ^c : — 2d, to distinguish the dif- ferent parts of a sentence, and to give the reader a proper time for breathing, as Hermana viia, gran consueLo meliA preparado Dios c/uarjdo lien lo necesitaha, en dos cartas luyas, una de 18 y otra de 20 de Mayo que recihi a un mUnio iiempo, ksfc. We do not use a comma between the different parts of a short sentence which can be express- ed at one breath, as Tengo negocios urgentes, 1 have earnest business. A semicolon is used to distinguish the two parts of a sentence of some length, when the first has a complete sense of itself, as Muckos repulan como rudeza i imper- feccion la sencilltz de la nntigua viuska ; pero nasoiros sentimos que esta viisma ddle la acredita. A colon is used after a sentence wliich could subsist alone, because it makes a complete sense of itself, but which, however, is followed by another, which explains or extends it, as La virtud y el vicio producen difeientes efectos : esta causa la miseria de los homLrtrs, y esa haceles /dices. N. B. A semicolon or a colon can be, and often is, indifferently used for each other. A full stop is. used when the sentence is complete, ay La caridad e^^ la prim era de las virludes Christianas, Cha- rity is the first of all christian virtues. A note of interrogation in used at the beginning and at the end of a sentence which expresses a question, a» ^Esid su paare en casaP Is his father at home ? A note of adraiiation is put at the beginning and at the end of a sentence which expresses admiration and surprise, as i Que sohreiimana Juerza es esta! j Que palacio f I Que quartos ! / Que gaierins ! Of Capital Letters. Capital or great letters are used, 1st, la the beginning of every sentence in prose* They 8 VOCABULARY. are besides used at the beginning of every line in poetry, as La virtud es amablc, Virtue is amiable. El vicio es^ ttlominablef Vice is odious. Fabruava un palacio el pcnsarnienio, Encima de la pr&funda memoria ; Pensando hacer la camera de gloria. Ha hecho sala de un grave tormento. 2d, All christian and proper names of persons, king- doms, provinces, towns, places, rivers, ships, mountains, dignities, and professions ; also the names of heathen gods and goddesses, are all written with a capital letter. 3d, The nann^^ of arts and sciences begin with a ca- pital letter, as La Musica y la P'mtura son agradables. Music and Painting are agreeable. .^n tnsy fn^thod of learning many Spanish feminine Words ending in ad, and in English in ty ory, in an alphale- deal order. City Civility Community Concavity . Credulity Perversity Cruelty Curiosity D Debility Divinity Dignity Disparity E Efficacy Iniirmity Equity {Capacfty Extension Sterility Eternity Extremity Spaniih. English. Cittdad A A Gvihdad Actividad Activity Comunidad Anttrioridad Aiateriority Coiuamdad Ajiligimlad Antiquity ' Credulidad Aulenlicidud Autlif-nticiry Crintinalidad Autondad Autho'ity Or Lie! dad B B' Curiostd.ad Bddad Beauty D Beni;:/iia'ad Benignity Simn'icity Delilidad tiobedad Dt'idad Brevedad Brevity Disnidad Brut alidad Brutality Disp alidad C C ' E Calamidad Calar-nty Eficaddad Calidad Quality Efifermedad Canlidad Qunntity Etjuidad Capacidad Caridad Capacity Charity Espaciosidad Carnosidad Carnosity Eslerilidad Casualidad Casualty Ettrnidad Cerlinidad Certainty Extretnidad V6CABULAUY. F Facility Faculty Faiiihility Familiarity Fatality Fecundity Felicity Ferocity Fertility Festivity Fidelity Debility Formality Fragility' FVugality G Gentility Gravitv li Ability Honesty Hospitality Hostility Humatiity Humility Identity Equality Illegality Imbecility Impartiality Impossibility Impr< priety Impunity Impurity Incapacity Uncerainty — Incommodity Incompuli'-tlicladlnrompsiiibmtY hicrediHlidad Incredibility hicrediilidad Ir. credulity indcmnuhd Indemnity ihdiKiiulud liidignity Indivuinalidad Individuality Indorilidad Indocility Jnejabilidad Ineir^bility hu'>timaHL:d'td Inestimabiiity hifeniTidi<-nd Infecundity h{fdicidad Inlclicitv I Iiiferii,ridad I l>-jldrlidad I It'Jiitidud \ hifx)Ytnulttd i hipcniutirtnd i luhdiilidad ' Inhospitnlidad j hihumuiudud Jnmnisidad I Jnvtobilidad '\ iHViurtalzdad : Itimuta/ilidad i Insensililidad ! Jnlegiidad Jnterivi idad Intinvdtid Jnuibanidnd Inulilidud Irreeularidad Irrevocahilidad J Jovialid.id L Lafividad ) Lealdf!d Legfiltdad Leu idad Liheralidad Li viand ad Localidad Lofiganimidad M Ma^eslad Map! a mm idad Mnhpiidnd Matisedad MateriuLulad Malmudad Mfdiwridnd .yendicidad M or alidad Mofiulidud Movilidnd Mulhplicidad Mutahlidad N Nat.ividiitl Xaturnlidad S hermoso, to that which is handsome. Ace. lo hermoso, that which is handsome, Voc. (caret) Abl. por lo hermoso, by that which is handsome. (It has no plural ) Observe, that all adjectives in the Spanish language become substantives by adding to them the article lo. This is also a general rule. Observe, again, that all proper names of men and wo- me» are never declined with the foregoing articles. SECTION III. How to distinguish wiien a noun is masculine or feminine. The d'stinction of substantives into two genders comis from the distinction of fcexes: by Imitation the masculine or feminine gender has been given to all substantives, c 2 l6 OF SUBSTANTIVES. though they have no reference to any sex : thus for iii* stance pa?i bread, cuchillo knife, grano grain, &c., are masculine : cucharaa. spoon, mesa a table, vela a candle, &C.J are feminine. General rule. The nouns u'hich haVe reference to males are of the masculine gender ; and those which have reference to fe- males are feminine. Thus hombrea man, cahallo a horse, are masculine ; muger a woman, yegua a mare, are fe- minine. All nouns ending in e, o, n, or r, are masculine : as lum- Ire fire, larcote a kind of boat, llanquero a tanner, lode- gon a cook's shop, lordador an embroiderer, lahrador a la- bourer J except la madre the rrvother, la fnano the hand, which are feminine, Oheruation. We have observed, page 8, that all nouns endiog in ad, and in English in /j/ or y, are of the fenainine gendet* J we must further observe, that all nouns ending in a are feminine, except dia a day, diadema a diadem, diafragmu diaphragm, and some others coming from the Greek, .which are masculine. All nouns ending in cion, and in English in tion or cHo?i, are feminine, as diccioii diction, edicwii edition, partici' pacien participation, &c. All nouns ending in ud and e% are feminine, though they end in English in ve, de, or ness, as virtud virtue, prontilud promptness, pulidez neatness. Sec. All nouns ending in a form their plural by the addition of an 5 : those ending in cion or ud, by adding es to the singular 3 as virlud virtue, virludes virtues : those ending in e% make their plural by changing % into cfs asfem ha^py, /dices happy, &c. OF SOBSTANTlVfiS, 17 These rules extend themselves to the adjectives as well as to the substantives. Of Augmentatu'es. Augmentatives are very few in the Spanish language. They are used to express something extraordinary in the size as well as the extent of things spoken of, and add to the positive the signification of hig, large, tally and stout>, and are formed by adding to the nouns the syllables on or ozo for the masculine^ and ona or uxa for the feminine. Example: homhre a man, kombron a tall big man, muger a woman, mugcrona a tall and stout woman 3 perro a flog, perrazo a large dog. Of DlminiUive^, There are two sorts of diminutives. 1st, One to express tenderness, or the genteel carriage of any object whatever} but little or short, and their terminations, are ito, ico, masc. iia, icdy fern, added to the nouns either substantives or .jdjectives without any alleration, when terminating by a consonant, and suppressing the vowel if there is one at the enrl of the word. Example; pdxaroa. bird', paxarito a pretty little bird} casa 2i house, cas'da a pretty little house. "We must excepi from this rule hueno, luena, whose di- minutive is lonito, honita, which very often has no other meaning than pretty. 2d'. The other denotes either contempt or pity, with- out giving the idea of pretty, and terminates in i//o, ac- cording to the above rules: as perro a dog, perrillon little ugly do<< J rnuger a woman, mugercilla a little ugly wo- man 3 homhre a man^ homlrecillo a little ugly man. g3 18 ^ OF ADJECTIVES, Chapter III. OF ADJECTIVES. As the substantive is the name of a person or thing, the adjective, on the contrary, expresses the qualities of a per- son or things as La virtud esamahle, el vicio es odioso ; Virtue is amiable, vice is abominable j virtud and vicio are both substantives, mnahle and odioso are adjectives. The word which makes good sense with the words per- son or thing is an adjective : the word which cannot make any sense with them is a substantive. This is an infallible rule to distinguish them from one another : for instance, the word good is an adjective, be- cause we may say, a good person, a good thing, un buen sujetOy vna buena cosa; but the word man is a sub- stantive, because we cannot say, a man person, a man thing. As there are two sorts of substantives, masculine and feminine, there must be of course two sorts of adjectives to qualify both genders j as, a good horse w« buen caballo, a M'icktd girl u?ia mala Jiiuchachu. You see plainly by these examples, that buen qualifies the goodness of the horse, cn\<\mala the wickedness of the girl. Many beginners are at a loss how to turn a masculine adjective into a feminine one, because when they look for it in a dictionary they find it terminated in o ; therefore they must observe, that if they change the o into a chey make it feminine ; as, bucno masc. buena fern. good. If the substantive is in the plural, they must add an s to it : Los homlres son buenos, Men are good -, Las mugeres son luenas. Women are good. They must also observe, that several substantives end- ing in er or ey make their plural by the addition of es j OF ADJECTIVES. 19 Others ending with a consonant want only an s to (ovva, their [)lural. Ohewation. The following adjectives, Uno one, yilguno some^ Primero first, Ninguno no, Tercero. third, Bueno good, Posirero last, Mnlo. wicked, lose the last letter when they precede a substantive mas- culine. Sxampie : un hombre & w.c\n, el primer humhre the first man, algun homhre some man, ningun homlre no man, &c. Tercero does not always lose the last letter j for the third day may be expressed by el terccr dia, or el tercero dia, both which expressions are sanctioned by the Spa- nish Academy. Cienta, when immediately preceding a substantive, loses tb.e last syllable. Example : den hoinbres a hundred raen, cien almas a hundred souls j but if a copulative divides it, the said syllable is retained. Exanople: cienlo y diex one hundred and ten, Sec. Grande, when conveying an idea of greatness, in refe- rence, to merits, useful qualities, &:c., and preceding a substantive beginning by a consonant, loses Its last syl- lable. Example ; un gran cahallo a great or famous horse, una gran casa a fine house. But if it merely de- note an idea of size, extent. &c., it retains the said syl- lable. Example : un grande calalio a large horse, una. grande casa a vast house. Santo loses the last syllable before prq>er names. Ex- ample: san Pedro saint Peter, san Juan saint John, &c. Except santo Domingo, santo Torilio, santo Tomas if santo Tome. 20 OF ADJFXTIVE5. We must further observe, that the Spanish adjectives ending in the singular in al, el, il, form their plural by the addition of es, as cow/ w^gZ conjugal, plur. conjugales y ^fiel faithful, feles faithful j geniil genteel, gentiles gen- teel. Those ending in e, as amalle amiable, prudente prudent, make their pki.al by the addition of an s j and are of both genders. Those ending in a are feminine, and make their plural by the addition of an s j as corva crooked, corvas crooked. Those ending in o are generally masculine -, they make their feminine by changing o into a, and m.Vri:e in both genders their plural by the addition of an s\ as malicioso masc. malicmsn fem, malicious 3 '^\v\x. mal'mosos, mali^ ciosas, malicious. Those ending in z, as feliz hnppy, make their plural by taking away the a, and putting cei, and- are of botifc genders. SECTioir r. Of comparatives and superlatives^ A comparative is nothing else than a comparison of lwo> or more objects, in order to know what proportion they bear to one another. Now as two objects can either be equal, superior, or inferior, to one another, there are three sorts of comparatives, called'^ — of equality, superi- ority, and inferiority. The comparative of equality is formed by prefixing- one of these words, como, tavibien, tan; as El es tan fuerte corno us ted, He is as strong as you. The comparative of superiority is formed by prefixing the word mas to the adjective, as Soy mas alio que mi herma?io, I am taller than my brother. OP ADJECTIVES. 21 The comparative of inferiority is fortned by putting a negative before the verb and tan before the adjective, or by prefixing only the word menos to an adjective ; No es tan rico como usted, he is not so rich as you 3 No soy ta?i dic/ioso como v. m., 1 am not so fortunate as you. The superlatives increase or diminish to the utmost degree the signification of adjectives. They are of two sorts ; the one relative, and the otlier absolute. The first is formed by prefixing the article la or el to the word mas, as He visto la mas hermosa seuora de In* glaterra, I have seen the handsomest lady in England ; La calumnim es la culpa mas alominable, Calumny is the most abominable crime. The second is formed by prefixing the adverb muy to the adjective, as Soy muy poire, I am very \>qox. Comparatives and superlatives irregularly formed. These three adjectives, lueno, rnalu, per^ueno, deviate frpiii Others in the fornjatioii of their comi-uratives and superlatives, which are as follow : Positive. Comparative. Superlative. lueno good, 777 e/or better, /o tw^/id r, ^owwi/wo the best. malo bad, peor worse, pesimo the worst. pequeno little, menor less, lo minimo the least. h'len well, mejor better, lo mejor the best. poco little, menos less, lo menos the least. SECTION ir. Of the cardinal numlers. The cardinal numbers denote the quantity of persons pr things, apd ariswer to the question. How much? How 22 OF ADJECTIVES. many ? They are called cardinal because they are tht; root of all the other 1 2 3 uno m. una f. df>s 4 5 ' 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 V 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 ires quatro cinco self siete ocho nueve diex once doce irece catorce {juince diez y sSif diez y siete diez y ocho diez y nueve veinte veints y uno veinte y dos veinte y tres veinte y quatro veinte y cinco veinte y seis veinte y siete veinte y ocho veinte y nueve treinta trevita y uno treinta y dos treinta y tres treinta y quatro treinta y cinco treinta y seis treinta y siete treinta y ocho treinta y nueve they are as ioiiow one two three four five six seven eight nine ten eleven twelve thirteen fourteen fifteen sixteen seventeen eighteen nineteen twenty twenty-one twenty- two twenty- three twenty-four twenty- five twenty, six twenty -seven twenty-eight twenty-nine thirty lhirty-o!)e thirty- two thirty. three thirty- four thii^y-fuc thirty- six thirty-seven thirty-eight tUir^-nihe I II III IV V TI vri VIII IX X XI XII XIII XIV XV XVI XVII xvm XTX XX XXI XXII XXIII XXIV XXV XXVI XXVIl XXVllI XXIX XXX XXXI XXXII XXXIIl XXXIV XXXV xxxvr xxxvii xxxvrii XXX.I>w OP ADJECTIVE; 23 quarcnta fortjr (juart'Titay U7fo forty-one (juarenta y dos forty-two quarenta y tres forty- three quarenta y quatro forty-four quarenta y cinco forty-live quarenta y ieis forty-six quarenta y siete forty -seven quarenta y ocho forty-eight quarenta y nueve forty-nine dncuenta lifiy cincuenta y uno fifty one cincuenta y dos fifty-two cincuenta y tres fiftv-three cincuenta y quatro fifty-four cincuenta y cinco fifty -fi\ie cinciienta y seis elm iienta y siete dncilenla y ocho cimiientny nueve sesenta sescnta y uno sesenta y dos sesenta y tres sesenta y quatro sesenta y cinco sesenta y scis sesenta y siete sesi nla y. ocho sesenla y nueve setenta setenta y uno setenta y dos setenta y tres setenta y quatro setenta y cinco setenta y seis seienta y siete setenta y ocho setenta y nueve ochenta fifty-six fifty-seven fifty-eight fifty-nine sixty sixty-one Mxty-two sixty three sixty- four sixty-five sixty-six / sixty- seven sixty eight sixty-nine seventy seventy-one seventy- two seventy-three seventy-four seventy-five seventy-six seventy-seven seventy-eight seventy-nine eighty XL XLI XLII XLIII XLIV XLV XLVI XLVII XLVIII XLIX L LI LII LIII LIV LV LVI LVH LVIIC LIX LX LXI LXII LXIII LXIV LXV LXVII LXVIH LXIX I^XX LXXI LXXll LXXI II LXXIV LXXV LXXVI LXXVII LXXVIII LXXIX LXXX !4 or ADJECTIVES. 81 ochenta y uno eighty-one LXXXI 82 ochenta y dos eighty- two LXXXII 83 ochentu y ires eiffhty-three LXXXIII 84 ochenta y (juatro eighty-four LXXXIV 85 ochenta y cinco eighty-live LXXXV 86 ochenta y seis eighty-six LXhxvr 87 ochenta y slete eighty-seven LXXXVII 88 ocheucay ucho eighty-eight LXXXVIIi 89 ochenta y nueve eighty- nine LXXXIX 90 novenla ninety xc 91 noventa y uno . ninety-one XCI 9^ noventa y dos ninety-two xcir 93 noventa y tres ninety- three XCIII 94 noventa y quatn 9 ninety-four XCIV 95 noventa y cinco ninety-iive xcv 90 noventa y sfis ninety-six XCVI 97 noventa y siete ninety-seven XCVII 98 noventa y ocho ninety -eight XCVI 1 1 99 novenla y nueve ninety-nine XCIX 100 ciento one hundred c 101 cientQ y uno one hundred & one CI 102 ciento y dos one hundred & two cu 200 dodenws m. <75f. two hundred cc 300 tr crier, 'os three hundred ccc 400 //'m^ccientos four hundred cccc 500 quinicntos five hundred D 600 seisclenttts six hundred DC 700 setecicntos seven hundred DCC 800 cfchocientos eight hundred DCCC 900 novecientos nine hundred DCCCC [000 mil a thousand M. Ohservaiions uppn the cardinal numbers. Although the above examples would suffice withoui further illustrations, yet you are to observe, that wher two or more numbers are joined together, the greates goes first in the Spanish language : thus they say, veinti y cinco J veinte y ocho, twenty-five, twenty-eight ; putting the copulative conjunction y immediately after the great- OF ADJECTIVES. 25 est, and act In that respect quite contrary to some English people who say, Five and twenty, eight and twenty, &c, N. B. This must be considered as a general rule. SECTION III. Of the ordinal numbers. Ordinal numbers denote the order and disp things ', they are as follow: primero first segundo second ttrcero third (fiarto fourth qulnio fifth sexto sixth feptif/io seventh octavo eighth 710710 or novcno* ninth dccimo or dcceno tenth \ undecimo or unceno eleventh duodecimo or docd.io twelfth dtcimo itrcio or treceno thirteenth decirno quarto or catorct'no fourteenth dtcimo fj'uinto or quinceno fifteenth decirno sexto sixteenth decimo septimo seventeenth dtcimo octavo eighteenth decimo nono nineteenth vigesimo or venteno twentieth trigesimo or treinteno thirtieth quadragtsimo or quarenteno fortieth quinquagesimo or cincUenleno fiftieth sexagemno or sesenteno sixtieth septuagesimo or setenteno seventieth octogesimo or ochenteno eightieth nonagesimo or noventeno ninetieth D 2& or PRONOUNS. centesimo or ceJileno hundredth docentesimo or docentho two hnndredili treceniesimo or trace?itino three hundredth quadra^ntesimo QY qualrocenteno four hundredth quingenledmo or quinlenttno five hundredth irjlcsimo thousandth. There are agahi two other sorts of numbers, called. Collective and Distributive : the Collective denotes acer-' taiUj quantity of things joined together, as una docena a: dozen, una cincuentena fifty. The Distributive expresses a part of the wholes as la mitad the half, ei Lercio tlie third part, el decimo the tenth part 3 &c. Chapter iV. OF PRONOUNS. Pronouns are words used instead of nouns, to avoid the repetition of a substantive, which would be \Gry tedious without their bd{). There are six sorts of pronouns j called personal, posses- sive, demonstrative, relative, interrogative, and indefinite. Of personal pronouns. The personal pronouns denote the persons ; there are three persons j the frst is that who speaks, the second is that to whom one speaks, and the third is the person of whom one speaks. The pronouns of the first person are yo I, mi me, nosotros we ; and those of the second are tu thou, vos or vosotros you, said only of persons or per- sonified objects J but those of the third el he, ellos they, ella she, ellos they, are said of persons, animals, and things. OF PRONOUNS. 27 As the same pronoun is expressed one way when it is <:oj)junctive, that is to say, joined to a verb, ^nd another when disjunctive, a strict attention must be given to the following declension, in which they are carefully distin- guished. Declension of coujunciiue personal pronouns. First person— Masculine and feminine. Sing. Nom. yo, I. Gen. de mi, of me. Dat. para mi, for me. Dat. a mi, me, to me. Ace. d mi, me, me. Abl. por mi, by me. Abl, conmigo, with me. Plur. Nom. nos, we. Gen. de nos, of us. Dat. para nos, for us. Dat. d nos, nos, to us. Ace. a nos, nos, us. Abl. por nos, by us. Abl. (caret) First person plural. Masc. Nom. nosolros, we. Gen. de nosotros, of us. Dat. para nosotros, for us. Dat. a nosotros, to us. Ace. a nosotros, us. Abl. por nosotros, by us. Fem. Nom. nosolras, we. Gen. de nosotros, of us. Dat. para nosotros, for us. Daf. a nosotros, to us. Ace. d nosotros, us. Abl. por nosotros, by us. l>2 28 OF PilONOUNS, Second person — Masculine and feminine. Sing. Plur. Nora. tu, thou. Gen. de li, of thee. Dat. para ti, for thee. Dat. te, a ti, to thee. Ace. d ti, thee. Abl. por ti, by thee. Abl. contigo, with thee. Nom. vos, you. Gen. de vosy of you. Dat. para vos, for you. Dat. a vos, OS, to you, you, Ace. duos, OS, -you. Abl. por vos, by you. Abl. con vos, with you. Second person plurak Masc. Nom. vosotros, you. Gen. de vosotros, of you. Dat. para vosotros, for you. Dat. d vosotros, to you. Ace. d vosotros, you. Abl. por vosotros, by you. Abl. con vosotros, with you. Fern. Nom. vosotras, you. Gen. de vosotras, of you, Dat. pa?a vosolras, for you. Dat. a vosotras, to you. Ace. d vosotras, you. Abl. pox: vosotras, by you. Abl. con vosotras, with you. Third person singular, Masc. Nom. eL he or it. Gen. de cL of him or it. OF FRONOUWS. 2$ Dat. para M, for him or it. Dat. ' d d, Icy to him or it. Ace. a el, le, him or it. Abl. por el, by him or it. Abl. cow elf with him or iV Fern. Nom. ella, she or it. Gen. de ella, of her or it, Dat. para ella, for her or it, Dat. a ella, to her or it. Ace. d ella, le, la, her or it. Abl. por ella, by her or it. Abl. con ella, with her or it. Neuter. ' Sing. Nom. e//o, /o, it. Gen. de tllo, de la, of it, Dat. para ello, para lo, for it. Dat. a ello, d lo, it. Ace. fl' tf//o, lo, d lo, it. Abl. por ello, por lo, by it. (The neuter has no plural.) Plural Ma«c. Nom, ellos, they. Gen. de tl/os, of them. Dat. para ellos, for them. Dat. a ellos, to them. Ace. d ellos, les, los, them. Abl, por ellos, by them. Abl. con ellos, with them. Fem. Nom. ellos, they. Gen. de ellos, of them. Dat para ellos, for them* Dat. a ellos, totl^em. D3 28 OF PHONO UN'S. Second person — Masculine and feminine. Sing. Plur. Nora. tUy thou. Gen. de ti, of thee. Dat. para ti, for thee. Dat. tCy d ii, to thee. Ace. a ti, thee. Abl. por ti, by thee. Abl. contigo, with thee. Nom. vos, you. Gen. de vos, of you. Dat. para vos, for you. Dat. d vos, OS, to you, you, Ace. duos, OS, you. Abl. por VOS, by you. Abl. con vos, with you. Second person plural-, Masc. Nom. vosotros, you. Gen. de vosotros, of you. Dat. para vosotros, for yoa. Dat. d vosotros, to you. Ace. d vosotros, you. Abl. por vosotros, by you. Abl. con vosotros, with you. Fern. Nom. vosotras, you. Gen. de vosotras, of you. Dat. para vosotras, for you. Dat. a vosotras, to yoa. Ace. d vosotras, you. Abl. por vosotras, by you, Abl. co7i vosotras, with you. Third person singular, Masc. Nom. ^/, he or it. Gen. gV t'/, of him or it. OF PRONOUNS. 2$ Dat. para 61, for him or it. Dat. d el, le, to him or it. Ace. a el, le, him or it. AbL por el, by him or it. Abl. con el, with him or iV Fem. Nom. ella, she or it. Gen. de ella, of her or it. Dat. para ella, for her or it. Dat. o tf/Za, to her or it. Ace. a f//a, Ze, /a, her or it. Abl. por c//a, by her or it. Abl. con ella, with her or it. Neuter. ' Sing. Nom. ello, lo, it. Gen. esla, esio, this or that. Gen. de esie, de esta, de esto, of this or that. Dat, d esie, a esta, a esto, to this or that. -Ace. este, esta, esto, this or that. Abl. de este, de esta, de esto, from this or that. N. B. These pronouns, as well as their plural, show the person or thing present or near at hand. Plur. — Masculine arid feminine, (No neuter.) Nom. estos, estas, these. Gen. de estos, de estas, of these. pat. a estos, a estas, to these. Ace. estos, esias, these. Abl. da estos, de estas, from these. (second.) ^ing.-^ Masculine, feminine, and neuter, Nom, ese, esa, eso, that. Gen, de ese, de esa, deeso, of that. Dat. a ese, d esa, d eso, to that. Ace. ese, esa, eso, that, Abl, de ese, de esa, de eso, from that. Plur. — Masculine and feminine. (No neuter.) Nom, esos, csas, those. Gea. de esos, de esas, of those. pat. a esos, a esas, to those. Ace. esos, esas, those. Abl. de esos, de esas, from those. This second sort of pronouns expresses an object distant OF PR0N0UX3. . 35 roll) the person who speaks, and near to the person to .vhoni one speaks. (third.) Sing. — Masculine, femtJiine, and neuter. Koni. Qf/ue/, aquella, aguelio, that. Gen, de aquel, de aquella, de aquello, of that. Dat. a Qfjuel, a aquelh, a aquello, to that. Ace. aquel, aquella, aquello, that. Abl. de aquel, de aquella, de aquello, from that. Phir. — Masculine and feminine. (No neuter.) Nom. aqvellos, aquellas, those. Gen. de aqvellos, de aquellas, of those. Dat. daquellus, d aquellas, toihose. Ace. aqucllos, aque/las, those. Abl. dd aquellos, de aquellas, from those. This third sort of pronouns expresses an object very. kiistant from the person wlio speaks, as well as from the })crson to wliom the speech is directed. The adjective ctro, otra another, is often joined with esle and ese, taking away the e, as esiotro, estotra -, csotro, sotra, other. Example : Estotra hombre this other man, tstotra njuger this other woman, esolro hombre that other man, esotra muger that other woman. Relative and interrogative pronouns. Of cuyo, cuya; cuyos, cuyas, whose. This pronoun cuyo whose, of whom, of which, is re- lative and interrogative 5 observing that it ought to agree with the thing possessed, and not with the possessor, as in English. Example : Cuyo es este libro? Whose book is this ? Es elmio. It is mine. Cuyas son estas plumas 9 Whose pens are these ? Son suyas, They are his. Es una 'Senora cuyas prendas son cortocvdns, She is a lady whose ijualities are known. 33 _ .. 36 OF PRONOUNS. Pro7ioufis relative and interrogative. • Qwewhat, is interrogative^ has no plural, and is com- mon to both genders. (^uien who, is also interrogative, and makes quienes in the plural. Example : — Es a Dios a quien es preciso acudir, It is to God to whom we must have recour-,e. De nos otros mis- mos es de quienes se ha de tener miedo. It is of ourselvc that we ought to be afraid. The following pronouns are declined with the definite ariicle. Sing. — Masculine, feminine, and neuter. Nom. elr/ual, la qual, lo qunl, which or who. Gen. de el qtjal, de la qnal, de lo qual, of which. Dat. d el qual, d la qual, d lo qual, to which. Ace. el qual la qual, lo qual, which. Abl. de el qual, de la qual, de lo qual, from which. Plur. — Masculine and feminine (No neater.) Nom. los quales, las quales, which. Gen. de los quales, de las quales, of which. Dat. ^ los quales, d las qualts, to which. Ace. los quales, las quales, which. j Abl. de los quales, de las quales, from which. I Indefinite pronouns. ^ These pronouns are so called, because they express r vague and indeterminate object. They are as lollov< without plural. Nddie, ninguno, none, no man, Ninguno, ninguna, not one. Ni uno, ni una, not one. Nluhoniotro, ni una ni otra, *» .. Jfi UTios ni otros, ni unas ni otros, J OF PKONOUNS. jy Uno y otro, una y otra, \ k f h Unos y otros, unas y otras, S Cada, each. Cada uno, cada una, every one, every body. Un olro, una otra, } ,, ' one another. J Unos otros, unas otras e ro, e oras \ ^f ^^j^g^g^ ^^ others, or other people. A olro, a otras , J But when this word others is governed by a substan- tive, then it is rendered in Spanish by ageno,agena,agenos, ogenas, nccording to the gcnd<;r and number ot the iioun to which it refers. Example.— Porque nadie puede disponer de lo ageno, Because nobody can dispose of another's property. Alguno, alguna ; algunos, algunas, some, somebody. Mucho, mucha-j muchos, muckas, many. The following govern the subjunctive. QuaIquier/2, plur. qualesquiera, whatever. Quien, el que, aquel que, whoever, whosoever. Qualquiera ; que, por mas que, whatever it be, whatever may be done. Qualquiera cosa que, por mas que, whatever thing it may be, whatever thing may be done. Cada, algo, nadie, fulanu, fulana, such a man or wo- man J and zutano, such and such a one — have no plural ; but the others naake their plural by the addition of aa s or es. "S$ OF VERBS. V Chapter V, OF VERBS This chapter i-j divided into eight sections : — The Jirst speaks of the nature and species of verbs ; the second treats of their different moods, tenses, numbers, and persons ; the third gives the conjugations of the auxi- liaries, hahr and tener to have, ser and estar to be, and contains a list of those conjugated with to have in Enghsh, and vviih ser or estar in Spanish j the fourth comprehends the three regular conjugations j the Jijth explains how to conjugate the reflected verbs ; the sixth gives a method of conjugating verbs with negations and interrogations, with and without pronouns j the seventh has for its object the irregular conjugations j and the eighth treats of the impersonal verbs in the three con- jugalions. SECTION I. Dtjifiition of verts. A verb, according to the Latin etymology verrum, signifies word, to denote tliat the verb is the word by excellence, and the principal part of speech. A verb expresses an action done or received, and de- notes only the state of its nominative case : from thence arise three distinct sorts of verbs, which are called 1. Jctivo, Active. 2. Pasivo, Passive. Z.NeutrOt Neuter. The active verb expresses the action of its nominative upon some person or thing j as, Dios castigara d los malos, God will punish the wicked. OF VERJS. S9- The pas3ive verb expresses the action received by the nominanvecase ; as Los huenos serdn recompen^ados, Thfi just will be rewarded. The neuter verb expresses merely the state of its no- minative J a^, me duermo, I am quite sleepy : descaexco, ] languish, or, I urn languishing : it also expresses an action, which remains in the subject which provinces it ; as cay<^Oy 1 fall ; paseo, I walk j hago, I do or act, &c. Veibsare again subdivided into six classes, viz. 1. JuxUinr^ Auxiliary. 4. Impersonal, Impersonal. 2. Befleiiuo, Reflective. 5. Regular, llcgnlar. 3. Personal, Personal. (5. Irregular, Irregular. 1. TlieauxiVary verbs are of two sorts in the Spanish langunge, viz. h(,ber, to have 3 and ser, to be. Tliey are called Auxiliaries because \.\\cy help to conjugate all other Verbs in iheir compound teni^rs. 2. The reflective verbs arc those which have for sub- ject and oi;iect the same person or thing j as yo me levantOt I riee } .v^ wearrepunto, ^ repent, 5:c» 3. The personal verbs are those which are conjugated wiih three persons in tlie s-ngulrr number and three in the plural, in all tenses of the indicative and subjai.c- tive moo.d ; as lidblo, luiblas, hdbla y hcilldmos, habldls, Jidl'Ian, I speak, thou speakest, S:c. 4. The impersonal verbs are all those which are used only in the th.rd person lingular of each tense ; as llueie, it rains; hi'ele, it smells; gusta, it pleases. 5. The regular verbs are those which are conjugated in all their tenses and persons, as the verb of the same final in the intinitive, which Is given for example in re- gular copjuga:ions ; thus for instance tantar to sing, c.yii'htr to help, are regular of ilie tirst conjugat on, because they r.re coi.j (gated like huLlar to speak, in all their tenses and persons. E 2 40 Ot VEHBS. 6. The irregular verbs are those which deviate in some tenses and persons from the regu^ar verbs of the same conjugation which is given for example; thus dar to give, is irregular, because it is not conjugated like hahlar, though it has the same final in the innnitive mood. SECTION 11. Of mood'!, tenses, numherSf a?id persons of verbs. Verbs are necessarily subject — 1st. To moods, whereby they express in what manner a thing comes to pass: 2d. lb tenses, by the help of which they represent the thing spoken of, as present, past, and future : 3d.To numler and persons, that they may agree u ith their nominative case. This assemblage U termed conjugation, and is tiothing else than tlie art of varying the diifi^rent moods, tenses, and persons o/a verb, 3. Of moods, ^ Moods are the difiVrent manners of using a verb. There are four moods in a verb ', the Infinitive, the In- ticatlve, the Subjunctive, and the Imperative. The infinitive mood, which is the root of a verb, and by which the conjugations are distinguished from each other, expresses an action, but in an indetermined sense, without specifying any particular agent, as hablar to speak, caw^ar to sing, /zacertodo, &:c. The indicative mood shows directly and positively the different tenses of a verb: it forms a sense of itself inde- pendently of what precedes or follows j as quiero I am v-il i g, veo I see, hablo I speak. The subjunctive mood denotes also different tenses, but dependently on the verb or conjunction antecedent; as Quaiquier mirito que tengamos es menester que seamos mcdestos. Whatever merit we may have we must be mo- OF vr:EEs. 41 dest. If yon take oxxt ts memster que, die rest, seavios ■luodcsioSy has not a complete sense. The imperative mood expresses the action of drisiring, c'-mmanding, exhorting, &c. as reffjondaine answer me, Larese las marws, la Loca, y la carOj Waah your liands, your mouth, your face, kc. 2. Of tenses, Ten«es are different terminations, which show if what is expressed by a verb has any reference to the present, past, or future time. Their names are fc und in the fol- lowing conjugations, and their use is fully explained iu; the Syntax, chap. 15, l6, and 17. 3 . Ofnumlerss a nd persons. There are two numbers in a verb, which are the singu- lar and the plural. The singular is used when we speak of one J as Su licrmano murid, His broiher is dead 3 and the plural when we speak of more than one j as .Sus hrvianas son jriuy hermosas. His sisters are very hand- some. There are three persons in each number: the fiist when we speak of ourselves ; as hadlo i speak, hab/a* vius we speak : the second when we speak to another ; as huilas thou speakest ; and the third in speaking of another y as hub la he si^eaks. SECTION III. Conjugation of the auxiliary verb haber to have. Infinitive mood. Present tense> haher, to hn\-e. Gerund, haliendo, having. Participle,- habidoy had.. E 3 42 OF VERBS. Comp. of the present, haler halido, to have had. Corap. of the gerund, hahiendo habido, having had. Indicative mood. Present tense. Sing. I, yoke, I have, 2. tu has, thou hast. 3. el hd, he has. Plur. 1. nosotroshemos, or halemos J we have. 2. vosotros habeis, you have. 3. ellos hdn, they have. Imperfect tense. Sing. 1 . yo habia, I had. 2. tu habias, thon hadst. 3. el habia f he had. PJur. 1. nosotros habiamos, we had. 2. vosotros habiaiSy you had. 3. e//oi' habian, they had. Preterite tense. Sing.' 1. yo hube, I had. 2. /M hubiste, thou hadst. 3. eZ /iM^o, he had. Plur. 1. nosotros hubim OS, we had. 2. vosotros hubisteis, you had. 3. e//o5 hubieron, they had. Future tense. Sing. 1. yo habr^, I shall have. 2. tu halrds, thou shalt have. 3. elhahrd, be shall have. OF YESBS. 43 Plur. 1 . nosolros habremos, we shall have. 2. vosotros haMis. you shall have. 3. ellos hahrdiiy they shall have. Compound of the present. Sing. I. he habiJo, I have had. 2. has hn'ido, thou hast had. 3. hd habi io, he has had. Plur. 1. hem OS hah tdo J we have had. 2. haheis habilo, yon have had. 3. hdn habido, they have had. Compound of the imperfect. Sing. 1. habia habido, I had had. 2. ho bias habido, thou hadst had. 3. halia habido, he had had. Plur. 1. habiamos habido, we had had. 2. hal'ia'is habido, you had had. 3. hid'ian habido, they had had. Compound of the preterite. Sing. 1 . hube habido, I had had. 2. hubiste habido, thou hadst had. 3. Aa^o habido, he had had. Plur, 1. huMmos habido, we had had. 2- hubisteis habido, you had had. 3. hubihon habido, they had had. Compound of the future. Sing. 1 . habre habido, I shall have had. 2. halrds habido, thou shalt have had. 3. Aa^ra habido , he shall have had. 44 OF VERBS. PiUr. 1. hnhr4mos hapidoy we shall have hnd, 2. h^hdls halidoy you shall have had. 3. ha Iran habidoy they shall have had. Suljtmdtive mood,, Present ieme. f^ing. ] . q7ie hdyoy I may have. 2. que hdijasy thou nwyst have* 3. que hdija, he may have. Plur. 1. que haydmosy we may have.. 2. que hnydis, you may have, 3. que hdyan, they may have* Imperfeci tense. Sing. I'^yo hahriay I should have. 2. tu halrlasy thou shouldst have. 3 . el hakria, he should have. Plur. 1. nosotros hahriamos, we should have; 2. vosolros hahrlaisy you should have. 3. ellos halriauy they should have. Preterite suljunctivet Sing. 1. hubi&se or huMera, I might have. 2. huhieses or hubieraSy thou mightst have. 3. hubiise or hubie'ray he might have, Plur. 1:. kubUs(;mos or hulieramos^ we might have. 2. kuliies.eis or hubierais,^ you might have. 3. hubihen or hubieran, they might havxj. Future subjunctive. Sing. 1 . qiiando hiibi^rCy when L shall have. 2. quando hubieres, when thou shalt have. 3. quando kubUrc, when he shsU have,. OF V£BBS. 45 .r. 1. quando huhUremos, when we shall have, 2. quando hubicrei^, when you shall have. 3. quando huhitretif when diey shall have. Compound of the present* Sing. I . hnya halido, I may have had. 2. hayas hahido, thou mayst have had. 3. haya habidOf he may have had. . riur. 1. hayamos halido^ we may have had. 2. hdyais halido, you may have had. 3. hdyan habido, they may have had. Compound of the imperfect. Sing. J . Juihrla halido, I should have had. 2. hahias halulo^ thou jihouldst, &c, 3. liabria habido, he should, &cc. ?h\r. I, kabriamos habido, wo should have had, 3. habriais habido, you should have had, 3, habrian habido, they should have had. Compound of the preterite. Sing. 1. huhi4se or hubi^a habido, I might have had. 2. huhieses or hul-ieras. habidoj thou mightsi, &c. 3. hubiese or hubiera habido, he might, &c. Plur. 1 . hubicsemos or hubieramos habido, we might have had. 2. hubie'ieis or hubiin is hahido, you might, &c. 3. hubiesen or kulietan habido, they might, &c. Compound of the future. Sing. 1. quando hubiere habido, when I shall have had. 2. quando hubwres halido, when thou shalt, &c. 3. quando hubiere habido, when he shall, &c. 4(5 OF VERBS. Plur. 1. quando hubieremos habido, when v/Gshail], kc, 2. quando hub'iereis habido, when you, ike. 3. quando hubitren habido, when they, &o. Observation upon the future subjunctive. The learner must be very attentive not to use the fu- ture indicative for the future subjunctive, and vice versa, as some people pretend ; for tho"»e who write or speak grammatically will never say quando habre for quando kubiere : — Let this be considered as a general rule for all 'the other verbs. We must further observe, that this verb has no imperative belonging to it, and serves only in the compound tenses of other verbs. Conjugation of the irregular verb tener^ to have or to hold, I^ifinU'ivs fftmd» Present tenie, hner, to bav^^ w to bold, Gerund, teniendo^ hfiving t-'f holding, Participle, tenido, had or helci. Comp. of the present, haber ttnido, to hr.ve had or held, Comp. of the gerund, ha biendo tenido j\\3i\i\'\Q^hzdLQr\'\^\<\, Indicative mood. Present tense. Sing. 1 . yo tem^o, I have or hold. 2. /// tieneSf thon hast, ^c. 3. el tiine, he has, &c, Plur. 1 . tenemos, we h:ive or hold, 2. tenes, yo have, he. 3. tier, en, they hav.", tvc. OP VERBS. 47 Imperfect tense. . Sing. 1. tenia, J had. 2. teidcL', thou hadst. 3 tehia, he had, Plur. 1. teniamoSj we had. 2. teniais, you had. 3. tmiaUi they had. Preterite tense. Sing. 1. ^i/z-e, I had, 2. tuviste, thou hadst. 3 /zii-o, he had. Plur. 1. tuvinws, we had. 2. tuvisteis, you had. 3. tuvieron, they had. Future tense. Sing. 1. tendrc, I shall have. 2. tendras, thou shalt have. 3. /t'?2G?m', he shall have, Plur, \. tendremosy we shall have. 2. tendrcisy you shall have. 3. tend) dr., they shall have. Compound of the present. Sing. 1 . he tenido, I have had. 2. /i(/5 tenido, thou hast had. 3. hd tenido, he has had. Plur. 1 . hemos tenido, we have had. 2. AaZ'ei^ /e«i thou mientst be. estuvieses or estuvieras, } ^ 3. fuSse or fuera, ^ ^le micrht be estuviese or estuviera, 5 *^ Plur. I, fuesemosox fueramos, > • wu^ '^ . ;' . •' > we might be. estumesemos or estuvieramos,^ * 2. fueseis or fuerais, > • 1 1 h estuvieseis or estuvUrais^ 5 ^°^ "^'^ ^ ^' estuviesm or estuvieran, S ^ ^ Future tense. Sing. 1. quando fuere or estuviere, when I «hall be. 2. quando fueres or estuvieres, when thou, &c. 3. quando fuere or estuviere, when he, &c. Plur. 1 . quando fueremos or estuvieremos, when we, &c. 2. quando fuereis or estuviereis, when you, &:c. 3. quando fuer en, or estuvieren, when they, &c. Compound of the present. Sing. 1 . Ac(ya 5zVo or estado, I may have been. 2. Aa^/a^ 5zafo or estado, thou mayst, &c. 3. Aa3/a ^iflfo or estado, he may, &c. Plur. 1. haydmos sido or estado, we may have been. 2. haydis sido or estado, you may, &c. 3. ^a2/a72 5ic?o or estado, they may, &c. Compound of the iinperfect. Sing. 1. hahria sido or estado, I should have been. 2. hahrias sido or estado, thou shouldst have been. 3. halria sido or estado, he should have been. Plur. 1. hahriaviossido or estado, we should have been. 2. halriau sido or estado, you should have been. 3. hahrian sido or estado, they should have been. OF VERBS. 35 Compound of the preterite. Sing. I. huliera, or hiil'iese,) t • u. i. u side or estado, ' ^ I might have been. 2. huhuras, ox hulieses, > ^, • u. .u i sido or estado. \ th«"ra'ghtsthavebeen. 3. hubiera, or hubiese,) , • i ^ i , «rfoor««,rfo, |f'ei»>ghthavebeen. Plur. 1. hubieramos, or hubiesemos.) . ,, „ sido or estado, ' ^ we might, &c. 2. hubierais, or hubieseis, ) • i « .i^oore.Wo, 'J you might, &c. 3. hubieran, or fill bitsen.) ,, • i „ ii^o or «/ac/o, J ^^^y '"'S^t' ^^^ Compound of the future. Sing. 1. quando hubiere } , r i „, 5irfo or .5/arfo, \ ^^^" ^ ^^^11 ^^^^ been. 2. (jiiando hubieres } , , , , , 5zWo or e5/aio, \ ^^^^ ^^°" ^^^^^ ^^^e been. 3. quando hubiere } , . , „ , sido or e-^Wo, ^ ^^'^" ^^ ^^^^ ^^^e been. Plur. 1. quando hubieremos ) , sido or w^a^o, J ^b^" ^'^ ^^^ll have been. 2. quando hubiereis) , , „, ^f^o or e^^arfo, \ ^^®° >'«" ^^^^ ^^ve been. 3. quando hubihen) , ., , „, .frfo or estado, \ ^^^'^ ^^^X ^^^^ ^^ve been. Imperative mood. Sing. (no first person.) 2. se or e^/a /«, be thou. 3. sea or e^/e el, let him be. Plur. 1 . seamos or estemos, let us be. 2. 5erf or estdd, be you. 3. sean or w/t«, let them be. 5^. OF VERBS. Observations upon the verbs ser and estar (in English) to be. The difference between these two verbs is so consider- able that the beginner cannot be too well acquainted with them, in order to make a right use of them either in composition or in speaking, since both have only one single signification in English, which is— ^o he. The verb ser in Spanish is used for the natural qualities of men, women, or things, either good or bad j as ser hombre to be a man, ser alto to be tall, ser pequeao to be little or short, ser mdlo to be naturally wicked, ser bueno to be good or honest ; as Este homhre es caritativo. This man i.s charitable ; Esta mvger es piadosa, This woman is de- vout. Whereas estar serves only for accidental things, or denoting some place, or other adjunct quality ; as esidr en Paris, to be in Paris ; estoy lejos de Madrid, I am far from Madrid : — should I say, Soij lejos de Madiid, I should give to understand that I am myself the space of ground from Madrid to this place, which would be com- plete nonsense : Mi casa es butnay pero esta mal distri- buida, My house is good, yet it is ill contrived. By these examples you see the essential being of the house exprefised by the verb ser, and the accidental by the verb estar. SECTION IV. Of the regular conjugations. The respective conjugations are formed by the differ- ent terminations of verbs, in their tenses and persons, and particularly in the infinitive mood. Now the infini- tive mood of all the Spanish verbs ends in one of the three follov/ing terminations, viz. — 1. ar; as habldr, to speak. OP VERBS. 57 2. er; as lehir, to drink. 3. irj assufrir, to suffer. First conjugation — Hablar to speak. Irifinitive mood. Present tense, hablar, to speak. Gerund, haOlando, speaking. Participle, hahlddo, spoken. Comp. of the present, haber hablddo, to have spoken, Comp. of the gerund, liabimdo hablddo, having spoken. Indicative mood. Present tense. Sing, 1. hdblo, I speak. 2. /idblas, thou speakest. 3. hdbla, he speaks. Plur. 1 . habldmos, we speak. "* 2. hab/dis, yor. speak. 3. hdblan, they speak. N. B. I have omitted tlie personal pronouns, because the Spaniards make use of them in interrogative sen- tences only, each person being sufficiently distinguished from one another. Imperfect tense. Sing. 1. habldba, I did speak. 2. habldbas, thou didst speak. 3. habldba, he did speak. Plur. 1. habldbamosy we did speak. 2. habldbais, you did speak. 3, halldban, they did speak. j 58 OF VERBS. Preterite tense. Sing. 1. hahle, I spoke. 2. habldste, thou spokest. 3. hallo, bespoke. Plur. 1 , habldmosy we spoke. 2. habldsteisy you spoke. 3. habidron, they spoke. Future tense. Sing, \. hahlari, I shall speak. 2. haliards, thou shalt speak. 3, hablard, he will speak. Plur. 1, hablar^mos, we shall speak. 2. hablar^is, you will speak. 3. hablardn, they will speak. Compound tenses, Comp. of the pres. Ae kablddo, I have spoken. Comp.of the imperf. Aa/;^a hablddo, I had spoken. Comp. of the pret, hube hahlddot I had spoken, Comp. of the fut. hab r 4 hablddo 1 1 shall have spoken, N.B. Though I have only put the first person of ever> compound tetise, the scholar must not neglect to learn the remaining persons, and the whole by heart, as he did in the auxiliary verbs. Subjunctive mood. Present tense. Sing, 1. que hable, I may speak. 2. que hdbles, thou mayst speak, 3. que hdbkj he may speak. OF VERBS. 5g lur. I. que hallJmos, we may speak. 2. que kableiSf you may speak. 3. que hablen, they may speak. Imperfect tense. Sing. 1. hallaria, I should speak. 2. habJariaSy thou shouldst speak. 3. hah I aria y he should speak. nr. 1. hablarimnos, we should speak. 2. hallariaisy you should speak. , 3. hahlarian, tliey should speak. Preterite tense. . 1 . hahldse or habldra, I might speak, 2. hahldses or habhiras, thou mightst speak. 3. ha blase or hablura, he might speak. , 1. hahlasemos or habluramos, we might speak. 2. hahldseis or habldrais, you might speak. 3. habldsen or habldran, they might speak. Future tense. . 1. quaiido Iiablare, when I shall speak. 2. quando habldres, when thou shalt speak. 3. quando habldre, when he shall speak. . 1 . quando habldremos, when we shall speak, 2. quando hablureis, when you shall speak. 3. quando habldren, when they shall speak. Compound tenses. p. of the pres. hdi/a hablddo, I may have spoken. p. of the imperf. habria hablddo, I would have, &c. tp. of thepret. hub eis e or hub i*! , . , ^ , . erahahUdo. > I m.ght have. &c. ip. of the fut. hubiire hablddo, I shall have, &o. 60 OF VERBS. Imperative mood. Sing. (no first person.) 2, hdhla tu, speak thou. 3. hahle el, let him speak. Piur. 1 . hallemos, let us speak. 2. hah Lad, speak you. 3. hdhlen, let them speafc. An Alphaletical List of regular verbs in ar conjugated like hablar. Spanish. English. A Ahorddr to board ^celdr to iinish Acomoddr to adjust Acusdr to a( cuse Adelantdr to forward ^frentdr to affront ALabdr to praise Alejdr < to set at a di- l stance Allandr to smooth Alquildr to let on hire Alwnhrdr to light Ahdr to take up Amansdr to tame Amdr to love uirnedranidr to put in fear Ammazdr to threaten Ampardr to protect Animdr to encourage Aparejdr to make ready- Apedr to alight Aprovechdr to make progress Arrancdr to tear up Arrehatdr to snatch Atdr to tie Aventurdr to venture Aynddr to help Azotdr to whip B Bamloledr to totter Burajdr to shuflie cards Buvldr to fiance Besdr to kiss Borrdr to blot out c Caldr to dig Calldr ^ to be silent Camindr to walk Cansdr to tire Canldr to sing Casdr to marry Cazdf to hunt Cendr to sup Comprdr to buy- Condendr to condemn Covformdr to conform Contestdr ■''■ ' tb contest Cortdr to cut Cridr to breed Curdr to cure D Danzdr to dance Desafidr to challenge Desarraigdr to root up Desampardr to forsake Desprecidr to despise De.muddr to strip DesengaJidr to undeceive OF VEEB3. Ot Despavildr la 1 fto snuff the J \ caudle Gastdr to spend vela Gloriurxe to praise one's self Despavilur S. to awake Goberndr to govern los 6jos Guarddr to keep Despojdr to strip H Dexdr to leave Halldr to find Disfamdr to defame Hartdr to satiate Dispardr to discharge Hereddr to inherit Dumdr E to tame Herrdr fto garnish \ with iron Eckdr to put out Hincdr to trust in Empendr Envidr to engage to send Holgdr < to rest from \ labour Eucantdr to enchant Honrdr to honour Enojdr to anger Hurtdr to steal Ensanchur to widen I Entrdr to come ill Tgnordr to be ignorant Escaramuzdr to skirmish Igualdr to equalize Espantdr to frighten Importundr to importune Estemuddr to sneeze lynprimdr to prime Estimdr to esteem Impiobdr to disapprove F Incitdr to incite Fahricdr to manufacture Injuridr to revile Facilitdr to facilitate Incli/utr to bend FaUifimr to falsify Ificrepdr to reprehend Fechdr to date a letter Inciilcdr to inculcate Fecundiir to make fertile | Indagdr to search FfHtiidr to congratulate i Indicdr to indicate Fidr to trii8t ' hidigndr to irritate Fillrdr to filter , InduUdr to forgive FLanqup.dr to flank or fortify Infmttdr to defame Plechdr to dart ! hgeiiidr to contrive Fletdr to freight a ship ; In molar to sacrifice Floredr ^ r to adora with ' [ flowers Inoculdr to inoculate Insinuur to insinuata Flotdr to rub gently Ifispndr to inspire Fomidr to form 1 Inlentdt to try Fracasdr to break to pieces InvenUir to invent Fraiiquedr to free Irritdr to irritate Frendr to restrain hdr to hoi&t Frisdr to frizzle L Frogdr to make a wall Labrdr to labour Fructificdr to fructify Lacerdr to tear to pieces Fumdr to smoke tobacco Lacfdr to injure Fu7iddr /to found, to "1^ establish Logrimdr to shed tears Lamentdr to lament G Lanzdr to dart Gafdr to hook Largdr to loosen Galanledr Ganir to court to gain Lastdr 5 to pay for aa- } other m OF VERBS. Lastrdr to ballast a ship i Mejvrdr to recover Latinizdr to latinize j Me.ntdr to mention Lavdr to wash j Menosprecidr to undervalue Legal izdr to make lawful Mirdr to look Leirdr to depute Mihgdr to mitigate Legiiimdr to leg;itimate Modcrnr to moderate I evanldr to lift up Mnfdr to mock Lrvdr to carry Mnjdr to wet Lilrdr to free MuUficdr to mollify Li,e:dr to tie Mostidr to show Limdr to file Muddr [ to move, to \ change Limit ur to linut Limpidr to clean . ^ Liquidnr to melt Nadur to swim Litigdr to litigate Narrdr to relate Lixdr to polish Naturalizdr to naturalize Lifigdr to hurt Naregdr to navigate LI a mar to call Negocidr to negotiate Llcgdr to arrive Nomhrdr to name Lit/idr to iill up Noticidr to notice Llevdr < to carry< to ( transport Numerdv to number O Llorar to weep Ohservdr to observe Lodr Lpgrar to praise Ocultdr to conceal to gain 0< updr to cccupy Lt'gredr { to borrow ( upon interest Ojedr Oividdr to ogle to forget Luchdr to struggle Opitdr to obstruct Lucuhrr.r to study by night Opindr to argue M Ofjidr to elect JMachacdr to poundor break Opugndr j to attack, to ( resist Macizdr ta stop a hv.le M.'Kuldr to spot, to slain Oidendr to put in order Magnijicdr to extol Orxir tolufF MaLalaratdr to lavish Ostentdr to demonstrate Maleficidx to adulterate Obirgdr to condescend Malicidr ^ til give a bad I meaning P Pa^dr to pay Malogrdr to disappoint Palpdr to feel, to touch Mtthindr to inform Against Paramentdr to adorn MallraUlr to use ill Puragnndr to compare jManddr to command Partdr to chatter Mar car t|) mark Participdr to share Margindr to annote Pasenr to walk Marindr to man a ship Pdedr to fight Martiltdr to hammer Penetrdr to penetrate Mascdr to chew Perdondr to forgive Matdr t<. kill Perturtdr to interrupt Mec idr to meditate Pinidr to paint Medrdr to improve Porfdr to contend OF VERDi. Pnrtcdr to carry- S \ PuKirUitdr to make easy Sacdr to remove Pustdr to bet S'lcidr to SHtisfy Precidr to value Sacri/icdr to sacrifice Piedomindr J to predomi- ( naie Saltcdr Sahuldr to assault to salute Preginitdr to question Snlvdr to save Premidr to reward i ' Sa/idr to cure Prestdr to lend SegdT to reap Prwdr to deprive ' i 6'ein.edr to plunder Prnhdr to try Siiidr to besiejrc Prnlov^dr to prolong Sf)b exalldr to surprise Promnlg'lr t'> publish Sut/dr to sweat Provocdr to provoke Sujeldr to subdue PuL'licdr to publish Sustenidr to sustain Q T Quelrantdr to break Tafldr to cut Qiii'ddr to stay Tapdr to cover Quemdr to burn Ttirtamudedr to stammer Quitdr to take away Ttntdr to try R 1 Te>tldr to bequeath Rijdr to split Tmir to dart Roledr to make thin Tocdr to touch Rfilldr to grra'e Trubajdr to work Rert'/dr to draw back Trincdr to chop Jichu.dr to refuse Trompdr to deceive Rftirdr to retire 1 U V Reyudr to reign I Ihdr to use Robdr J to rob, to '; plunder 1 Usurpdr \ Vacidr fo usurp to empty • Rvindr to ruin 1 Vncildr to sta.c:j[jer Rumidr to ruminate 1 rexdr to molest. m The second regular conjugation in er. Injinitlve mood. Present tense, Gerund, Participle, Comp. of the present, Comp. of the gerund, lel^r, to drink. heliendo, drinking. leido, drunk. ha her helidoy to have drunk. hahiendo belido, having drunk, g2 64 «P VERBS. Indicative mood. Present tense. Sing. 1. lebo, I drink. 2. bUes, thou drinkest, 3. bebe, he drinks. Plur, 1. bebemos, we drink. 2. hebeis, you drink. 3. b^ben, they drink. Imperfect tense, Sin^. 1, bebla, I did drink. 2. bebiasy then didst drink. 3. bebia, he did drink, Plur. 1. bebinmos, we did drink. 2. bebiais, you did drink. 3. lebian, they did drink. Preterite tense, Sing. 1. ^;^^7, I drank. 2. leliste, thou drnnkest. 3. i-eiid, he drank. Plur. 1. beliinos, we drank."" 2. bebisteis, you drank. 3. bebieroji, they drank. Future tense. Sing, 1. belere, 1 shall drink. 2. beh era's, thou shalt drink. 3. beberd, he shall drink. OF VERBS. 60 plur. 1. lelerimos, we will drink, 2. l-eberfis, you will drink. 3. leberdn, they will drink. • • Cowponnd tenses. Comp. of the present, he hebidoy I have drunk. Comp. of the imperf. habia bebido, I had drunk. Conap. of the pret. kube bebido, I had drunk. Comp. of the fut. habre i-ebido, 1 shall have drunk. Subjunctive mood, . Present tense. Sing. 1. quebtba, that I may drink. 2. que bebas, that thou mayst drink. 3. que beba, that he may drink. Plur. 1 . que bebdmos, that we may drink. 2. que bebdisy that you may drink. 3. que beban^ that they may drink. Imperfect tense. Sing. I. bt'beriay I should drink. % beberiaSy thou shouldst drink. 3. beberitty he should drink. Plar. 1 . beberiamosy we should drink. 2. beberioisy you should drink. 3. beberlan, they should drink. Preterite tense. Siog.. 1. que bebiese or bebUra, that I might drink. 2- que bfbieses or bebieraSy that thou mightst drink. 3, que bebiese or bebidra^ that he- might driuk«- g3 66 OF VERBS. Plur. I. que lehUsemos or behieramos, that we might drink. 2. que lehiese'is ox lelierais, that ye might, &c« 3. que hebiesen or bebieran, that they, &c. Future tense. Sing. 1. quando bebiere, when I shall drink. 2. quando bebLres, when ihoii shall drink. 3. quando bebiere, when he shall drink. Plur. 1 . quando bebieremos, when we shall drink. 2. quando bebiereis, when you shall drink. 3. quando bebiereUj when they -shall drink. Compound tenses. Comp. of thepres. hay a bdido, I may have drunk. Comp. of the imperf. habria bebido, I should have drunk. Comp. of the pret. hubiese or hubiera bebido, I might have drunk. Comp. of the fut. kuli&re bebido, I shall have drunk. Imperative mood. Sing. (no first person.) 2. bebe lu, drink thou. 3. beba tl, let him drink. Plur. \. hebdmoSi let us drink. 2. behed, drink you. 3. beban, Jet them drink. An alphabetical list vf regular verbs in er, conjugated like beber. Spanish. Engliih. A Accgir to protect jicometcT to attack Aatectdtr to precede ApreheiidcT to apprehend Arrcmettr to assail suddenly B Barn'r to sweep I Comer I' Conceder to eat Conceder to grant OF VERBS. 67 Cometer . to commit Correspondtr to correspond Correr to run . E Emprender to undertake Ksconder to hide M Meter to put O Ofender to offend P Prometcr to promise R Reprekendtr to reprove Respavder to answer T Tem/r to fear V render to sfiU. rAir^f conjugation. — Of the regular verb subir, ^o go up. Injimtwe mooi. Present tense, sulir, to go np. Gerund, suLiendo, gouig up. Participle, sui-ido, gone up, Conip. of the present, hder subidoj to have gone up. Conop. of the gerund, hdliendo sulidoy liaving gone up. Indicative mood. Present tense. Sing. 1. sulo, I go up. 2. siihesy thou goest up. 3. suhe, he goes up. Plur. 1. subimos, we go up. 2. suhis, you go up. 3. suten, they go up. Imperfect tense. Sing. 1. sulia, I did go up. 2. subias, thou didst go up. 3. itt^ia, he did go up. 6s OF VERBS. Plur. 1 . suMavws, we did go up. 2. suUais, you did go up. 3. sulian, they did go up. Preterite tense. Sing. 1 . suU, I did go up. 2. suhiste, thou didst go up. 3. siili6, he did go up, Plur. ] . siibimos, we did go up. 2 suhisteisy you did go np; 3. suhieron, they did go up. Future tense. Sing. 1. suHre, I shall go up. 2. suhirds, thou shalt go up, 3. subirct, he shall go up. Plur. I. snbiremos, we shall go up. 2. subirdsy you shall go up. 3- subirdn, they shall go up. Compound tenses. Comp. of the pres. he subido, I have gone up. Comp. otihe iinperf habia suhidoy I had gone up. Comp of the pret. hube subido, I had gone up. Comp. of the fat. habr4 subido, I shall have gone up. * Subjunctive mood'. Present tense. Sing. I . que sicba, that I may go up. 2. c/Ne subas, that thou mayst go up=K 3. que siiba, that he may go up.. OF VEABS. ^ Plur. 1. que suhumos, that we may go up. 2. quesuhuis, that you may go up. 3. que suban, that they may go up. Imperfect tense. Sing. 1. suliria, I shoulJgo up. 2. suliHasy thou shcjuldst go up. 3. suiiria, he should go up. Plur. 1. suliriamos, we should go up. 2. subiriaist you should go up. 3. subiriaii, they should go up. Preterite tense. Sing. 1. que sulitse or sulk'ra, that I might go up. 2. que suhiises or subliras, that thou ui p ) tst, &c. 3. que subl4se or subUra, that he might go up. Plur. 1. que subiesemos or subi^ramos, that we might go up. 2. que suhiiseis or subi'rais, that you might, &c. 3. ywe subiisen or subieran, that they might, &c. Future tense. Sing. 1. quando subicre, when I shall go up. 2. quando subidres, when thou shalt go up. 3. quando subi^re, when he shall go up. Plur. 1 . quando subieremos, when we shall go up. 2. quando subureis, when you shall go up. 3. quando subiiren^ when they shall g« up. Compound tenses, Comp. of the pres, haya subido, I may have gone up, Comp, of the imperf. habria subido, I should have, 6cc. 70 OF VEHBS. Comp. of the pret. huliese or huhiira suHdo, I migh have gone up. Comp. of the fut. hubiere subido, I shall have gone up 5ing. Plur. Imperative mood. (no first person.) 2. sule, go thou up. 3. suba, let him go up. 1. subumos, let us go up. 2. sub id y go you up. 3. suban, let them go up. J list of regular verbs of the third conjugation. Spanish. A Alatir AhiniiT /tTmdir AtuTiLir B Battr BuUir C Corrhotir Coinpiimir Cotirurrir Coiifiniiir Ciwfutidir ConatriiW Cutihiir Cuhi tr D De^trvir JJisnirrtr J)ii,miniiir E Flidir y.hidir Emtr Escah'llir y.sml'tr Escurrir English,. Eyctriwif to fence hxhtbtr to exhibit to abate Exist tr to exist to open Exprinur to express to molest Extingutr to extinguish to add • F to stua to beat to boil Fingtr Fro/Ktr to fei^ to wrmkle hund'tr to melt G to fight Gun'ir to yelp to compress H to concur Uiiir to fly to consume IJuvdir to sink to confound I to construe Imprim'r luclii'ir Infvndh to contribute to cover to print to include to pour in , Instriitr to instruct to rum to discourse M to dimmish Mcdir N to measure to weaken Xuliir to nourish to elude O to impose on Ohtrurr to obstruct to erect P to slip away Parir to bring forth to wtite Part'rr to depart to drip Permit'tr to permit OP VERBS. 71 Prohibir PuUt R nhir S cril'iT istir to prohibit to smootli to check to restrain to subscribe to subsist S.frir ^ Supiimir T Tuiidir U Unir Urdir Z Zurcir to suffer to suppress to shear cloth to unite to warp to darn. I Conjugation of a regular and reflective verb in ar. Levantarse, to rise. — Lat. surgere, Injinitive mood. Present tense, levantarse, to rise. Gerund, Itvantandose, rising. Participle, levantddo, risen. Indicative mood. Present tense. Sing. 1. me levSnto, I rise. 2. te ievantas, thou rises.t. 3. se lei'dnta, he rises. Plur. 1 . 7205 levantdmos, we rise. 2. OS levantdis, you rise. 3. se levdntan, they rise. Imperfect tense. Sing. 1 . me levantdla, I did rise. 2. te levantdbas, thou didst rise, 3. se levantdba, he did rise. 7^ OF VESB8. Plur. I. nos levantalamosy we did rise. 2. OS levaitdbaiSy you did rise. 3. se levantdban, they did rise. Preterite tense. Sing. I. me levavte, I rose. 2. te levantaste, thou rosest. 3, se Levanto, he rose. Plur. 1. 7205 levantdmoSf we rose. 2. OS levantasteiSf you rose. 3. se levantdron, ^ they rose. Future tense. Sing. 1 . me levantare, I will rise. 2. te le van tar as, thou wilt rise. 3. se levantard, he will rise. Plur. 1. nos levantarimosy we will rise. 2. OS levari tar eis, you will rise. 3. se levantardn, they will rise. Compound tenses. Comp. of the pres. me he levantddo, I have risen. Comp. of the imperf.me habia levantddo, I had risen. Comp. of the pret. me hube levantddo, I had risen. Corap. of the fut. me hahre levantddo, I shall have. Sec. Subjunctive mood. Present tense. Sing. 1 . me levdnte, I niay rise. 2. te levdnies, thou rw-yst rise. 3. se lev ante, he may rise. OF VERBS. 75 Piur.. 1 . nos levanthnos, we m?y rise. 2. OS levaiiteis, you may rise. 3. S€ levdnten, they may rise. Imperfect tense. Sing. I, we levantarla, I should rise. 2. f. Plnr. 1. nos rccogemos, we shelter ourselves. 2. OS recogeis, you shelter yourselves. 3. se recdoeUf they shelter themselves. VER8S. 75 imperfect tense, Sfiftg. 1 . ^Td reco^ia, I ckd shelter myself, 2. t(^ fico^ias, thou didst shelter th3'self. 3. se recQota, he did sli«lter himself. • Plur. 1 . no.^ re'cogfafiiof, we did shtjlter ourselves. 2, osrec(Tgi(iis, you did shelter yourselves. 3. se recoofti/if thej« did sftelter themselves. Preterite tense. Sing. 1. me recogt, I sheltered myself. 2. te recogiste, thou shelteredst thyself. 3. se recogld, he sheltered himself. ' Plur, ]. nos reiogimos, we sheltered ourselves. 2. 0/ feeogtsteis, you sheltered yourselvesv 3. se recogit'ro?i, they sheltered themselves. Future terfse. Sing. 1. me recngere, I will shelter myself. 2. te reccgerus, thou wilt shelter thyself. 3. sereiogeray he will shelter himself. Plur. J. TIGS recogeremos, we will shelter ourselves. 2. OS recogereis, yon will shelter yourselves. 3. serecvgcrday they will shelter themselves.. Compound lenses. Comp. of thepres. me he recogido, I have sheltered myself. Comp. of the impe-rf. ?nc halm recogido, I had, &c. Comp. of the pret. vie huh- tecogidn, J Had, &c. Comp. of the fut. me hahre recngid&, I* shall have, &:c., H 2 Subjunciioe mood. Present tense. Sing. 1. me recoja, I may shelter myself. 2. te recojas, thou mayst slielter thyself. • 3. ^e recoja, he may shelter himself. Plur* 1. nosrecnjdmos, we may^shelterourselvc-5. 2. OS recojais, you may shcher yourselves. 3. se reajjan^ they may shelter themselves. Imperfect tense. Sing. \. merecogcria, I should shelter myself. 2. te reCugcrittSt thou shouldst shelter thyself. 3. se reco^eriai he should ilielter himsuli'. Flur. 1. nos ncogeriamos, we should shelter ourselves. 2. OS recogeriais, you should shelter yourselves. 3. se r^coger{a}i, they should shelter themaelves. Pretmte tense. Sing. 1, merecogi^se, or recogi^ra, I might shelter myself, 2. ierecogi^seSf or recogi^ras, thou mightst shel- ter thyself. 3. se recoglese, or recogiera, he might shelter hmiself. Plur, t. nos recogie'semos, or recogk'ramos, we might shelter ourselves, 2. 05 recogieseis, or recogiirais, you might shelter yourselves. 3. ie recogieseriy or reco^eran, they might shel' ter themselves. Future tense. Sing. 1. merecog'ere, I sball shelter myself. 2. /e recngieres, thou shalt shelter thyself. 3. ^e recoglerCf he shall shelter himself. OF VERBS. 7/ Plur. 1, nos recog'teremos, we shall shelter ourselves. '2. OS recogicreisy ycu shall shelter yourselves. 3. se recogit-ren, they shall shelter themselves. Compound tenses. * Gomp. of the pres. me hay a recogtdo, I may have shel- tered myself. Comp. of the imperf. me halrta recogido, 1 should have sheltered myself. Gomp. of the preter. me huhiese or huliera recogido, I might have sheltered myself. Comp, of the future, 7ne hubiere recogilo, I shall have sheltered mysdf. Imperative moad.. iSiiig. (no first person.)' 2. recogete tu, shelter (h) self. 3. recojdseel, let him .theher himself. Flur. 1. reiQJdvtonos, le^ us shelter ourselves. 2. recojdos, ^lelter yourselves. 3, recojan^e vlhs, let tlieiu, shelter themselves. Cqnjugalion of a nJleeliveiKrh of the third, conjugation, in u. Irse, to go away. — Lat. abire. hifinitrve mood. Present tense, irse, to go away. Gerund, yendose, going away., Paiticiple, ido, gone away. h3 78 OF VERBS. Indicative mood. PreserU tense. Sing. 1. me v6if, I go away. 2. te vciSy thou goest away. 3. se vd, he goes away. Plur. 1 . nos vdmos, we go away. 2. OS vdis, you go away. 3. se vdn, they go away. Imperfect tense. Sing. 1 . 77?e iba, I did go away. 2. /e zYflj, thou didst go away. 3. sc iba, he did go away. Plur. I. Tios ibamos, we did go away. 2. OS ibais, you did go away. 3. se iban, they did go away. Preterite tense. Sing. 1 . mefui, I went away. 2. tefuiste, thou wentest away. 3. 5t?/«^, he went away. Plur. 1, nosfulmos, we went away. 2. osfuisteis, you went away. 3. sefti^on, they went away. Future tense. Sing. 1 . TMe ire, I shall go away. 2. t€ iids, thou shalt go away. 3. se ird, he shall go away> Plur. 1 . nos iremos, we shall go away< 2. OS ireiSf you shall go away. 3. se irdri, they shall go away. OP VERBS. 79 Compound tenses. Comp. of the present, 7«e lie Uo, I have gone away. - Comp. of the imperf. me halia ido, I had gone away. Comp. of the preter. me huleido, I had gone away. Comp. of the future^ me halre ido, I shall have, &Ci Suljunctive mood. Present tense. Sing. 1. mevdya, I may go away. 2. te vayast thou mayst go away. 3. se vdya, he may go away. Plur. I . vos vaydmos, we may go away. 3. osvaydis, you may go away. 3. se vuyan, they may go away. Imperfect tense. Sing. 1. meiria, I should go away, 2. te irias, thou shouldst go away. 3. se iria, he should go away. Plur. 1 . nos iriamos, we should go away. 2. OS iriais, you should go away. 3. 4e irian, they should go away. ^ ^ Preterite tense. Sing, l.mefueseoxfuera, I might go away. 2. tefutses oxfueras, thou mighist go away, 3. sefuese or fuer a i he might go away. Plur. 1. nos fu4semos or fuiramos, we might go away. 2. osfueseis or fuerais, yon might go away. 3 sefuesenorfuera?!, they might go away. 80 OF VERBS. Future tense. Sing. 1. quandomefuere, when I sbnll go away. 2. (juando tefutres, when thou shait go away. 3 (juando sefiiere, when he shall go away. Plur. 1. quando nosfueremos, when' we shall, &:c. 2. (juando osfaeieis, when you shall go, &c. 3. quando sej'ueien, when they shall go away. Compound tenses. Crtmp. of the pres. me kni/a ido, I nisy have gone away. Comp.of the imperf. me habria ido, I should liave, &g* Conip. ol the pretcr. mc fiubitse or huliera ido, I might have, &c. Comp.of the fat. mehdiere Ido, I shall have, &:c.- Imperat'we mood. Smg. (no- first person.) 2. vetCy go thou away. 3. vaydse el, let him go away. Plur. 1. vaydvionoSy let us go away. 2 ido , go you away. 3. vayanse ellos, let them go away. gECTION. V. Of passive verbs. The passive verbs are formed by adding to the auxiliary $er, the participle pagsive of the «erb we iiUt3;id t4 con- jugate J as, ser amado, to be loved. Indicative mood. Present tense Sing. 1. soy amddo, I am loved. 2. cres amxidoj thou art loved. ,3. ^s g^rjidilQi Jhe is lovetl* OF VEKBS, Piur. 1. somos amddos, we are loved. ^ 2. sois amddos y you are loved, 3. son amddos, they are loved, &c. and so on, for all the Aioods> tenses, and persons. Reciprocal verbs. Reciprocal verbs are ofter^ confounded with the re- flective ones. There is, however, a greai difference be- tween themr the latter can be conjugated in the singular number, as you may see, page 7 1 j whereas the former have no singular, and can be only conjugated in the plural, as you will see in the following examples. h^inU'we wioo^,— Amarie ^o Iovq pne anothrr, Nos awdmos unos d oiros tier nam en te. We love one another tenderly, Irifinitive woorf.— Pelearse tojtght. Imperfect tense, Se peUalan valientemente, they diil fight one another valiantly, SECTION VI. Conjugation of a series of irregular verbs in an alpha* betical order, A infinitive present. Ahorreccr, to hate. Gerund. aborreciendo, hating. Participle. aborrendo, hated Indicat. pres. abor-rezco, -reces, "rece, alor-recemos, -receis, -recen. Imperfect. abor-rena, -reciaSy -reda, abor-reciamos, -reciais, recloTi, 82 OF VERBS. VreterptH. alor-reci, -reciste, -redo, alor-rcclmos, ieti. Gerund. adh'mendo, • adhering to. Participle. adhhido, adhered to. . • liidicat. prcs. adhiero, adhiaes, adhit're, adkeri'mosy adheris, adhl^tn. imperfect. adhcria, adherias, adheria, adkeriamos, adheriaisy adherirni. Preterite. adhcri, adherlste, adhirio, adherimos, adherhftis, adhiriaron. Future. adherire, adherira^', adherird, adherir^mos, adkerireis, adherirdn. Subjunc. pres. ad/iiera, adkieras, adhiera, adhirdmos, adhirdis, adhieran. Imperfect. adherirlay adkeririas, adherirlay adherirlamos, M,dherirlais, adhiurian. I -86 OF yEKBS. Preterite. Future. Imperative. adhiriese adhiriescs or or adhiriSray adJihidras, adhiricsernos adhirit-seis or or adhiriese or adhiriera. adhiricseu or adhiericramos , adhirierais, adhirieran. adhiriere, adiiirieres, adhirilre, adhiricrenios J adhiricreis, adhiriereri. ad hi ere, adhere thou. adhicra, let him adhere. adherdmos, let us adhere. adheridi adhere you. adlueran, let them adliere. jhlolecer, to grow sick, see ahorrect-r. •udormecer, to fall asleep, see aborreccr* adveriir, to warn, see adherlr. agradech'j to acknowledge, see alorrecer. alcntur, to encourage, see acertdr. aleniarse, to take courage, see acertdr. -abnorzarj to breakfast, see acnrddr, •amenecer, to begin to be daylight [iriipcrson.). seealo7 recer. amoldr, to wet. see acorddr. amorteccrse, to lose courage, see alorrecer, Infinit. pres. .. Atiddr, to go. Gerund. avdando, going. Participle. andado, gone. Indicat, pres. ando, andas, anda, anddmoSy anddisy aiidan. Imperfect. anduha, anddbas, anddba, andubamos, anddbais, aiiddlan. Preterite. and/we, anduv/stey anduvo, ariduvimos, anduvUteis, anduvieron. Future. andare, andmds, andard, andxircmos, andareis, andardn. OF VERB*?. 67 iS'ubjune. pres. ande, andes, ande, ande/nos, andeis, dndeii. Ini perfect. andarla, andarias, andaria, ando.riamoSf andartais, andarian* Preterite. anduvitse anduvihes anduviese or or or anduvwra, andiailraSi and/ivi^ra, anduviese mos anduvieseis andiivieserii or or or anduvieramos, amluvieraU, anduvicran. Future. anduviercy anduvitrcs, anduvivre, anduviiremos, anduviereis, anduvicreri. Imperative. atida, go thou. amle, let hi ra go* andemos, let us go.^ at/ dad, go you. anden, let tiiem go. u^nocheceTy to grow dark, see ahorrecer,. ojitepensdr, to meditate, see acertdr. mdepontTy to prefer, see pon^r. anteviTy to foresee, see ver. apacentdr, to lead sheep to grass, see aceridr, aparecSr, to appear, see aborrecer. apercibir, to perceive, seepedir. apetecer, to wish, to long for. see ahorr.ecer, apos(dr, to lay a wager, see acorddr. aprotdr, to approve, see acorddr, arrenddr, to let ta»a tenant, see acertdr arrepentirse, to repent, see adherir. asentdr, to register, see acertdr. aserrdr, to saw. see acertdr. to consent, see lierijr. to aim <7r point at. sceacertar, to pull down, to destroy. se& acorddr* to tijrnisih one with money, see acordai\ to consider, ^qq entendcr, 12. asenlii , as star, asoldr, asolddr, alcndcr. 8S OF Vii£B5. atener, to walk even with another, see fene'r. atcTiturj to feel with the hand, see acertcir. atereccrse, to be benumlK-d with cold, see alorrertr. atcrrdr, to throw down, see acertdr. atestdr, to till up. see acertdr. atraer, to draw in. see It a fir. atravesdr, to pierce, or bore, see acertdr. QVi^nir, to arrive, see venir. averdrse, to agree together, see vejiir. aventdr, to fan, see acertdr. avergoTizdr, to make one ashamed, see acordur^ avcT"on%drse. to be ashamed, see acorddr. Infinitive. Gerund. Participle. Judicat. pres. Imperfect. Preterite. Future. B. Bendeclr, to bless. lendiciendo, blessing. ienditOj blessed. lendigo, hendices, lendlce, lendecimos, lejideciSf lendicen, hendecia, lendecias, bendccia, lendeciamos, bendeciais, bendecian. hendixe, hendixiste, hendixo, bendiximos, hendixisteis, bendixeron. bendeeire, bendecirds, bendecird, bendeciremoSy bendecireis, bendecirdn. Subjunc. pres. bendiga, beiidigas, iendlga', lendrguinos, bendigdls, hendigan» Imperfect. bendeciria, hmdecirins, bendeciria, bendeclriamos, brndecirlais, bcndccirian. Preterit^ bendixese bendixeses bendixcse or or or bendixera, bendixcraSy lendixera, bendixesemos bendixcseis bendix^sen or or or bendixeramos, bendixcrais, bendixcran. bejidixcrc, bendixereS: lendixcre, lendixercmoyy lendixcreis, bendixercr^ Futi^re. OF VERBS. rroperative. I'endice, bless tliou. IcTidiga, let him bless, lehd'igamos, let us bless^ lendecid, bless you. lendigan, let them bless. C. Innnit. pres. Caler, to be contained. Gerund. cobhndo, being contained^- Participle. cahido, contained. Indicat. pres. f/ucpe, cubes , cdle, calt-mos, cabeis, cab en. Imperfect. cabia,cabias, cabla, cabiaviosy cabiais, cabian. Preterite. cupe, cupiste, cupo, cupimos, cupisleisy cupUron. Future. cabri, cabrds^ cabni, cabremos, cabrcis, cahrdn, Subjunc. pres. qttcpa,- quepas, f/ucpa, ijuepdmo^, (fuepdis, quepan, In>perfect. cabria, cabrias, cabria^ cabrianwSy cabrlcis, cabrian. Preterite. cupiese cupieses cupitse or or or cupitra, cupieras, cup'ulray. cupiesemos cupitseis cupicsen or or or cupieramos, cufAtrais, cupuran. Future. cupicre, cupieres, cupiere, cupieremos, citpitreis, aipiererii Imperative. cdbe^ be thoU contained. quepa, let him be contained. quepmnos, let us be contained. cabt'd, be you contained. quepan, let them be cootaincd, Tniinit. pres. Caer, to fall. Gerund. cayendo, fallings i3 90 OP VERBS. Participle. caido, fallen. Indicat. pres. caygo, ccies, cue, caemos, caeis, cden. Imperfect. caia, caias/ caia, caiamos, caiais, caian. Preterite, cai, cauie, cayo, cabnoSj caisteis, cayeron. - Future. caere, caerds, eaerd, caeremos, caereis, cacran. Subjunc.pres. cdyga, cdygas, cdyga, caygdmos, caygdis, cdygan. Imperfect. caeria, caerias, caeria, caeriamos, caeriais, caerian. Preterite. cay6se caytses cayt'se or ( r or cay6my cayvras, taycra, cayesemus eayeseis cayisen or or or cayiramosy cayerais, caydran. Future^ cayercy caycres, cayere, enydremos, eayereis, cayeren.. Imperative. cde, fall thou. cayga, Jet him fall. caygdmos, let us fall. caed, fall you. \ cdygan, let them fall. Calentdr, to warm, see acertdr. canecer, to grow gray, see aborrecer. carecer, to have need, see aborrecer, cegdr,, to become bhud. see acertdr, cenir, to girdle, see pedir. cenirse, to girdle oneself, see pedir, cerner, to bolt or sift, see entender^. cimentdr, . to cement, see acertdr. Irifinit. pres. Coc^r, to bake. Geruud. cociendo, baking. OF VERBS. 91 Participle. Qocido, baked. Indicat. pres. cuezo^ cu^ces, aiSce, cocemoSj coceisj cuecen. Imperfect. coda, cocias, cocia, cociamos, cociais, cocian. Preterite. coci, cocisie, cocio, cocimos, cocisteis, cocieron. Future. cocerc, cocerds, cocerd, cocertnios, cocert-is, cocerun. Subjunc. pres. cueza, cuezas, cut-za, cozdrnos, cozdis, cuezan. Imperfect. coceria, cocerias, coceria,- coceriamos, coceriais, cocerian. Preterite. cociese cocieses cocicse or or or cocicray cocit'ras, cocicra, cocicsemos cocicseis cocicsen or or or coc'uramos, cocicrals, cocieran. Future. cociere, cocicres, cock're, coder emos, coder eis^ coder en ^ f mperative. cueze, bake thou. cuexa, let him bake. cozdmos, let us bake. coced, bake you. cuezan^ let them bake. N. B. This verb lias the same iiTegularities as atf» solver ; and if it has been entirely conjugated, it is on account of the %, which is put instead of the c before a and o'j anil in order to refer to it for similar conjugations. Coldr, to strain a liquor, see acorddr. colegir, to gather see pedir. — iSl.Ji. This verb ex- Ciiar.ges g mioj before a and o. colgdr, to hang up. see acorddr, comedir. to reflect or think, see pedir. comedirse, to become polite, see pedlx. 92 a? VERBS* eomenzctr, to begin, see acertdr. eompadecerse, to have pity, see ahorrecer,. LompareceTt to appear, see ahorrecer. compelir, to come in. see pedir. eomplacer, to please one. see alorrecer. compuner, to compose, see poncr. comproldr, to prove, to confirm, see acorddn conebivy to conceive, st^e pedir. conccrner, to concern, see en fender, concertdr, to concert, see acertdr. covcor/ldTy to conciliate, see acorddr. condescender, to condescend, see entender:. condoler, to sympathize, see ahsolvir^ In6nit. pres. conduciry to lead. Gerund. conducundo, leading. Participle. conducido, led. Indicat. pres. conduzco, conduces, conduce, cvndudmos, conducis, conducen. Imperfect. conducia, conducias, conducia, conduciamos, conduciais, conducian^ Preterite. conduxe, conduxiste, conduxo, condhximos, conduxisteis, cenduxerom Bui are. conducire, conducirds, tonducird, conduciremos, conducirtis.. conducirdni Subjunct. pres. co?2rfi^;xca, conduzcas, co?iduzca, eonduxchnos, condiixcdis, conduzcan. Imperfecta conduciria, conduciriasy conduciria, conduciriamos, conduciriaisi conducirian. Preterite. eonduxcse conduxeses conduxese or or or conduxera, cor^duxertts, conduxira, cojiduxesemos conduxeseis conduxisen or or or conduxdramos, conduxerais, conduxdrarh. Suture* ^ conduxke, conduxeres, conduxere, conduxb'eniosj conduxereis, conduxerm. OV VERBS. 9^ Imperative. conduce, lead thou. cojiduzca, let him lead. conduzcamos, let us lead. I conducid, lead you. conduzcan^ let them lead. Confer iTy to confer, see adherir. confesdr, to confess, see acertdr. conmovir, to disturb, see entefidcr. conocer, to know, see alorrectr. conseguirj to obtain, see pedlr. coiisentiTf to consent, see adhcrlr. consoldVf to comfort, see acorddr^ consondr, to be in good intelligence, see acorddr. constrenir, to constrain, see pedir. contdr, to cast up, to reckon, see acorddr, contencr, to contain, see tericr, contender, to contest, see cntcndcr. contradeclr, to contradict, see decir. — N.B. Thiti last verb differs from decir only in the second person singular of the imperative, making contradice instead of contradi^ contrahacer, to counterfeit, see haccr, co?itraer, to contract, see trOi^r. C07itravenir, to act contrary. secve«/r. coiitrovertir, to argue, see adherir, convalecer, to recover from illness, see alorrecir^ convenir, ' to agree, see venir. converilr, to convert, see adherir. corregir, to correct, see pedir, costar, to cost, see acorddr, creccTy to grow, see aborreccr, culrir, to cover. — The irregularity of this verb is ia tBe participle passive, which makes cu bier to, D. Infinit.pres. Ddr, to give. Gerund. dando, giving. Participle. dddo, given. 94 or VERBS. Indicat. pres. Imperfect. Ereterite. Future. Subjuuc. pres Imperfect. Preterite. Future. Imperative. Infinit. pres. Gerund. Participle. Indicat. pres. Impeiifect. Preterite. Future. doy, das, da, ddmos, dais, dun. ddba, ddlas, ddba, ddbamos, ddlais, ddban.. di, distc, did, dimos, disteis, dicron. dare, dards, dard, daremos; dariis, dardn. . dt', des, de, dvmos, dels, den. daria, darlas, daria, dar tamos, darlais, darian. d'u'se dii'ses diese or or or diera, duras, dicra,. dicsemos dlcsels ditsen or or or dL'ramos, d'u'rais, dL'ran.. dicrc, dlcrcs, dicre, dieremos, diireis, dk'reiZh. dd, give thou. de, let him give. d^mos, let us give, dad, give ye. dtn, let them give. declr, to say. diciendo, saying. d'lcho, said. digo, dices, dice, decimos, decis, dicen. decia, dedas, decia, deciamos, deciais, decian. dijce, dixiste, dixo, dlximos, dixisteis, dixeron, dire, dirds, dird, dire flips ., dire is, ddnlv.^ Ot VERT3S. 9-5 ^ubjunc. pres. dlga, digas, dlga, digdmos, dignis, digan. )erfect. diria, dirias, diria, dir tamos, diriais, dirian, ierite. dixhe dixeses dixhe or or or dixira, d'ui'ras, dixtra, d'lxesemos diieseis dixt'sai or or or dixeramos, dixt'rais, dixtran. Lure. dixcre, dixeres, dixere, direremos, dixcreis, dixtren. T'-Tperative. d'l, say thou. digOf let him say. digujnos, let us say. dec Id, say you. digan, let them say. ^ender, to defend, see en tender, 'rir, to condescend, see adherir, >icir, to deduct, see conduclr. ■illdr, to behead, see acordiir. o/c'r, to demolish, see ahsolver. — Its part, is regular. ostrdr, to demonstrate, see acorddr, )m'r, to depose or remove, see poncr, "gar, to deny, see acertdr. >sidr, to use any one ill. see acorddr, d^rengdr, to sprain the hip. see accrtdr, denelir, to melt, see pedir. dei'icertdr, to err or mistake, see acertdr, cordur, to be discordant, see acorddr, donnecilr, , to a\vai\e. see ahorrecer. Icntdr, to discourage, see acertdr, 'pareccr, to disappear, see ahorrecer, pretdr, to make loose, see acertdr, probdr, to disappiove. see acorddr. wsegar, to disquiet or vex. see acertdr, tender, not to pay attention, see en tender. ^6 OF VLUBS. * desatr'avesdr , to disentangle, see acerldr. -desaventr, to be of a contrary opinion, see vcnir dcscaecer, to lose one's strength, see ahorreccr. descender, .to come down, see enlemler. deceuir, to ungirdle. see pedir. decimentdr, to undermine tire, foundations, see acertar. desco/gdr, to take down, see acorddr. descoUdr, to surpass, to be taller, see acorddr. dcsGomedirse, to grow unpolite. see pedir. -descompojwr^ to disorder, see po?icr, dcscoTisenlir, not to consent, see adherir. desconcertdr, to confound, see acertar. descmwccr, to disown, see alorrecer. descoTisoldr , to afflict, see acordar. - descontdr, to discount, see acorddr. descuhrir, to discover. — Its irregularity is in the parti- ciple passive, which makes descu'lierto , discovered. desdecir, to give the lie. see c/€6zr.— The second person singular of tlie imperative mood of this verb makes dcsdkc, liest thou. deseinpedrdr y to unpave. see acertar. desencerrdr, to set at liberty, see acertar. desengrosdr, to extenuate, see acorddr. desentcTiderj not to be willing to hear, see evtender. desenterrdr, to unbufy. see acertar. desenvolver, to unwrap, see alsolver. deservir, to hurt, see pedir. desfalleccr, to faint away, see alorrecer. desflaqvecer, to languish, see ahorrecer. desflocdr, to ravel, see acorddr. desguarnecer, to unfurnish. see abofrectr. desheldr, to thaw, see aceridr. deshacer, to undo, see hacer. desherrdr, to take away the fetters, see acerti.os, dtduzcais, desluzcan. Imperative, deslucc, tarnish thou. dtsluzca, let him tarnish. desluzcdmos, let us tarnish. deslucidy tarnish you. desluzcan, let them tarnish. The other tenses are regular, and conjugated like suhir, Desmeinbrdr, to dismember, see acertdr, desmentir, to contradict, see adherir, desohcdecer, to disobey, see alorrecer. desollar, to skin, see acorddr. despedir, to send away, see pedir. despedirse, to take leave, see pcdir, despedrdr, to take away the stones, see acertdr. desperndr, to cut off the legs, see acertdr, despertdr, to awake, see acertdr, dcsplaccT, to displease, see placer, desplegdr. to display. * see acertdr. despoblar, to unpeople. neeMcsrtlit, destefdr, to discolour, see f^dir. desttrrdry to banish, see acertdr. destorcer, to untwist, see coc^r. des trocar, to undo an exclnnge. see acorddr. desvanecerse, to fall in a swoon, see abc.rrecer. desverggnzdrse, to lose one's shame, see acordar, detener, to detain, see ten^r. detraer, to detract, soe iraer. devolver, to return or send back, see alsolver, dezmdr, to decimate or tithe, see acertdr, diferir, to delay, see adherir. K OF VERBS. digerir, to digest. disentir, to dissent. disolveVy disponeVf dutraefy divertir, to dissolve. to dispose, to distract, to divert. doler, to feel pain. see adherir, see adherir. see ahsolver, see poner. see traer. see adherir. see a I solver, dolerse, tofefel for people's pain, sec alsolver. Their participles are regular. Infin. present. Dormir, to sleep. Gerund. durviiendo, sleeping. Participle. dormido, slept. Indicat. pres. duermo, duermes, duerme^ dormimos, dormis, duermen. dormia, dorm las, dornda, dormiamos, dormiais, dormian. dormi, dormiste, durmid, donrdmos, dorinlsteis, durmieron^ dorimr6y dormirds, dormird, dormiremos, dormireis, dormir an. duerma, duernws, duerma, durmdvws, durmdis, duerman. dormiria, dormirias, dorniirla, dormiriamos , dormiriais, dorm Irian, durmicie durmitses durmiese or ^ or ^ or durmiera, durmieras, durmih-a, durmiesemos durmieseis durmiesen or or or durmieramo^y durmierais, durmiernn. dwrmiere, durmieres, durmiere, durmi6remos, durmiereis , durmieren, duerme, sleep thou. duerma, let hira sleep. durmdmos, let us sleep. dormid, sleep ye. duerman, let them sleep. Imperfect. Preterite. Future. Subjunctive. Imperfect. Preterite. Future. Imperative. OF VERBS. 99 E. Elcgir, to elect or choose, see pedlr. T his verb changes g into j before a and o, in order to preserve the pronunciation of the infinitive. embrauectrse, to become furious, see abort ecir. emhrutecerse, to become brutish, see aborrecer, emenddr, to rectify, see aceitar, empedrdVf • to pave, see acertdr. empezdr, to begin, see acertdr. emplumecer, to begin to have feathers, see aborrectr* empobrecer, to grow poor, see aborrecer» emporcdr, to dirt, see acorddr. encabelleccrse, to begin to be hairy, see aborreecr, encalvecer, to become bald, see aborrecer. tncaneccr, to be gray haired by old age. see aborrech, encarectr, to raise the price, see aborrecir, encender, to light a fire, see entcnd^r. enceiisdi-y to cense, see acertdr, encerrdr, to shut in. see acertdr. encomenddr, to recommend, see acertdr, enconlrdr, to meet, see acorddr. encorddr, to put cords to an instrument, see acorddr, tncrudec6rse, to become cruel, see aborrecir, encruelecir, to irritate, see aborrecer, enmbertdrj to cover with a blanket, see acertdr, endenttc^ry to breed teeth, see aborrecir, endiirec^, to grow hard, see aborrecir, enjiaquecery to grow lean, see aborrec4r. enfurecerse, to become furious, see aborrecir, engrandecky to grow or enlarge, see aborrtcir, engreirse, to adorn oneself, see pedir, engrosdr, to grow big. see acorddr, enloqueceTy to become mad. see aborrecir. enluciry to whiten with plaster, see desludr, enmocec6ry to grov young again, ste aborrecir. enmohecirse, to grow mouldy, see ahvrrKsr^ &.2 H)6 OF VERBh, enmudecSr, to grow dumb or be silent, see ahorrecer. ennegrecer, to grow black or brown, see ahorrecer. ennoblecer, to ennoble, see ahorrecer. enrarecer, to become rare, see ahorrecer. emic/uecer, to grow rich, see ahorrecer. enroddr, to break upon the wheel, see ocorddr. ensangrentdr. to make bloody, see aceridr. etisoherhecerse, to grow proud, see ahorrecer. Infinit. pres. Entender, to comprehend. Gerund. enlendiendo, comprehending. Participle. entendido, comprehended. Indicat. pres. enliendo, entiendes, eniiende, entendemoSj entendc'is, entiendcn. Imperfect. cniendia, entendias, tntendia, enteiidiamos, entendiais, entendlan. Preterite. entendi, entendiste, entendid, entendimos, entendlsteis, entendierorit Future. entendt^re, cntenderds, entenderd, entenderhnos, entendereis , entenderdn. Subjunctive, entienda, entiendas, entienda, entenddmos, enienddis, entiendan. Imperfect. eniendeda, enienderias, entenderiay , entenderiamos, enlenderiais, enlenderian, Preterite. entendieae entejidieses enienditse cr or or entend'i^ra, entendieras, entendiera, entendiesemos entendieseis eniendiesen or or or entendieramosy entendierais, entendieran. Future. entendUre, entendiereSy entendie're, entcnduremos, entendiereis, entendieren. Imperative. eniiende, comprehend thou. entienda, let him comprehend. entenddmos, let us comprehend, ent ended, comprehend you. mtieiidan, let them comprehend. OP VERBS. l. Future. f^^re, fueres, fuire, fueremos, fueriis, fniren. Imperative, ve, go thou. vdya, let him go. OF V'ERUS. 105 rdmos^ let us go. id^ go ye. vdyan, let them go. L. Lucir, to sliine. see deslucir. LL. Llov^Vy to rain, see the impersonal verb, M. Magrescer, to grow lean, see alorrecer ■maldeclr, to curse, see hendecir. manifestdr, to manifest, see acertdr, viantenJr, to maintain, see tener. rnedir^ to measure in general, see pedlr^ meiitart to name, see acertdr, mentir, to lie. see adlwrir. meredrt to deserve, see ahorrecir, merendar, to eat between dinner and supper, see acertatt molC-r to grind, see absoluer. — Its part, is regular, mollesdr, to grow soft, see alorrecer. mordtr, to bite, see ahsolvir, — Its part, is regular. morir, to die. — Part, muirto. see dormir, mostrdr, to show, see acorddr. mover, to move, see absolvdr. — Its part, is regular. N. JSiactr^ to be born, see aborrec^. negdr, to deny or refuse, see acertar. nevdr, to snow, see the impersonal verbs in their pro- per place. O. Obedecer, to obey, see aborrecer. obscurecer, to darken, see aborrecer. obtener, to obtain, see tencr, ofrecer, to offer, see aborrec&. Infin. pres. Oir, to hear. Gerund. oijendo, hearing. Participle. otWa, heard. 166 OF VEKBS.. Preterite. Futun Future. Indicat. pres. oi/go, oyes, 6ye, oimoSy oiSf 6yen, Imperfect. ola, oias, oia, oiamos, dais, oian. oi, oistCf oyOf olmos, Oisteh, oyer on. oird, oirds, oird, oirdinos, oirm, oirdn. Subjunctive, criga, oigas, otga, oigdmos, oigdis, oigan. Imperfect. oiria, oiriaSf oiria, oiriamosj oiriais, oirlan,. Preterite. oycse oycses oyese or or or oyeray oyeras, oyera, oyesemos oyeseis oyisen, or 5r or oytramos, oyerais, oyhan. oytre, oyires, oyere, oyiremos, oyereis, oyeren^ Imperative. 6yet hear tliou. oiga, let him hear. oigdmos, let us hear. oid, hear you. oigaiij let them hear. opmir, to oppose, see pon^. P. Pacer, to graze, see dborrech, padecir, to languish, see ahorrecir, parecdr, to appear, see ahorreccr. parecerse^ to be like, see alorreedr. Infin. pres, Pedtr, to ask. Gerund. pidimdo, asking. Participle. pedido, asked. Indicat. pres. pido, pldes, pide^ pedimos, pedis, pider^. Imperfect. pedia, pedias, pedia, pediamoSf pediais, pedian^ OF TERBS. 107 IVeterite. "Future. Subjunctive. Imperfect. Preterite. pedi, pediste, pidw, pedi'mos, pedistcis^ piduron, pedire, pedirds, pcdird, pediicmts, pedireis. pedirdn, pida, pidas, pida, piddmos, piddis, pidan. pediria, pediriaSj pedirhy pediriamos, pedirlais, pedirhn. pidiese pidieses pidihe or or or pidiera, pidieras, pidiira, pidiesevios pidieseis pidi^sen pidieramos, pidicrais, pidieran. Future. pi/iitre, pididres, pidiire, pllitremos, pidie/eis, piditren. Imperative. pide, ask thou. pida, let him ask, /. piddmos, let us ask. pcdid, ask ye. pidan, let them ask. vensdr, to think, see acertdr. perJer, to lose, see en tender, pereccr, to perish, see alorrecer. perni(/uthrdr, to break the legs, see acertdr. persequir, to persecute, see pedtr. pertenerer, to belong to. see aborrecer pervertir, to pervert or corrupt, see adherir. placer, to please, has no other tenses or persons than what follow : — Indie, pres. third pers. sing, pldce^ he or it pleases imperfect. third pers. sing, placia, he or it did please. Preterite. third pers. sing, plugo, he or it pleased. Future. third pers. sing, plaierd, he or it will please. Subjunctive, third pers. sing, plegue, may it please, — ^is used only in that expression, plague d Dios, m^y God be pleased. 108 Preterite, OF VERBS. third pers. sing, pluguiese, or plugtdera, it might please. Future, third pers. sing, pluguiere, when itshall, &c. plegdr, to plait or fold, see acertdr. pobldr, to people, see acorddr, poder, to be able, see absolver, — Its part, is regular. Infinit. pres. Podrir, to rot, pudriendo, rotting, podrido, rotten. IndiCat. pres. pudro, pi^res, pudre, podrlmos, podris, p/idren. Imperfect. podiia, podiias, podria, podriamos, podriais, podrian,. Preterite. pudii, pudriste, piidrio, pudrhnos, pudristeis, pu drier on. Future. podrire, pcdrirds, podrird, podriremos, podrireisy pcdrirdn. Subjunctive, puura, pudras, pudra, pudrdmos, pudrdis, pudran. Imperfect. podriria, podririas, podriria, podririamos, fodrhiais, podririan. Preterite. pudriese pudrieses pudriesej or or or pudritra, piidricras, pudridra, pudrUsemcs pudrieseis pudriesen. Future. Imperative. Infinit. pres. Gerund. Participle. pudrieramos, pudrierais, pudrieran. pudriere, pudrieres, pudriere, pudrieremoSy pudriereisj pudrUrcn, pudre, rot thou. pudra, let him rot. pudrdmos, let us rot. podrid, rot you. pudrarij let them rot. Pontr, to put. poniendOj putting. puestOf put. OP VERBS. log Indicat. pres. pongo, pones, p6ne, ponemos, poneis, ponen. Imperfect. ponia, ponlas, ponia poniamos, ponlais, ponia n. Preterite. pilse, pusiste, ptUo, pusimosy pusisteis, pusieron. Future. pondre, pondrds, pondra, pondremos, pondreis, p)ndrdn. Subjunctive, p&nga, p6ngas, pSnga, pongdmoSy pongdis, pSngan. Imperfect. pondria, pondrias, pondria, pondri'amoSf pondriais, pondrian. Preterite. pusiese pusiises pusu-se or or or pusieray pusieras, pusiera, pusiesemos pusii'seis pusiesen or Qt or pusieramoSy pus'urais^ pusUran. Future. pusiere, pusitres, pusiere, pusie'remos, pusiereis, pusieren. Imperative, pan, put thou. ponga, let him put. pongurnos, let us put. poned, put you. pongan, let tbem put. Pndichy to foretell, see dedr. preferirj to prefer, see adherir. prepontTy to prepose. see poner, prescriMr, to prescribe. — Part. prescril9^is the only ir- regularity. presentir^ to foresee, see adherfr. presiipontr, to presuppose, see ponlr. prevalecer, to prevail, see aborrecer. prevenir, to anticipate, see venir. previr, to foresee, see ver. producir, to produce, see conducir. proferir, to utter, ste adherir. L 110 OF VERBS. promover, to promote, see alsolver. — Its part is regular. propGner, to propose, see pontr. proscrihir, to banish. — Part, proscrito is the only irre- gularity. proseguir, to continue, seepedtr. probdr, to try. see acorddr. provenir, to issue, see venir. Q see acertdr. Gerund. Participle. Indicat. pres. Imperfect. Preterite. Future. Quehrar, to fail, to be a bankrupt. Infinit. pres Querer, to love. f/uericndo, loving. c/ueridOj loved. quicro, qincrt'Sy quLre, querimos, quereisy quieren. queria, queriaSy queria, queriamos, queriais, querian. quise, quisiste, quiso, quisimos, quisisteis, quisk'ron, querre, querrds, querrd, querremos, querreis, querrdn. Subjunc. pres. quiera, quieras, quiera, qucramos, querdis, quuran. Imperfect. querriay querrias, querria, querriawos, querriais, querrian. Preterite. quisiese quisUses quisiese - or or or qmslera, quisitras, quisiera, quisiisemos quisles cis quismen or or or quisieramos, quisierais, quisieran. Future. quisitre, quisitres, quisure, quisuremos, quislereis, quisieren. Imperative. quiere, love thou. qidero, let him love. querdmos, let us love, quered, love you. quiiran, let them love. OF VERBS. Jll R Recaer, to fall again, see cacr. recoccr, to bake again, see cocer. recomenddr, to recommend, see acerUlr. recompontr, to set again in order, see poncr, recojwcer, to acknoukdge. see aborrectr. reconvalecer, to recover from an illness, see alorrecer. recorddr, to remember, to call to mind, see acordar, recostdrse, to lie on one side, see acordar, recreccKf to grow again, see alorrecer, reducir, to reduce, see conducir. referir, to refer, see adherir. reflorecer, to blossom again, see alorrecer, rejojxdr, to strengthen, nee acordar. regdr, to water, sec acertdr. regi.r, to govern, see pedir, regofddr, to belch, see acorddr, rehaci'r, to dq again, see /iace'r. reir, or rehse, to laugh or jest at one. see pedir, reluchTy to shine, see deslucir, remanecer, to appear suddenly, see alorrecer, remenddrj to mend, to patch, see acertdr. remorder, to bite repealt dly. see aholvtr. i „i. . ^ remordtrse, to repent, to grieve, seeaholu^r.f "^ir pa . remover t to remove, to exchange place, seet ^\ aholoer. ^ ^ > ^^S"'«- renacer, to be born again, see alorreclr. revdir, to enslave, see pedir. rendirse, to surrender oneself, see pcdir^ renegdr, to deny or disown, see acertdr. renovjr, to renew, see acorddr. reTdr, to scold, quarrel, or fight, see pedir, reparecer, to apj^ear again, see alorreclr, repctir, to repeat, see pedir. reporter , to put again, see poner. reprobdr, to reprove, see acorddr, l3 112 OF VERBS. requebrdr, to cajole or wheedle, see acertdr. requerir, to require, see adherir. resentirse, to resent, to be sensible of. see adherir. rescontrur, to compensate, see acorddr, resolver, to resolve, see ahsolvcr. resollar, to breathe, see acorddr. reiondrf to resound, see acorddr, restalleccr, to repair or restore, see alorrec^. retemlldr, to tremble continually, see acertdr. retener, to detain, see tener. retentar, to be threatened with a relapse, see acertdr, ret entry to dye again, see pedlr. retorceTi to twist again, see coccr. retraerse, to take refuge, see tratr. retrairt to withdraw, see iraer. retrotraer, to antedate, see traer. reventdr, to burst, see acertdr. reuer, to see again, see ver. reverdecer, to paint green again, see alorrecir, reverter, to overflow, see entendtr. revestir, to invest, see pedk. revoldr, to fly again, see acorddr. revolcdrse, to wallow, see acorddr^ revolver, to overturn every thing, see ahsolvir. roddr, to roll, see acorddr. rogdr, to pray, see acorddr. S Jnfinit. pres. Saltr, to know. ^Gerund. saliendo, knowing. Participle. sahido, known. Indicat. pres. sS, sdh^s, sdbe, sahemoSy sabt'is, sdhen. Imperfect. satia, sahtas, sahiat saliamos, sahiais, saltan. Preterite, supe, supiste, supo, supinm^ svpUlelSi supiaon. OF VERBS. 113 Future. salre, salrds, s&hrd, salrcmost salreis, sahrdn, Subjunc. pres. sepa, sepas, sepa, sepdmos, sepdis, sepan. Imperfect. sabria, salrias, salri'a, salrlamos, sabriais, sabrian. Preterite. supiese svpieses supiese or or or supiera, supieras, supitra, supiesemos supiiseis supiesen or or or supiSramos, supUrais, supieran. Future. supilre, supieres, supUre, supii'remos, supiereis, supieren. Imperative. sdbe, know thou. sepa, let him know. sepdmoSf let us know. sabed, know you. sepan, let them know. saber bien, to relish, (in speaking of meat), see saldr. Tniinit. pres. salir, to go out. Gerund saliendo, going out. Participle. salido, gone out. Indicat. pres. salgo, sales, sdle, sallmos, salts, sdlen. Imperfect. salia, sulias, salia, sallamos, saliais, saltan. Preterite. sail, saliste, saliu, salinios, salisteis, salieron. Future. saldre, saldrns, saldrd, saldn-mos, saldras, saldrdn. Subjunc, pres. sdlga, sulgas, sdlga, salgdmos, sa/gdis, sdlgan. Imperfect. saldrla, saldrias, satdHa, saldriamos, saldrlais, saldrian. Preterite. ' saliese salieses salihe or or ((r saliera, salieras, saliera, L 3 114 OIC VERBS. Saliesemos salk'seis saliesen or or or salieravwSy salierais, salieran. Fulur*. saliere, salUres, salitre, saUeremos, saliereisj salleren. Imperative. ' sal, go thou out. saiga, let him go out. salgdmos, let us go out. salidj go you out. sdlgarij let them go out. SegdVy to reap, see acertdr. segulr, to follow, see perf/r.—N.B. This verb and its compounds lose u before a and o ,• consequently we say sigo, siga, in lieu of siguo, sigua, &c. sembrdr, to sow. see acertdr. sen tar se, to sit down, see acertdr. sentiry to hear, see adherir, serrar, to saw. see acertdr, serviry to serve, see pedlr, solreponer, to put above, see poncr. sobresalir, to excel or surpass, see salir. sohrevcnir, to come in unlooked-for. see vcnir, soldar, to solder, see acorddr. soler, to be wont, see absolucr. Its part, is regular. soltdr, to untie, see acorddr. sondr, to resound, see acorddr. sondrse {las narices), to blow one's nose, see acorddr. sonar, to dream, see acorddr. sonreir, to smile, see pedir. sosegdr, to repose or rest, see acertdr, sosegdrse, to allay one's passion, see acertdr, soterrdr, to bury, see acertdr. suhstraer, to abridge, see truer, supcner, to suppose, see poner. T Temlddr, to tremble, seeaccr/an 11. tender, to spread cr stretch, see enlendtr. tentTy to have, or tq^hold. see the auxiliary verhs» tenir, to dye. see pedir. tentdrj to tempt, see aceridr» torccr, to twist, see cocer, iraduvlr, to translate, see cnnducir. Infinit. pres. Tracr, to brir.g. Gerund: trayendo, bringing. Participle. iraidOf brought. Indicat. pres. trai/go, trdes, trde, troernos, tracis, trden. Imperfect. imia, traiaSj iraia^ traiamoSf traiais, tralan. Preterite. trdxey traxiste, trdxo, traximos, traxisteis, traxcrorL. Future. traerc, traerds, iraerd, traercmos, traer^is, tracrdn. Subjunc. pres. traiga, trkigas, traiga, traigdmos, traigtiis, traigan. Imperfect. traeria, traerias, traeria, iracria?noSy iraeriais, traerian. Preterite. traxise traxeses traxtse, or or or iraxera, traxera^, traxcra, traxesemos traxeseis traxi'sen or or or tvaxh'amos, iraxerais, traxeran. Future. traxt're, traxcres, traxtre, iraxeremos, traxtreis, traxiren, Imperaiive. trde, bring thou. trayga, let him bring. traygd/nos, let us bring. tra^dj bring you. traygan, let tliem bring. Transcender, to pass, see entendcr, iran$poner, to transpose, see pondr. 116 OF VEKBS. trascender, to penetrate or discover, see entendcr, trascoLur, to strain, see acorddr. trascorddrse, to forget, see acorddr. trasegdr, to put topsy-turvy, see acertdr. trasGudr, to be out of one's mind, see acorddr. traspoTitr, to transpose from one place to another, see poner. trocar, to exchange, see acorddr. — This verb changes c into qu before e. trondr, to thunder, see the impersonal verbs, tropezdr, to trip in walking, see acertdr. Infinit pres. FaUr, to be worth. Gerund. valiendo, being worth. Participle. valido, been worth. Indicat. pres. valgo, vales, vale, vaUmos, valcis, vdlen. Imperfect. valia, valias, valia, valiamos, valiais, vaUan. Preterite. vali, valiste, valid, valimos, valisteis, valieron. Future. valdre, valdrds, valdrd, valdremos, valdreis, valdrdn, Subjunc, pres. vdlga, vdlgas, vdlga, valgdmos, valgdis, vdlgan. Imperfect. valdria, valdrias, valdria, valdriamos, valdriais, valdrian. Preterite. valiese valieses valiese or or or valiera, valieras, valiera, valiese mos vaUeseis valiesen or or or valieramos, valiarais, valieran. Future. valicre, valieres, valitre, valieremos, valiereis, valieren. OF VEKBS, Imperative. vale, t>e thoti worth. vdlgQf let him be worth. valgdmos, let us be worth. valedj be yon worth , vdlgan. Jet them be worth. Infinit. pres. Fentr, to come. Gerund. viniendo, coming. Participle. ventdo, come. Indicat. pres. vengo, vienes, vitne, venimos, venis, vit'nen. Imperfect. venta, venias, venia, veniamos, veniais, vei:ian. Preterite. vine, vintste, vino, v'uiimos, vinisteisj vmieron. Future. vendre, vendrds, vendrd, vendremos, vendr^is, vendrdn. Subjunc. pres. vcnga, vengas, venga, vengdmos, vengdis, vengan. Imperfect. vendria, vendrlas, vendrla, vendriamoSy vendriais, vendrian, Prelerite, vimese vinihes vinihe or or or vinii'ra, vinichaSf vinJha, vinitsemos viuieseis viniese or or or vimhamos, vinUrais, vinieran* Future, vinitre, vlnt^res, viniere, vini&remos, viniereis, vini^en. Imperative, verij come thou. vevga, let him come. vengdmos, let us come. venid, come you. vengan, let them come. Fenirse, to come, see venir. ^ vermejecer, or hermejecer, to become red. vertcr, to pour, see entendcr. see alorrecer^ 118 OP VERBS. vestir, to dress, see pedir. vesiirse, to dress oneself, see pedir» volar, to fly. see atorddr. volcdr, to turn all things upside down, see acorddr. volvcr, to come back or send back, see alsolv'r. volvtrse, to become either good or bad. see alsolvtr. A collection of verls whose injinitlves end in cer, making the indicaiive in zoo, and the preterite in ci. Infinitive. Indicative. Preterite. Adukccr, to grow sick auo'.tito udoLeci jigra(te(6; to th:ink agradtzco as^radeci Apefeca-t to desire apdezco apetec: Compadecer, to pity ompadezco compadeci Cmtuter^ to know conozco conuti Crercr^ to grow creico crai DesffiUecei't to faint away desfallezro desfuLleci Desvanect'ft to vanish desvauczio desvaneii J'Utcarev^r-f to grow dettfer mtareset} tnrafHl I^s(fiblet4rt to eitublifsh isiabhttQ fstabkd ^flH(U{vec&t to grow lean mJiat(mzcQ tnjiaffueci EmpobreciTf to grow poor empohretco empehreci Bnnquech\ to grow rich enriquezco enriqueci £7idurecer, to grow hard endurezco endured EngrandeccTy to aggrandize mgrandezco engrandni Entristecer, to grow sad entristt'zco entristeci Emiotlecer, to ennoble ennoblezco ennobled Ensoherbecir, to grow proud ensoberbezco ensoberbed Eiimudectry to grow dumb enmvdezco eyimuded fenecer^ to finish fhiezco fened Ea'ieceTy to fail or die fallezce failed Florecer, to flourish Jiorezco Jlored Fortnlecery to strengthen fortalezro Jortaled Favor eccTy to favour Juvorezco favored ^/erereV, to deserve merexco mered A'actfV, to be born vazco nad Obedeciry to obey obedezco vbeded Paf/r, to feed pazcu pad PadeccTy to suffer padezro paded Parecer, to appear parezco parcel Pereccr, to perish perezco jtered OF VERBS. 119 SECTION VII. Several ways of conjugating a verb with a negation, ifinit. pres. No habldr, not to speak, idicat. pres. no hcHIo, I do not speak. no hdblas, thou dost not speak. no hdbla, he does not speak. no habldmos, we do not speak, &c. Compound tenses, na he hablddo, I have not spoken, &c. 3 — and so on for every tense and person. With an interrogation. Imperfect of the indicative, third person singular. Cantdba el en el concierlo ? Did he sing at the concert ? Compound tenses. f^Ha recibido vm. una carta de su padre 9 Have you received a letter from your father ? " ^Habian el/ as comprddo la cdsa P Had they bought the house ? fFith a negation and interrogation. Indicative present. Vo me enliende vm ? Do you not understand me ? Vo 7105 conocemos 9 Do we not know one another? Compound tense. Vo 7205 hemos conocido 9 Have we not known one another ? No se ha vm. olvidddo de mi nombre 9 Have you not forgotten my name ? With an interrogation and a pronoun relative. Indicative future tense. ■Podra' vm. vender los con venidja para nuestra utilidadP Can you sell them to our advantage ? 120 OF VERBS. ^ Querrd vm. acompanarnos manana al campo ? Will you come to-morrow with us into the country ? SECTION VIII. Of impersonal verls. Impersonal verbs are thus conjugated : Indicative mood. Pres Hav v no hav i ^^^^^ ^^* ^"^ ^^^^^^ '^ "°^* J> y Vi \ there are, and there are not. T«,« u^i '„ „ <,« i,«i.u ("there was, and there was not. Imp. Havia. y no navia. < ^, r u ^ •' L there were, a?zd there were not. t>^^f zj'i i,n f there was, awfl? there was not. Fret. Hubo, y no huoo, < ^, u\ ^ (.there were, awa there were not. r?,t. Tj J I L J ' ( there shall be, and there shail/ ' •' L not be. Subjunctive mood. D.-^- tr ' I, ' r there may be, and there may Pres. Haya y no huya, | ^^^ ^^^^-^^ -^ Imperf. Hahria, y wo j there would be, and there halria, I would not be. Pret. Hubiese or hub ic- r , • i,*. u j ♦! ; , • / 1 there might be, and there ra, y no hubic'se< - \ 4. 4. u u T' I might not be. or no nubwra, K, ^ Fut. Hubiere, y no c there shall be, anc? there shall hubicre, \ not be. The compound tenses are formed by adding habido to each tense, as ha habido, there has been 3 — and so on for the rest. The impersonal verb ser, to be. Indicat. pres. Es, y no eSy it is, and it is not. Imperfect. jEra, y no era, it was, and it was not. Preterite, Fue, y nofue^ it was, and it was not. Future. S^ra, y no sera, it shall be, and it shall not be. -OV VEEB8. 1-21 Subjunc. pres. Sea, y no sta, it may be, and it may not be. Imperfect. Serla, y no seria, it would, and it ^^ould ^ not be. Preterite. Ike&e ibf fitera, j no fuese or no fuSra, it might be, arid it might not be. The impersonal menester, it musL Indicat pres. Es wenester, y no es menester, it must, and it mui^t not. Era menester, y tk) era menester, it was necessary,' and it was not necessary. Fue menester, y nofiie menester, it was necessary, and\t was not, &c. Scrd menester, y no sera menester, it xvill, ayid it will not be necessary. Subjunc. pres. S4a menester, y nosci menester, it may, and it may myt be necessary. Seria, y no serla mejwster, it would, and it would not be necessary. Fuese or Jurra, y no Jutsc or no fuera, menfster, it might, and it might not be necessary. "'■^\ ••■' The other imp^qnals have infinitive, gerund, and participle J v/Lich -shall be set down here for the further instruction of the pupil. Imperfect. ■Preterite. Future. Tmperfect. Preterite. Indicative. Iti^::.iLivr. Gerund. •Partyriple. Ltiii- e, it rains from liun'r lioiiendo Uovido Hicia, it freezes ^Ulr HeliDndo hem, •<^rm}ha, it hails - graiiizdr granizarulo granizddo Ki/ca, it snows — — rteviir nevando nevddo True.'Hi, it thunders -i trondr tronandn tronddo . ' >- It h"-htcns rdampx- Tclamp.i'^ refcmpa- guedr gueando gucudo Hdce {it is) is used with an adjective, and some nouns xle-noting th.e disposition of the weatlier, as hdce calur, it •is -hot 3 hdcejrio, it is cold; hdce viento, it is \yindy, &c. 122 OF ADVERBS. Indicative. /Icaccp, it happens Convienef it becomes Importa, it matters Parece. it seems Infinitive, ^from acaect'r • coimenir imporfur — — puree tr •Gerund. Participle. ac.aedendo ac.aerUh> covviniencJo convenUlo import ando imporfddo pareciendo parecido. CnAPTKR VI. OF ADVERBS. An adverb is that part of speech which is joined to a verb, adjective, or participle, to express some circum- stance, quality, degree, or manner of its signification. Exawple. Dios es . infimmente justo : castlgard rigorosamentc a los impios. God is infinitely just : he will rigorously punish the impious. N. B. Most Spanish adjectives may be changed into adverbs by adding ?ncnle to the feminine termination of such adjectives as have two terminations ; or to the com- mon termination of such adjectives as have oiily -one termination. Example. Masc, hifimto, Fem. injimta, vi/iriiia'meDte, Bueno, buena, buenn-mente. Feii%, feliz, fi'liz-mente. Fid, M. Jiel-menie Different sorts of adverbs. Besides the number of adverbs formed from adjectives, there are many others^ which can be divided into fourteen OF Adverbs. 123^ classesj, according to their signification j they are as fol- low : ' « ,V Adverls of time. Al presente at present hasta aqui hitherto' presfnlemenle. / presently hasta ah6ra till now luck'o ejiidnces then ahdra now temfirdno early hoy to-day muclio hd long since ences before poco hd lately ai'tri yet, even luego directly a menudo often mientras whilst Xfimediatammte directly | tarde late de priesa quickly | d la tarde in the evening. Ayer yesterday antigunmenfe formerly auUayer the day after to- iidna y niorrow ^r«ia 8oon ''''?"'^/''^'' J now and then quando > de a en cwiclusion 5 despuct de seguido juntamente •<\'here from, whence feom hence from thence in this place there ahoxs- behind yonder before aside within abaxo cerca. junta- enfrenic iejos encima debdxo •■ fucra ^ porjuera indircdo a la nidno mas Itjfjs-' belcnv near adjoining^ facing far upon utiderneath (nit without roimd about hard by' further. Jiherh' of order. £rst, or firstly- second ly thirdly lastly before after one afier other togsther f despucs afterwards al rededor round about ■altertialivarnenie SLhernatively: Jinalmente finally ordenadamenle orderly en confusion confusedly atropelladamentem a jumble tntaimeiUe utterly ul reves '^ topsy-turvy Quanta- p&co un p6co mucho no mucho laatantemmte^ snjicienttmente. poco a poco casi cerca tanto mas m.enns ademds d lo mas a lo menns Adverbs of quantity and number. i dearly ( how much \ how many little a little, some much not much * > enough little by little pretty near about so much more less moreover at most at least aL'undaiitemente plentifully caramente tieryiam mte hardtn cheap muy iardlo Very cheap iotalmente entirely pur midio by half iiifinitamente infinitely completammte quite extrahameate strangely admirablemente admirably maravillosa- ? ^^^aerfully menle absolutamente viedianumoite qiiantfis veces una vez dos veces Ires veces diez veces absolutely tolerably how many timea once twice thrice ten tin??* OF A'DVEIlBSi 125 dmdiins llenas plentifully copiosamenle largely caru dear leinte veces twenty times cinciieyita veces^ fifty times aen veces a hundred times mil veces athousand times. Adverts of quality and inanner. Bien well, right mal bad, wrong mity Men very well muy mal very bad adnurablemenle admirably well medianamcnte | neither well nor sahiameiite ' wisely ■jtistamente justly Undamentet ) ., b.r.ttamenle ^ P^^ttily prudentemente prudently invariallemente constantly vigorosarncnte briskly ^Jhcilniente easily cun neglisencia carelessly anticipadamente previously primer amentc first of all stum asm mas, directamente enteramcnte derechamente filsamente de buena gana de mala gana con intencion point blank, bluntly thoroughly straight ialf^ely heartily grudgingly on purpose Voluntariame7ite wilfully fuertemente strongly ahie'tamente openly a tientas at random mnecidamcnte deservedly injustamente wrongfully seriamf.nte seriously desi indadamente giddily locamente sillily lemermiaineule rashly a toda priesa headlong i7/o«i (°>7/rfcme7iifinadvertently accidmtulmenle accidentally ei.trechamente narrowly mortalmenle mortally liberal mente largelv ami/*ablement€ amicably en paz in peace tranqytilamente peaceably e:c(t7n eating to abound icilhy or in^ riches weary icilh one's ill fortune to abase friendship to be just COCXXQ something happening to anyone To happen ai such a time to gr.w warm in a dispute to accede ia the opinion of an- other accessible tn pretender* about thib bw^!i>iis to find the hor.sc to have recourse In any one to settle one^elt witkzny one to conform oneself to another's opinion to keep company with others to be advisee! by vi'ise men to happen to the u-iwary to remember any thing to agree iviih ones opponents toaccustom oneself /o misfortune to prove his foMy worthy of confidence to be active in business to accuse any one to accuse oneself of one's faults to advance before others besides that to adhere to the opinidn of an- other to complain of one's own in- firmity to be obstinate in one*sown opi- nion to be fond of reading to affirm what has been said foreign to the truth grateful /or beneilts to be affronted with any one to unite oneself to others sour to the taste witty, or of a sharp genius 128 OFPR^- :''ov!Jv uhitarse de man] '; res ahorcaiarse c las e^paldas ahorrar aV raz nes air'irse con alguno ajustarse c n alg no aju'^itarse d la razor* alabarse de valionte alaT2;r.rse a h ciudiid a!ety«reany one to prepare oneself for work to separate oneself from the occasion to be passionately fond o/^ books to be enamoured with any one tounder£akeanytbingii;j//i spirit to be foul-mouthed to adhere to any thing to appeal from a sentence to have recourse to other mea- sures to provide oneself with arms desirable to the palate to have compassion on the poor to apply oneself to study to usurp another's property to be quick m business to be approved in any faculty ' appropriated for the office. OF PREPOSITIONS. 12^ ocjuictarae en ia dispiita arder en amores arderse eti quimeras armarse r^epaciencia arrecirce e warm in quarrel to arm oneself icith patience to be benumbed with cold to conform oneself to the laws to repent of a bad action to lean aguinst the wall to appropriate any thing to«ne- self to run into danger to cover oneself tviih a cloak to be scorched with heat to be raised to another employ— ment to shelter oneself /rom danger to seek advice y'rom a lawyer to associate wilk learned men to look out ai the window to be exhausted ivtlfi roaring to be embroiled in a dilemma to be afraid of what is said to attend to the conversationr to keep to the side o/' safety to testify with another to hit upon the house to attract any thing to oneself to animate oneself to great thing* to attribute any thing to another to be afflicted ivith pain* to overhastcu in any actioo to be affronted at a trifle to unite oneself ivith another to absent oneself /rom Madrid to agree witk another to gain advantage over othera to be ashamed tu ask to be ashamed o/any thing to agree with another to prepare /or a journey. to hesitate on such a thing to fluctuate in doubts to wish. /or money to dance o7i the rope to bathe oneself in water to run aground to reach the wall with one*s chia to degeneratey'/om. one's nature tu debase oneself ly one'* actioas 130 Ol- PHErOSITtONS. batallar can los encmigos baxar a ia cueva baxar de su autoridiid baxar hdciu el valle baxo de cuerpo bentlico para la sali'id bianco de cara blando de corteza blasonar de valieate blasfemar de la virtud bordar (algo) de pUta bostezar dc hambre bostezar de geuealogia buta de vino boto de punta bratnar de colera boyinte en ia fortuna bregar con otro breir d chasco briudar co7i regalos brindar d la salud de otro bu^'no de comer bueno para todo bufar de ira huWir povy or euf todas partes burlai$e Ue algo to figlit n'itii the enemies to go down lo a cavern to recede /?o»i one's authority to descend towards the valley short in stature beneficial lo the health having a white face easy to be deceived to boast of bravery to blaspheme against virtue to embroider any thing icith silver to gape through hunger to boast of one's genealogy a leathern flask ojf. wioe. blunt to roar with rsge to be fortunate to quarrel with another to jest at one to offer presents to any one todiink to the health fj/" another good fo eat goodyor every tking to swell with auger to move in all parts to make a jest of Any thing Cablr en la mana ca^r CH tierra caer en error cacr e)i lo que se dice cadr en tal tiempo ca^r de lo alto ca^r a tal parte ca^r hdcia el norte ca6r sutre ios enemigos calent irse a! fuego cahfic.ir (a alguio) de docto callar ia verdad « otro calumniur (a aiguno) de injusto cambiar con otro cambiar algun.< cosa par otra CHiiiinar u ievi!la caminar por FraiKia ca-.T!n >r por el monte c^agarse <;an el trabajo to be contained in the hand to fall upon the ground to fall into a mi&take to understand what is said of any thing to fall out at such a time to fall//ow on high to look on such a side to be northwards to fall upon the enemies to warm oneself al the fire to qualifv one for a learned man to conct-al the trutb//o/H another to calumniate any one of in- justice to exchange icith another to exchaniie one th'nig fur another to tra/el to Seville to travel 4h(ough France to walk by the mountain to faiigue oneself with labour r OP PREPOSITIOIICS. 131 «apnz de hacer algo <■■'■[)■ iz pdra su empleo pituiar a'algdno denial hotn- bre ; ;r una cosa cnn otra. -cquiz.ir (a aiguno) pnra el dcaig-nio Jtivar fa alguno) con favores Icr alguna cosa en favur de otro cenlrse a ]> que se pu^de terca del palacio chanceirse con algiino ciiapijz^.r aigo en el agua '''<^c^^ dr persona ocar una cosa con otra cumscribii-3e a una cosa mar/jordiiicro ci.imore.'ir p'»r Un muertos •c<)br;'ir dinero tie los deudorcs '" ''igi'irse con alguao nbatir contra algano nhinar unas c'^sas fo.'i otras 'I'irse dr envidia .lutar algo coij. otra cosa apatiblerwu la justicia iplaccrse de algo ■ti placer a otro uponerse nm los deudorcs .pr.ir alg') de quie:i lo vende npi omeLerse en arbitros nmunicur con alguno icert ir una cosa fo.7 otra icordar la copia con cl origi- v'il icurrir d alguna parte ideii.'ir en las ccHtas idesccnder u los rucgos idoierset/e los trab.:jos iducir algo d C'diz labiilarse can los contrarios tVdcrarse con algdno iferir una ci sa am otra t'esar la culpa nl juez capable o^ doing something capable of h'\s employment to impeach any one for being a bad man to couple one thing T67/A another to suborn any one for one's purpose to overcome any one with fa- vours to give up any thing in anothej^s favour to keep within bounds near to the palace to jest w'ith any one to sink any thing in the water small in person to drive one thing against an- other to confine oneself to one thing to cry out /'r the dead to receive monevyro?n debtors to make an alliance liilh an- other to light azninxf. any one to combine things wuh others to pine with envy to exchange one thing for an- other compatible mvV/i justice to be pleased icuh any thing to please anotlier to compound w^th debtors to buy any thii!g//o;?z the seller to oompromiric l>j ari>itration to commune nniti any one to adjust one tiling to another to make the copy agree irW/i the orij^rinal to n)cet at some place to condemn in costs to condescend /« entreaties to be grieved u-ith l;ib()urs to conduct any thing /■/ Cadiz ui converse n-iili ones enemies to ally oneself to any one to compare one tliing with aa- other to confess cjie's faults to the judge -232 or PRF.POStTJONS, confiar algima cosaa' otro confiarse dc alguno confinar alguno a tal .parte coniirmarse en su diet. (men conformarse ^onel tempo conforme d su opinion confiontar una cc sa con otra confundirse de lo que se v6 confifeuiar con alguno _ congeturar algo por senales congratul'ifse cun sus amigos coijurarse contra algi'ino consi'.grarse (i Dios consentire/i algo consoL;rse ro/ilossuyos cmisplrnr r^n/ra algfino constar/jor icstinunios cousiiltar aigana cCsa so/rt' tal c< sa conten; rsC en palal >jas contc-.tar d h pieguiita coH'trapesar una c^' sa con otra ' contra poncr s5strt a anuello c-ontravenir d la Uy Conlribuir <-u7/. algo convalccer de la enfermcd ' d convene*:' rse dt- lo coiUrario Gouversar con algiino convertirseJ Dios con\id;'irse w los trabajos coopcrar a alguna c< sa correspond r a lus benef.cios corrcsporaler ro?; ius an/iyx:)s cT^cir en virtudcs creer algo pur 1';: m lj\it cre''rse dc aiguna c6sa cucharetear en t»t>do cuidiir de algiHio to intrust another with anything to rely vpim any -one to conllne anyone /osuch a place to he Goniinned in one's opinion to conform oneself to the time conl'onnable (o his opinion to confrcuit one thing uiih an- other to be confounded with what one sees to I)e congenial to any one to conjecture any thing iv/ signs to congratulate oneself with one's friends to conspire against any one to consecrate oneself /o God to agree m any thing to comfort oneself with one's re- lations to conspire agaimt rwiyovhc to appear ^7/ evidence to consult something ii77/rlearn- ed men to coritaniinate oneself «•?/,'? vices to contaminate oneself tvuh he- resy to temporize uiih anv one to dispute Kfiun such a subject tt; h? sparing m words to answ<;r tu the qtiestion to c(,unterpoise one thing with an.jtiur to {;nt this orcixvj^niiist that f<; transgress ai^avisf the law tv contribute with any tiling to recover /ioi; an illness to be ciMiviiiced o/" the contrary to spe:;k :<7 7/ any body to bi> Cv))ivertcd to Gc)d to irake oi>ef;elf readv ^> work to jL'oope*-ar« m any thing to be grateful Jhr favours re- ceived to correspond iriih one's friends to increase in vir.ues to -l)clieve something by faith i« God to be convinced "/any thing to internvjddle in every thing JjO take C2re (j/'any body ev PllEPosiTlo^f«. lot twmphr am algano curarse de algunacosa curtirse al ayre to settle with any body to be cured o/any ihmg to tan ^-^ the air DaT algo de comer darse a estudiar deber dinero a algfuno decaer de la autoridad decir algo a'btro declararse por tal partido dedicar tiempo al estudio deducir una cosa de otra deferir aotro dictamen defraudar algnno de su autoridad degenerar de su nacimiento delatarse a'Z juez deleytarse con la vista deiiber.ir Jo^-retal cosa depend ec de alguno deponer a alguno de su empleo depositar algo en alguna parte derivir de otra autoridad desabrirse C07i alguno desagradecido al benef icio desahogarse con alguno desavenirse unos de otros desayunarse de alguua noticia descabezarse en alguna cosa descans -r de la fatiga descantillar de alguna cosa descargarse de la culpa descender de buen linage descolg'irse de los montes descouiponerse con alguno descontar algo de alguna suma desdecir de su caracter desem barazarse de lo que eslorbft desenfrenarse en vicios desertar del regimiento desesperar de la pretension desfalcar algo de alguna cosa desgajarse de los montes deshacerse d trabajar deshacerse de algo to give something to eat to give oneself to study lo be indebted to any ijody to decrease 7"rom one's authority to say any thing to another to declare oneself for such a party to employ one's time in study to infer one thing from another to adopt the advice q/" another to defraud one ^j/' his authority to degenerate /rom one's birth to accuse oneself to a judge ^ to please oneself a)i7A the sighk to. deliberate upon any thing to depend upon any body to depose any oneyr«m his em- ployment to put something in any place to derive authority from an- other to be at variance with any body ungrateful to benefits to communicate one's trouble to another to disagree unth others to take notice o/any thing to labour in vain to relieve oneself yrom fatigue to break off the corner of any thing to free oneself from the fault to comey'rom a good family to descend yVom the mountains to disagree with another to discount one sum// om another to deviate/rom one's character to get rid q/'iumber to abandon oneself to vices to desert /»om a regiment to despair of one's pretension to take away y'roTn another thing to fall /rom the mountains to work with earnestness to get rid r^/" something U4 OF PREPOSITION: deshacerse en llanto dcsterrar a alguno de su patrla destri^arse de enfado devolver la causa al jiiez dexar de escribir despedirse de algiino despertar (/f/sutno desquiciar a alguno de su poder destiuar algo para tal cosa desvergonz'irse con alguno determin^rse d partir diferir algo d otro tiempo dimanar de algunacosa digustarse por algo disponer de los biel anyoneyJoTj the house skilled '7/ the laws to extract one thing from an- other to deviate/rom one's purpmse F'lcil de digerir faltar ti la palabra faito de din';ro I'astidi'irse de algo fatigarse en algo favorable jKiia todj* easy to digest to fail in one's pro-fiise to be in want of iTumev to be disgusted with any things to be fatig»aed /'y any thln^ favourable^ta ;Ui Hii ^. lae^ or PJRLPOSITIONS. favorecerse tJe algiiien hkr algo a alguiio iiel cull sus am gos lixar e7i la pared flexible d I3 razon fiuctuir c?i la duda fortificarse en aigima parte franque irse d otro frisar \xi\o con ptro fiu ra (if c:'isa fundarse 01 la raaon to be helped by any body to trust any thii:;g /•<; any one taithful to bis friends to fix any thing in the wall pliant to reason to fluctuate in doubt to strengthen oneself o7z any side to open oneself to another to assimilate one thing voUh aU" other out of the house to be founded in reason G-irar de una parte a otra girar por tal parte gloriarse ile algo gordo de talle goziir de alguna c6aa grange:'ir la vohintadde otro gtiard'irse de\o malo guareccrse de alguna cosa guarecc^rse en alguna parte guarnecer alguna cosa cun otra guiarse por alguno guindarse por la. pared guiado de alguno gustar de algo H Habil en la ciencia habilitar auno joara alguna cosa habitar con alguno habitar en tal parte habituarse «' alguna cosa hablar de alguna cosa hacerse d todo hacer de valiente • hacer por alguno hallar algo en tal parte hartar^e rfe comida hallarse en la fiesta ' hallarse en la ca&a henchir el cantaro de agua herlr a alguno en la ebtima-i cicn ' heridp de la injuria hermanar una con otra hervir un pueblo c/egente to reeI//ow one side to another to reel on such a side to boast of any thing fat or lusty to enjoy any thing to gain the affection q/'another to guard oneself yro»7i evil to take Sili el ter /rem any thing to take shelter in any place to garnish one thing with an- other to guide oneself hy any one to descend by the wall guided by any one to taste of any thing , able in knowledge to enable any body for any thing to dwell luith any one to dwell in such a place to accustom oneself to something to speak (fany thing to be ready /or any thing to pretend lo courage to do for any one to find any thing in such a place to gorge oneself with food to be present at the feast to be /// the house to fill the pitcher ivith water to hurt any one in his reputation hurt by injury to agree one thmgwith another to be very populous OP FREFOSITlOTTf- m hocicir en tierra holgarse con algo * huir de alguno humanarse a'alguna c6s» humillarse a alguno iuindir algo en el agua to stumble a/ any inconvenience to rejoice at any thing to Ay from any body to familiarize oneself to any thing to humble oneself I-efnre any one to plunge any thing into the water Idoneo para todo igual con otro igualar una cosa con otra imbuira algono en alguna crsa iiupeler algfino a alguna cosa jmpelido de la neccsid'id impenetrable a los mas perspL- caces impetr.'ir algo de alguno implic irse en algo importunado de rupgos impriniir algo en el animo imputur la culpa a otro incansAble en los trabajos inapeable de su opinioa inces.inie en sus tarcas iiicidr en culpa incitar aotro- incluir eii el numero inaimpatible con el mando- incoiTjprchensible d los honvbre* ii)coustantee»ralg'ji>a c('sa inconsiante en su proceder • incorporar una ct sa con otra iacreible a mucho* iiideciso en resolver indignarse contra algo indihpont r a uno con otro inducir a uno u pecar )nd»ctlvo deerrbr infecto dehereg'^z jnficionado de viruelas rnflexlble a la razon iufluir en alguna cosa. ingrato a los favores inhabil julra. el empleo insensible d las injurias inseparable de la virtud insertar algo en alguna cosa insipido al gusto ^tfor aay thing equal to another to equal one thing icitTi another to instruct any one in uny thing to compel any one to any thing impelled L-y necessity impenetrable to the most pene- trating to obtain any thing 'i/any one to intermeddle in any thing imporcuned vrith entreaties to imprint anything on the mind to unputs the fauh to another unwearied tinth labours obstinare i)i his opinion indefatigable in his labours to f-'.U into a fault to incite any one to any thing' to iHclude in the numtier incompatible with the command incomprehensible to men unsettle! in any thing inconstant in his proceedings to incorporate one thing uiMt another incredible to many undecided i« resolving lobeaui]jry i:t something to indispose one with another to induce one to sin leading to error infected icith heresy infected uiih the small-pox inflexible /« reason to have an influence over any « thing ungrateful /or favours unlitybr the employment insensible to injuries inseparable/) (y-71 virtue to ingraft one thing on another insipid to the taste 13a OF PREPOSITIONS. in«istir en alguna cosa iiiteresarse en alguna cosa interpoiar unas cosas con otras Interponerse con alguno interveair en las ccsas introducirse con los que mandan invadido por los contrarios invertir dlnero en otro u*o ir de Madrid hdcia Cadiz ir con/ra alga no \r por pan ir por el camino ir tras de alguno J Jactarse de alguna cosa jugar d tal jutgo jugar ima cosa con otra justificcirse de algitna cosa juntar una cosa ion otra juzgar de alguna cosa to insist upon any thing to interest oneself in any thing to mingle one thing with an- other to interfere with any one to interpose h&tweeii things to introduce oneself to the com- manders invaded by the enemies to convert money to another use to go from Madrid towards Ca- diz to go against any one to go for bread to go tn the way to go behind another to boast q/any thing to play at such a-game to bet one thing u'i//i another to justify oneself o/any thing to join one thing to another to judge of^ny thing l.adeat una ccsa d tal parte lamentarse de algo lanzar algo a otra parte lastimarse de alguno leer los pensamientos de otro lexos de tierra libertar a alguno de! peligro lidiar cov alguno lleg'ir d puerto llevar^lgo d alguna parte llevarse de algvina pasion luchar con alguno ludir una cosa con otra M Malqultarse eon alguno mancomunar&e con otros mantener conversacion a alguno maquinar co7itra alguno maravillarse rfealgo mat arse d trabajar matizar con colore^ medikr por alguno to lay any tiling on such a side to lament o/" any thing to push any thing to another place to take pity on any one to read tlie thoughts '{fzny one iiir from land to deliver any one Jrovi danger to quarrel wiik another to arrive at a port to carry any thing to any place to be carried away by passion to wrestle with another to rub one thing a^«i?is/ another to break with another to herd with others to maintain conversation with another to machinate agahisl any one to wonder at any thing to kill oneself tvith labour to shade with colours to mediate yor any one OF PREPOSITIONS. 139 medlrse en las palabras mejorar la for:una de alguno merecer de aiguno meturarse e;i las acciones meter dinero eu el cofre mirar de lejos mirar pot alg^no niofiirse de alguno molerse a trabajar molestir a alguno con visitas morirse de frio motivar a alguno con razones moverse de una parte a otra mudar de casa to be moderate in words to increase the fortune of an- other to merit from another to be cautious in one's actions to put money into the chest to look at a distance to look for any one to make game of any one to fatigue oneself ivith working to molest any one icith visits to be starvea tcith cold to persuade any one hy reasons to move from one side to an- other to remove from one house to an- other N Nacer de alguna parte nacer con foituna nacer pcira el trabajo laadar en. el rio navegar a. Indias negi'irse a la comunicacion nimio e?i el proceder niugiino de los presentes nivelirse a lo justo nombrar a alguno />ara un em- pleo notificar alguna cosii d alguno to come from any part to be born lucky to be born lo labour to swim i/i the river to sail to the Indies to deny oneself to company over nice in actions none of those who are present- to direct oneself by justice to nominate one to an employ- ment to notify any thing to any one Obligar d alguaa cosa obstiiiarse e/i alguna cosa obteut-r alguna gn'icia dc alguno ocultar algo de alguno ocuparse en estudiar ofenderse de algo ofrecer algo a alguno ofrecerse u los peiigros oler algo d otra cosa olvidarse de lo pasado opinir sobre alguna cosa oponerse d una empresa oprimir a otro con el poder optar a los empleos qrdenarse de sacerdote. to oblige any one to any thing to be obstinate in any thing to obtain a favouryr«m any one to conceal any thing from any one to be occupied in study to be offended at any thing to offer any thing to any one to offer oneself to danger to have the smell of a strange thing to be forgetful of what is past to hold an opinion on any thing to oppose to an undertaking to oppres'^ another by power to be a candidate to be ordained into the priest- hood 140 OF PREPOSITIONS. orillar d algana parte to draw lo any side Pagar con palabras pag-ar e?i dizaero pagarse de buenas razoncs paladear.se co/i alguna cosa paliar algo coji otra ctsa pahne'tr a alguno parar en casa parar d !a puerta pararse con alguno parco rn lacomida parecer ct alguna parte partir J, or para, Francia partirse de Espana partir cntre los amigos pasar de Sevilla pasar a Madrid pasearse coti otro pecar de necio pedir algo d alguno pegar contra la pared perecer de hambre pennanecer en alguna parte pertrech: rsc: dt; lo necesario piar/;or algo. plap:r'irse de gr'mos poblar en buen puesto- ponerse d escrib^r portarse con decencia pose'jdo de tern or postr irse ejt, cama precedido-f/e alguno preferir a otro preocuparse de algo prescind ir de^\go presidir oi algua tribunal presumir de doc to prevenir algo a alguno privar con alguno proceder contra alguno procurar por alguno proejar contra las olas proporcionarse /^ara algo prorumpir en lagrimas provenir de otra fosa to pay with words to pay ill cash , to be satisfied wiih good reasons to please one's palate u-ith any thing topalliate one thing 2(u7/i another to shake hands Kith any body to stay at home to stop at the door to make a stay vjith another spariag in victuals to appear in any place to set oiY f'>r France to set ofE from Spain to share [•pfivcen friends to go further //wJi Seville to go to Madrid to walk ivith another to sin through ignorance to ask something/row antyone to beat against the wall to perish with hunger to remain in any place to be furnished unih what i* necessary to long/fjr any thing to be plagued wilk pimples to settle 7n a good situation to prepare oneself for writing to conduct oneself iviih decency possessed icith fear to be confined to one's bed preceded Inj any one to prefer to another to bepreoccupiedu;i//i any thing; to cut o(F from any thing to preside in any tribunal to set up/(;r a learned man to prepare something for any one to be intimate icith any one to proceed against any one to procure for any one to row ai^ainst the waves to proportion oneself to any- thing to burst into tears to proceed from another cause OP PRLPOSITIONS. 141 proximo a monr pujar contra la dificultad purgar dt sospecha at the point of death. to strive a^aimt difHcuUy to clear /ro»i suspicion Quadrar algiina cosa can otra qual de. los dos tjuebrantar las piernasa alguno tjuebrantarse dt dolor quebrar el corazon a alguno ijuedar pox andar quedarse en casa quedirse en el s>erm6n quejarse de alguno quemarse de alguna palabra quemarse per alguna cosa querellarse de alguno querido de todos quien cfeellos quiur algo a alguno quitar alguna cosa de alguna parte quitarse c&quimera» to fit one thing to another which of the two to break the legs of another to be worn out whh grief to break the heart ff any one to have b^ walk further to stay al home to stop short hi a discourse to complain of any one to be ofFeixIcd vcilh any word to heat oneself for any thing to complain of any one beloved by every body which of them, to take any thingy)om any one to take any thing// om any place to free oneself y)owchiinersi% Rablar dt hambre radlcarse en la virtud ra^r alguna cosa de otra rayar en virtud razonar con alguno rebaxar una cantidad de otra recaer e?* la enfermedad f ecatarse de alguno recibir a alguno en: $u casa reclinarse ^ohrt algo recluir aalguno e.u algiina parte recobrarse de la enfermedad, recompensar agravios. can bene- ficios reconciliarse con los enemigcs reducir algo J la mitad remplazar a alguno en su empleo referirse a alguna cosa reglirse d lo justo reirse de. otro remirarsij en alguQa c6.3ji to rage with hun^r to be rooted in virtue to rasp one thing yrom another to excel in virtue to reason mith any one to abate one sumyromanothfiO to relapse in sickness. to be cautious of any one to receive any one into one'^ house to lean upon any thing to shut any one up in any place to recover oneself from an ill- ness to reward ingratitude vcilh. be^ nefits to be reconciled with the ene- mies r to reduce any thin^ to, the half to replace any one in his em- ployment to nefer oneself to any thing to regulate oneself to what is right to make a jest of another to examine oneself in any thing 142 OF PREPOSITIONS. rendirse f any one to break in any place to stammer in conversation to rub one thing willi another Saber de memoria saciiralgo de algi'ina parte sacrificar algo a DlCa sacrificarse ;»or alguno salir d alguna parte salir de algim peligro saltar del su^lo salvar a alguno del peligro san.ir de la enfem-edad satisfac^r por la injuria segregar a alguno de alguna parte seguirse una cosa rfeotra semejar una ccsa a otra sentarse a la mesa sentenciar a 1ms galeras scHtirse de algo separar una cjsa de otra servirse de alguna cwsa eiucerar.se de algo sitiado rfeeneiuigos sjtu-irse en alguna parte subreilcvur los trabajos con pa- cjencia sohresaiir en lucimienta sojuzgado drenem^igo* soipetcrse a alguna to know atiy thing ly heart to take any thing/ro7?t any place to sacrifice any thing to God to sacrifice oneself /or any one to go out to any place to escape from danger to leap from the ground to save any one f'orn danger to cure 0/ a disease to make satisfaction for an in- jury to separate any one from any &ide one thing to foHow/rem another to liken one thing to another to sit down fo table to condemn lo the galleys to be sensible of any thing to separate one thing fiam an^ other to make use of any thing to clear oneself //v>m any thing besieged by enemies to station oneself in any place to undergo labours unih pa.- tience . to surpass in splendour subdued l-y enemies to subaxit oivciclf (I! any one OF fRfiPOSITIONS. 143^ soni\r alguna c his enemies to be moderate in eating to take one/or the other to keep on foot to dye in blue to draw on such a side to chill with cold to stagger in any thing to touch vpnn any thing touched viih madness to take any th'mg wilh the hands deformed o/' body to labour in any thing to join one thing wifK another to mistake tn oue's words to bring any thing from any place to transfer any thing to any per- son to tranjfigure oneself into an- other thing to transform one thing into aa- other to pass l-y any place H4 t)F PREPOSITIONS. transpirar pnr tcdas partes traspasar aig'una c6sa d alguno tratar co7i alguno tratar de algiuia cc sa travesear co« alguno triunfiir de !os enemigos trocar una cosa con otra tropezar ewalguna c6sa U Ultimo entre todos tiniformar una cosa con otra unir una cosa d otra uno de entre muchos tisar de las arm as util para tal cosa utilizarse con algiina cosa to transpire oji every side to transfer something to anc to treat ivith any one to treat of any thing to behave improperly touu. < another to triumph over the enemies to change one th'mgfor anothi to stumble on any thing the last of all to make one thing unifor another to unite one thing with anoth< one anvmgst many to make use of arms useful /or such a thing to make advantage of any &'- Vacfiir d los trabajos vaciarse de alguna ciisa vacilar e/i la conversaciun vagar par el mundo valerse de alguno valuar algo a tal prr cio vanagloriarse de alguna cosa veliir sol-re alguna cosa vencerse d alguna c-'-sa vengarse de algdno venir de alguna parte venir con alguno vestirse d la moda vestirse rfes^da vigilar sdl-fe los subditos violentarse en alguna cosa visible para todos vivir fy??. alguno vivir de su of icio vivir en tal pane volar al cieio volar por el ayre volver de tal parte volver jsor la verdad votar era el pleyto votar por alguno to have leisure yrom work to be emptied /row? any thing to r/ander in conversation to wander through the v^rorl to make use of any one to value anything al such a pri( to be p«fFed up with pride / any thing to watch over any thing to subdue oneself in any thmj to revenge oneself of any on< to corney^wn any place to come uilh another to dress oneself after the fa^ to be clothed in silk to watch ( u'T the subjects :o be violent in any thing visible to all to live icith any one to live by one's employment to Vive in such a place to fly to heaven to fly in the air to returnyrom such a place to be a defender e conjunctions which govern the in- finitive mood J the second, those that govern the sub- junctive J and the third comprehends some others, &:c. 1. Conjunctions which govern the hfmlive. j^fin de ti meiios de antes de eii Ivgur, de lejos de in order to unless before instciid of far from pnrfaUa de hasta antes de par tern or de for want of till rather than for fear of. 2. Conjunctions governing the suljunctive. /ifnique a mams que antes qve en cd.so que lien qxie por temSr que pdra que siiptiesto que tomoque hasta que por lo que that unless before that in case that though for fear lest if though till as for 7/0 nhlantc qtie for all that not that suppose that i provided though without that whether snpijose that i pJcguea Dtos qneGod grant that porque wliy that. vn que j puesio que ton (ondicion que nvnqiie sin que sea que snpucstn que 3. Conjunctions which govern neither the infinitive nor the suhjunctive. Porque asi asi que en verdnd^ or de v6ras en (fee to enjin tiespues despues que a Lo wenos asi, ta^hien tamhien como Ui/sfo que adtmds tanto que because thus as indeed and indeed in short afterwards whereas at least also as well as as soon as moreover as much entanto que porque por csto como mas por quanta de mail era que desde que mas pue% segini si si lien sinofuera que si no I al imtante que however for therefore as besides whereas whereas since moreover then according as so that except that else as so£>n as OF INTERJECTIONS. 147 u;.zun ijue according as ' 710 oLstuitte que however ihjr tul'j/nes then \ adeiiuis moreover p^ir ((Uc why > peru but no hbsteCiite however \ sin cmlarg:o without doubt dtsila • tlieri ! con tbdo eso nevertheless pues (jue since \ "i nor quanda wiien 1 wo mas neither hihre que whereupon 1 J, « or CilreLanto %v!i;lit ' mientras . v/hile aurujue although 1 no que n- 1 that sobre todo especially : hasta till. tanlo que as long as J Ot'servation. Ohserve, that many adverbs become prepositions when they govern a tiouii, a pfoiioiin, or a verb; a«: v.i'i/a vmd, tUknU (kitlvurb) j vUija vmd. dtilanid d^ mi (prejw lition). Seme pvepositlona in tbeir turn bee©t«^ con- junctions, when they are used to join different partsof speech, as hace vmd. eso por vii (preposition)} Iq hari para tomplacer a vmd. (conjunction}. OF INTERJECTIONS. Interjections are indeclinable words used to express the different affectiofis of the mind, either of joy, gritf, fear, aversion, derision, surprise, &c. 1. Of joy, as bravo! inuy Lien! very well ! ^c. 2. OJ^ grief, as ay ! alas ! (jue lastvra ! ha ! &c. 3. Ofjear, as O! ay! ha! ak ! ha! &c. 4. Of aversion, as f^ue ver^uenxa / fy upon you ! &c. Of derision, as oh ! ho! porqueria! pshaw! &c. Of surprise, as vdigame Dios ! bless me ! &C. Of encouragement, as alegre ! cheer up 1 vumos I come on ! &c. Of slopping, as hola ! hold ! poco a poco ! gently ! de^pdcio ! softly ! itc. o2 UH PART II L SYNTAX, OYNTAX is the regular construction of the different parts ©f speech according to the rules of grammar and the genius of a language. Construction supposes three things in every tongue : the UNION of words, their concord, and disfosition. These objects are carefully explained in the following rules, which point out the dliference in each language =\vith accuracy and precision, Syiiiax is here divided into twenty cbiiptev*, somtt of which are subdivided into sectiong. Chapter I.* Use of the articles. Rule 1. Uno, una, a, an. The indefinite article uno, masc. una, fem. (in English a or an), serves, in both languages, to express a substan- tive singular in an indeterminate manner. Example: Un homhre, a man; una muger, a woman ; un arnigo^ a friend ; una casa, a house. La Inglaterra es un pais fer til; — un homhre sdlio. - England is a fruitful country j — a wise man. * The learner must not begin the second chapter of syntax ti^i he undex-stand* the rules of the first; npr the third before he knows the second ; and sp on for all the others. It would be pro- per for him to repeat at least puce a \Y?ek the principal rule* which Iufi has ;iheady learnt, lest he tliuyld forget tUem. SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLES. I.49 Rule 2. El, lo, la,, los, las,, the. The definite article el, masc. lo, fern, lo, neut. Ics, riiasc. plar. las, fern. plur. (in English, the,) is used, in both languages, before a substantive taken in a particu- lar and specified' sense ; that is, before a noun which de- note:* an individual distinction. Example : La cdsa de mi padre, the house of my father j — el lllro (jue tengo, the book which I have. Los homlres que vmd. ha enviudo a hfdlrica han in* sultado a las mugcres (jue estaban trahajando. The men you have sent to the manufactory have in- sulted the women that were working. Rule 3. A or an, translated, by el, lo, la, los, las. The English make use of the indofinite article a or an before nouns oi measure, weight, and number, when they want to express how much a thing is worth or sold for; the Spanish, on the contrary, use the definite article el, lo, la, los, las, in such cases. Measure. Este encaxe vale un escudo la vara. Tills lace is worth a crown a yard. El carbon cuesta dos chelines hi fanega. Coals cost two shillings a bushel. Weight. La mantcca se vende d diez pcniques la libra. Butter is sold for ten pence a pound. Number. Los hutvos valcn quince peniquts la doccna. Eggs are worth fifteen pence a dozen. si:ciioN II. Article used in Spanish and not in English. Rule 4. El, lo, la, not the. The definite article el, la, lo9, lus, is used in Spanish, and not in English, before all substantives taken in the whole extent of their signification,. Example : o 3 150 SYNTAX OP THE ARTICLES. Los homhresson mor tales', Bios alhorrece a \os pecadores.. Men are mortd ; God hates sinners. La virtud es amdble ; el vicio es abominable. Virtue is amiable -, vice is odious. The words men^ sinners, virtue, and vice, are taken in a general sense ; because all men are mortal, God hates all sinners, all virtues are amiable, and all vices odious. Rule 5. El, lo, la, los, las, not the. The definite article el, lo, la, los, las, is used in Spa- nish, and not in English, before names of kingdoms, countries, and provinces. Example : La Francia y la Inglaterra son dos reynos poderosos, France and England are two powerful kingdoms. He atravesado la Espdna, la Suixa, y la Alemdn'm^ I have passed through Spain, Switzerland, and Ger- ttiany. These nouns usually take no article when they are in the genitive case, or after the preposition en. Et ample*: Los rey?ios de Francia y de Inglaterra son poderosos. The kingdoms of France and o/' England are powerful. He viajado en Espdna, en Italia, en Alemdnia, y en Riisia. I have travelled in Spain, in Italy, in Germany, and in Russia. There are, however, some names of kingdoms and provinces which take an article in the genitive case as well as in other cases : Such are el Bengala, el Mexico, el Japon, &c. which make in the genitive, del Bengala, del Mexico, del Japon, &:c. N. B. When the names of kingdoms and republics are the same as those of their capital towns, they are consi- dered as proper names, and as such take no article : of * The names of kingdoms, provinces, &c, are usually pre- ceded by Je, whea they are ia the geuldve or ablative case. SYNTAX OF THE ARTICLES, 151 this sort are (re«oi»a, Ndf)oles, Fenida. Thus one must say, Venecia es una repuhlica, and not la Venecia, iS*c. Rule Q. El, loy la, los, las, without the in English. The definite article el, lo, la, los, las, is used in Spanish before adjectives substantively used, whether ex- pressed in English or not, as Los cuidadosos son alabddos, y los perexosos castigados. The industrious are praised, and the slothful punished. El negro y el roxo son dos colores opuestos. Black and red are two opposite colours. Rule 7. De, del, de la, algunos, algunas, unos, unas, {some,) called the Partitive Article. The article partitive, whose use is to express a part of any thing, is often omitted in Spanish : 1 St. Before a substantive singular taken in a general and indeterminate sense, as Deme vm. pan. Give me some bread j Yo coma came, I eat some meat. 2d. When the article is put before a substantive sin- gular taken in a limited sense, then it is expressed by the genitive of the definite article, as Deme usted dd pan de mi hermano. Give me some of my brother's loaf. Deme vmd de la came, que ticne, Give me some of your meat. 3d. When this article is ^v/brrule; Rull' 9. Repetition of the- artich: Ihe articles arerepeated in Spanish before every sub- stantive, and agree with them in gender and number j in Kngllsh, on the contrary, they are indeclinable. Ex- ample : El genio de h\ Icngua Espanela consiste en la clariddd, hfuerza, \:i elcgandai y h pun'za. The gf nius of the Spanish tongue consists in clearness^ strength, elegance, and purity. SECTION III. Articles in English, and not in Spanish; Rule 10. Ihe, not el, la, lo, los, las. The definite article (the) is used in English^ and 'not in Spanish, before the ordinal number, thejirst, the se- cond, the third, the fourth, &c. used in quotations. Ex- ample: Liiro primero, cnpitulo septimo, parte duodecima. Book the first, chapter the seventh, section the twelfth. Carlos primero, Felipe segundo, Jorge iercdro. Charles the first, Philip the second, George the third. STTKTAX or THE AUTICLES. 153 Rule 11, A, not urio, or una. Tlie indefinite article {a or an) is used in English, and not in Spanish, before nouns which express flie time, pro- fession, trade, country, or any other substantive ante- cedent. Example: f^No es su hermaiio viedicn ? Is not his brother a physician ? f^Es vm. Espailol ? Are you a Spaniard ? Rule 12. A, not uno, or una. The indefinite ailicle (a or an) is also^used in English^ and not in Spanish, in the four following cases : 1 . Before a substantive used in opposition to another, as: El Tey fue reclHdo en triunfo, honra (juevtereda Hen, I'he king \va» r»jceived in triumph, an honour be de- served, 2. Before a substantive which explains the thing spoken of, as ; He leido hoy el Delinquent e Honrddo, comedia estimdda. I have read to-day The Honest Criminal, an esteemed comedy. 3. In the title of a book, or any performance, as ; Gramdtica de la lengua Espfinola, A grammar on the Spanish language. 4. After the word what, used to express surprise, as ; l^ue ruido hdce vm I What a noise you make '. SECTION IV, No article in Spanish nor in English, Rule 13. No article in either language. No article is used in Spanish or in English before the mn}? of God (Dios), nor before prop co7i, or pur, wheh the following noun is at the end of a sen- tence, or is not specified. Examples : Vmd. hdbla con elegancia. You speak elegantly. Fencer sin peligro, es triunfar sin gloria. To conquer without danger, is to triumph without glory. He viajddo por tierra y por war. I have travelled by land and by sea. Chapter IL SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. Rule 19. Tivo substantives in the same case. When there is a conjunction between two nouns, they must be put in the same case j and if a substantive is preceded by a preposition, that preposition is usually repeated in Spanish before all others governed by it, as Su consejo fue gustoso al rey, al minisirOj y al parla- mento. His advice pleased the king, the minister, and the par- liament. Un hombre sin religion estd en un estado de duda y de confusion, de temor y de desconjianza, A man without religion is in a state o/* doubt and coi;i- fusion, fear and distmst. ' SYNTAX OF SUBSTANTIVES. 1>5/ RuU 20. The latter of two sulstantzves is put in the genitive cose. The latter of two substantives is generally put in the genitive case in Spanish, though it be in the dative in English. Example : Los impios son enemigos de la virtud. Impious men are enemies to virtue. Elperro es elamigo del hombre. The dog is a friend to man. Ride 21. A noun collective general. A noun collective general, that is to say, representing the whole object, such as the words pueblo, nacion, exir^ cito, armada, &c. requires that the adjectives, pronoujis, and verhs to which it refers should always be in the sin- gular, as filexercito grande de los Franceses fue totalmente «?«- hecho. The great Frencli array luas totally defeated. Toda la armada esta en la mar; partio aj/er por la ma^ nana. > The whole fleet is at sea ; it set sail yesteiday morning. Rule 22. A noun collective partitive. ' A noun collective partitive, that is, which represents only one part of the whole, such as canliidd, multifud, &c. followed by a genitive plural, governs the verb and * the pronoun in the singidar, if it is preceded by a definite article j but if not, it governs them in the plural. Ex- ample : La muliitud de los extrangeros hace el pan muy caro, (Sing.) The multitude of foreigners make bread veiy dear. Un gran numero de los Christianos se extravian cada dia. (Plur.) A multitude of Christians are led astray every day. The reason of this difference is, that the collective is a 158 SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. substantive when preceded by el, la, lost tas, and a kind of adjective when not : in the first case the verb agrees with the collective, and in the secoi>d with the substan,- tive which comes after the collective. N. B. The verb is always pat in the plural after the words la mayor parte, mucho numero, unless they are followed by a substantive singular. Example : La mayor parte ]o dicen, The greatest portion 5?y so. La mayor parte del mundo lo dice. The greatest portion oi the world say so. Chapter III. SYNTAX OF ADJFXTIVES. This chapter, for the sake of order and perspicnitv, i* divided into four sections. The first explains the concorc and right placing of the adjectives ; the .y^cont/ treats oi their government ; the third has for its object the adjec- tives of dimension j and the fourth compreliends wli^t ever concerns the construction of comjfarativ^s and su perjatives. ' SECTION I. Of the concord and right position of the adjectives. Rule 23. Jll adjectives are dccUnahle. All adjectives are declinable in Spanish, and agree ii gender and number with the substantive to which the^ are joined or relative. Example: Un hovil're \)io, una nniger \>\3., doncellas pi-^s. A pious man, a pious woman, pious girls. Este retrato es caro, ptro es hernrioso *. This picture is dear, but it isfine. * See how to form the feminine of adjectives, page 26, and thci pTural formed from the singular like substantives, page 20. SYNTAX OF ADJECTIVES. 159' ' EsA casn es cam, pero es herniosa. I'hat house is dear, but it kjine. Rule 24. Adjeetives agree with the lasi substantive. When an adieciive or a participle refers to several snh- stantives suigular, we generally put them in the plural, if they are seprated from tiie substantive by any verb y and in the siiigular if they a-re not : as La puerta y la ventana estdban cerradcis. (Plur.) The di/or ant! the w indow were shut up. He halUido la puerta y la ventana cerrada-. (Sing.) 1 have found the door and the window shut up. The reason of this dilFerence is, that in the first case- the adjectives after a passive voice ought to agree with both substantives j whereas in the second it agrees with the last only : in both cases they are placed after the SLibsir.niive. /?v/, they are rich, must be expressed in Spanish by ellos son ricus, in speaking of men : and ellas son ricus, in speaking of women. This can be expressed without pronouns, by saying son ricos, son ricas, they are rich. The personal pronouns are disjunctive, and expressed by yo, lu, el, m. ella,, f-; «05, vos, elks, m. ellas, f.j unde|: the following circumstances : 1 . When they con:e before or after the words que, quien, or solo. Example : Soy yo quien lo digo. It is I who say so. LI es mas erudito que yo. He is more learned than I. Ellos solos estdlan presenteS. They alone were present. 2. When they are used to answer to a question. J&r- ample: ^ Quien hd hecho eso ? soy yo, es el, son ellos, or ellas. Who has done that ? it is 1, he, they. l68 SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 3. When they are joined to a noun or pronoun by a conjunction, as Mi hermano y yo aprendhnos el Espanol, We learn Spanish, my brother and I. 4. When they come before a noun or a verb used in opposition to or distinction from the first. Example: Vmd. uolverd d la ciudad, y yo ire al campo. You will return^to town, and I will go into the country. Rule 42. How to express the personal pronoun in the genitive case. When the personal pronouns are in the genitive case they are disjurtctive, and expressed by de ml, de ti, de el, m. de ella, f. de nosotros, de vosolrosy de ellos, m. de ellas, f. Example : ■"^^g^queja de mi. He complains of me. Ellos no hablan de el. They do not speak of him. They are sometimes, but seldom, conjunctive, and ex- pressed by de el or de ella. Example : Fmd. dma a mi prima ; y habla muchas veces de ella. You love my cousin ; and speak often of her. ^Estdban vmds. hahlando de mi ? — Si. Were you speaking of me ? — Yes. Rule 43. How to express the personal pronouns in the dative case. When the personal pronouns are in the dative case they are most commonly conjunctive, and expressed by 7ne, te, le, nos, vos, les. Example : El me place. He pleases me. Yo le hare sufortuna. I will make him his forturie. Yo les haUarc. I will speak to them. They are disjunrtive, and are expressed by d mi, d tl, del, della, d?iosotros, avosotros^ d ellos, d ellas, after the verb in three cases. SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. l6g 1. When they come after a noun or a pronoun to which they are joined by a conjunction, as Hablo a vm. tamhien como a ellos. I speak to you as well as to them. 2. When they are governed by a reflective verb^ as El se dirige a me. He directs himself to me. Rule 44. The personal pronouns in the accusative case. When the personal pronouns are governed by a verb in the accusative they are generally conjunctive, and expressed by me, te, nos, vos, or os, le, la, les, las i as Le conozco, I know him. La veri, I will see her. ^ Los estimo, I esteem them. Rule 45. Personal pronouns after a preposition. When the personal pronouns are preceded by a prepo- sition they are always disjunctive, and expressed by mi, tiy el, ellos, &c. Example: En quanta u mi pienso asi. As for me, I think so. Vm. hablard despues de ellos. You will speak after tbem. SECTION II. Of the pronouns it, they, them. Rule 46. The pronouns it, they, or tk^m. The pronouns it, they, or them, which are used in English with reference to animals or things, are expressed in Spanish by el, masc. ; ella, fem. sing. ; and by ellos, masc. ; or ellas, fem. plur., when they are the nomi- native of a verb. // or them are expressed by el, masc. ; la and ella, fem. 3 ios and les, masc, plur., when they are 170 SYNTAX or PERSONAL PRONOUNS. governed by a verb in the accusative. Thus in speaking of a house, one may say Mi casa cs juui agraddhle ; no qmero venderla, y la conservare. My house is very fine j 1 will not sell ity I will keep It. ObseiTe, that those pronouns, though they are rela- tive, are used like the personal ones, and ought to agree in gender and number with the substantives to which they refer. I B.uU 47. De el or de ellos, de ella or de ellas, used in the genitive for of it or of them, some or ajiy. The pronoun it or them, used with reference to in- animate objects, is expressed in Spanish by de el, de ella, &:c. ; when the verb governs the genitive case, whether they be preceded in English by the preposition of froju, with, about, for, upon, or any other, &:c. Example : ^Que le parece a vmd. de la repuhlica de Francia 9 What do you think of the French republic ? Ah ! por Dios, no me hable vmd. de ella ! Ah ! for God's sake, do not speak to me of it I Tienevmd. herviosas fores, deme algunas de ellas. You have line flowers, give me some of them. When the words 5ome or any, which are articles parti live in English as in other languages, come after a verb and refer to an antecedent substantive, they are express^ in Spanish by unos, unas 3 algunos, algunas. Example : Si le gustan a vm. estas frutas, le emliare unas. If you like tho^e fruits, 1 will send yon' some, Tengo manxdnas, ^quierevm. unas ? I have some apples, will you liave any ? Deme vm. un par (de ellas). Give me a couple of the?n. Puede vm. tomdr mas (de ellas). You may take some more. y FTNTAX OF PERSONAL PKaNODNS. l/t ^Qtfe hart yo de ellas ? What shall I do with them? Vm. dard unas {or algunas) d sus hermanas. You shall give some to your sisters. , Rule 48. En el, le, los, for ii or them, in the dative case. The pronouns it or them, governed by a verb which requires the dative in Spanish, are expressed by el or los, as the personal pronouns when they refer to animals or plants ; and usually by en el, when they refer to other inanimate objects not personified. Example : Tus cabaUos tiencn hamhre ; dd les auaia. Your horses are hungry ; give them some oats. Este arbol es hennoso ; no le eche vmd. a perder. This tree is fine j do not hurt it. Hay un retrato hermoso ; ponga\e. un quadra. There is a fine picture ) put a frame to it, ^Piensa vm, en mi dinero ? — Si^ pienso en el. Do you think of my money ? — Yes, I think of it. Rule 49. JVhen it or them come after a preposition, they are not expressed in Spanish. When the pronoun it or them is preceded by a pre- position, it cannot be expressed by el, ella, ellos, ellas, which in this case are said only of persons or personified objects.; but they are usually left out, and the preposi- tion used in English becomes an adverb when it conveys sufficiently the idea. Example : El rey estuha por la giierra, pcro elparlamento estuvo en contra. The king was for the war, but the parliament was against it. Accrquese vmd. a la lumbre } esloy junto. Come near the fire j I am. near to it. If the preposition cannot become an adverb, we must give the sentence another turn, as : Primerament^ la casafue quemcida, y despues la iglesia. At first the house was burnt, and after it the church. a2 1/2 SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS RELATIVE. Rule 50, Use of the relative pronouns e\, lo, la, los, las. The relative pronouns el, lo, la, los, las, are always used in Spanish before the verb ser or estdr in answer to a question, though there is no pronoun expressed ii> English. El and lo are indeclinable : 1. When they have reference to a substantive singular and masculine. Example : ^Es vm. el hermano de Pedro ? — Si, lo soy'*. Are you Peter's brother,? — Yes, I am. 2. With reference to adjectives of both genders and iiunnbers, as : ^Son sus hermanos doctos P — No, no lo s6n. Are his brothers learned ? — No, they are not. 3. With reference to verbs. Example: ^Creenvmds. que estas senoras vengan ? Si, lo creemos. Do you think those ladies will come ? Yes, we do. La is used with reference to a substantive feminine singular, as : ^Es vm. la miigtr de Pedro ? — Si, la soy. Are you Peter's wife ? — Yes, I am. If the adjectives were substantively used, la should be used for the feminine singular, and las for the plural, as ; fi,Esvm. la enferma para la qual se ha mandddo d llamdr el medico? — Si, \2iSoy. Are you the patient whom the physician was sent for ? — Yes, I am. ^Sefioras, son vmds. las parienias delsefior Donrjuilotes ? — Si, las somas. Ladies, are you the relations of Mr. Donquilotes ? — Yes, we are. * We can also answer, si, senor ; si, senura j &c. without rc« peating the verb the question is asked by. SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. 1 73 Lo, indeclinable, is also used with reference to adjeC' tives or verbs for the words it or soy sometimes expressed ill English, but generally understood. Example : Vm. es dichoso, e yo no lo soy. You are happy, and I am not so. Yo lo deciay pero no queria vm. creerlo. 1 said so, but you would not believe it. SECTION III. Ilule 5 1 . The right place of personal pronouns. The personal pronouns yo, tit, el, masc. fZ/a, fem ; nosotros,vosotros, ellos, masc.plur. elliis, fem. pi ur. usually precede the verb of which they are the nominative case. Example : Yo lea, I read j tu canta^, thou singest, &c. They can be separated from it by the particle no and the governed pronouns, if there be any, but never by any adverb. Example : * El no los ha visto. He has not seen them, Yo no les hahlare, I will not speak to them, Vm. dice kianpre la verddcl, Ella hablafreqdentemente de vm. You always speak the truth. She often speaks of you. The personal pronouns yo, tu, el. masc. ella, fem. nos' otros, vosotros, ellos, masc. plur. ellas, fem. plur., are placed immediately after the verb or its auxiUary in three cases. 1. In an interrogative sentence. Example : (^Aprende (el) la lengua Espahola 9 Does he learn the Spanish language ? • The scholar must observe, that it is more elegant to make use of the word usted, whose contraction is vmd. than of the per- sonal pronoun, when speaking to one person, and ustcdes, vvhea speaking to several. a 3 174 SYNTAX OF PERSONAL PRONOUNS. ^Quanta tiempo ha que (el) aprende ? How long has he been learning it ? ^ Pronuncio (yo) lien ? Do I pronounce well ? Bella- mente. Extremely well. 2. When they are the nominative .case to the verbs, decir, to say j rcsponder, to answer ; coidinuar, to con- tinue J prosegmr, to pursue ; &c. as in a sentence by parenthesis. Example : Ved (dixo el) la situacidn d que estoy reducido. See {said he) the condition to which I am reduced. Porque (le respond! yo) ^no me hd hablado vm. antes ? Why (/ answered him) have you not spoken to me be- fore? 3. Most frequently when the verb is preceded by the conjunctions a lo menos, tamhien, asi apenas, a caso, va- fiamente, and some others, &c. Example : Apenas se fue (el) ayer por la manaiia quando su her^ mano entro. He was hardly gone yesterday morning when his bro- ther came in. • Rule 52, Pronouns placed after the verb. "When the verb is in the imperative affirmative, the governed pronouns are put after it in Spanish, as in Eng- lish. Example : Halldles. Respondenos. Fela. Speak to them. Answer us. See her. Olservations. Though we have already given an idea of reflective or reciprocal pronouns, page 30, we think proper to repeat ihem here, and illustrate them with some examples; in order to facilitate the learning of the scholar. SYNTAX OF CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. V5 Declension of the reflective or reciprocal pronoun. Singular. — ^^Masculine. (It has no Nominative.) Genitive. de si vnsmo, of himself. Dative. a si mismo, to himself. Accusative, se, a si mismo, himself. Ablative. de si viismoy by himself. Genitive. Dative. Accusative. Ablative. Genitive. Dative. Accusative. Ablative. Plural. — Masculine. de si misvios, of themselves. a si mismos, to themselves. se, a si mismos, themselves. de si misvios, by themselves. Singular. — Feminine. de si misma, of herself. a si misma, to herself. se, a si misma, herself. de si misvia, by herself. Plural. — Feminine. Genitive. de si mismas, of themselves. Dative. • d si mismas, to themselves. Accusative, se, a si mismas, themselves. Ablative. de si mismas, by themselves. The pronouns conjunctive, mi, ti, si, when preceded by the preposition con, are changed in Spanish into migo, tigo, sigo, and make with it one word. Thus we say comnigo, with me 3 contigo, with thee 3 consigo, with him. From thence one may perceive, tliat mismo and misma can be added to the nominative of a verb, taking care to make it agree in gender and number with it. The pronouns of the third person are equally used with reference to persons or things. 176 SYXTAX OF CONJUNCTIVE PRONOUNS. Talle of the pronouns conjunctive. jMasculine and feminine. 1. jMc, VUQy I. 2. llOSy VJQ. 0. te, thee. 4. vos, OS, yon. n. /9, /o5, 5e, them. Mascul. plur. dat. and accus, 8. /a.?, /^v, 5t', them. Fern, plnr, dat. and accusat. 9. iS','^ himself, herself Dat. inK\ accusat. of bolh genders and nnmbers. Rule 53. Construction of these pronouns. Every lime the verb is either in the infinitive or the imperative mood, the conjunctive pronouns come after. In all other cases the general rule will have them before it. E J ample : No querre darlo, I will not give it ; dah, give it. Dando/o, in giving it -, lo hare, I will do it. Le escrihiid, he will write to him j /€ digo, I tell thee, Sucedeme muchas veces ; it happens to me very often. Rule 54. How to place the personal pronoujis conjunctive. The personal conjunctive pronouns being followed by one of the relsrtive of things, lo, la, los, las\ preserve between them the sameoi-der as above. 1 . When the latter are preceded by him, them, or se. 2. When the verb commands j for in this case the pronoun, which is in the dative case in English, is always put in Spanish before the one which is in the accusative. Example : Selo dire, I will tell it him ; decidmeloj tell it me. SYNTAX or PRONOUNS. l"/^ SECTION IV. JFhen the pronouns are or are .not to he repeated in Spanish. Rule 55. The personal pronouns yo, tu, el, &c. repeated. The personal pronouns of the first and second persons, such as yo, tu, nosotro<;, vosotros, are usually repeated, or rather understood in Spanish, before every verb' of which they are the nominative case. Example : Amards a Dios de todo in cor axon ; .{tu) perdonards d ius euemigos, y {tu) rogards por tus perseguidores. You shall love God with all your heart j you shall for* gite your enemies, and pray {or those that persecute you. The pronouns of the third person are also repeated. Example : ^ Ellas son amahlesya que (ellas) legustan dvm. They are lovely since they please you. In other circumstances the same pronouns are not re- peated. El tomo-ciudades, conquistS provinciaSj y sojuzgd na- ciones. He took cities, conquered provinces^ and subdued na- tions. Rule 50. The governed pronouns not always repeated. The pronouns relative to persons are always repeated in Spanish before every verb they are governed by, whe- ther they are repeated or not. Example : Un hijo bien criado no se rebela contra su padre; el lo quiere, lo honra, y lo respeta. A son well educated never rebels against his father ; he loves, honours, and respects him. Amo lo, y lo amare siempre, sise porta bien, I love, and shall always love him, if he behave well. ^7^ SYNTAX OF rRONTOUN'i^ SECTION V. T)ist'niction between el, el la, and si. Uule 5y. Himself, herself, itself,, expressed by si, m mismo^ si misma ; si mismos, si mismas. The compound pronouns himself, herself , themselves, Veined to a verb, are generally expressed by se, if it. is re- flected ; but if not, iiimsi'l/'is expressed by el or cl mismo^ and herself by ella misma ; themselves, by ellos or ellos mismos, masculine j by elks or ellas mismns, for the fe- minine. Exainpie .* Ml se somete /t las ordknes devm, perd no ^$ki satUficho* He submits himsdi; to your ertkrs^ but h@ ii not mtii« Ella halla siempre de si misma, y nunca de otros. She speaks always of herself and never of others, FJlos h.an venido por si mismos al campo. They are. come of their own accord into the country. The compound pronouns himself and herself are ex- pressed by si, speaking of persons in general, and atter the indeterminate pronouns se, cada uno, al^unoy al^unai ijualquiera, este, or es:a cjuieii. Example : El homlre que solo se amd a si mismo, no cs propio para la socieddd. The man who loves nobody but himself is not fit foe society. Qualf/t/iera que de si solo piensa, es indigno de vivir. Whoever tliinks only of himself, is unwortny to live. Hide 58. Itself is rendered by si or si mismo. llie impersonal pronoun itself is expressed by si, and not bv e!\ when it has reference to the word esto or esor SYNTAX OF PRONOUNS. l/C) ' to a substantive singular and masculine, which repre- 'lits an animate object. Example: Elima?i atrae a si el hierro. The loadstone attracts iron to itself. La tierra esfertil de si mistna. v Karlh is fruitful of itself. Chapter V. OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Rule 5Q. The possessive pronouns my, thy, his, her, are rendered in Spanish hy mi, tii, su. , The possessive pronouns are only three in number, mi^ my ; tiiy thy j su, his or her ; and make their plural by the addition of an .f. Example : Mi padre, mi madre, y mis hermdnos estan en el campOi My father, my mother, and brothers are in the country. Til primo y su hermana cstdn paseando juntos. Thy cousin and his sister are walking together. Su padre ha vendido su cahalh d su sotrina, y ella lo reuendio a su prima. His father has sold his horse to his niece, and she sold it again to her cousin. Rule Go. Our, expressed by nueslro and nuestra. The possessive pronoun, nueslro and nuestra, ought to agree in number with the substantive they have a refe- ! rence to, and not with the possessor. Example: Nuestra casa tiene una perspectiva may agradable, y nuestro jardin estd adornado de beUishnas Jlores, Our house has a very fine prospect, and our garden is adorned with the finest flowers. 180 SYNTAX OF POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. Mis criados son muy perezosos. My servants are very lazy. Sus hermanas son muy I'ludas^ His sisters are very pretty. Rule 61. The possessive relative pronouns. The pronouns possessive relative are sometimes fol- lowed by a substantive, especially in exclamations 5 then the substantive comes before, and the pronoun takes no article. Example : iDios mio 1 my God ! /Madre mia ! my mother ! Rule 62. Possessive relative, mine, thine. The possessive pronouns mine, thine, his, hers, Szc. agree in Spanish bolh in gender and number with the an- tecedent substantive to which they refer, and are always preceded by the definite article el, lo, la, los, las. Ex" ample : Los enemigos han destruido muchas casas : la mia y la vuestra futrofi ahrasadas ; pero la suya no ha recihido daiio alguno. The enemies have destroyed many houses : yours and mine have been burnt j but his has not suffered. Rule 63, Mine, sometimes expressed hy mis. When the relative possessives mine, thhie, his', hers, Src. are preceded by of, they are expressed in Spanish by mis, tus, sus, 8cc. Example : El senor A — d, uno de mis discipulos, ha aprendido la lengua Espanola en dosmeses. Mr. A — d, a scliolar of mine, has learnt the Spanish language in two months. Rule 64. Mine, thine, eicpressed hy mlo, tUyo, suyo. When the verb to he is used in the sense of lelonging to, followed by one of the personal pronouns to me, to thee, &c. those pronouns are rendered in Spanish by one of the possessive relatives, whose article is left out. Example.* ^ SYISTAX OF DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS, 181 Este lihroes mio. This is my book. ■Creo que no es suyo. I do not think it is yours. Esto casa es suya. That house rs his. Rule 65. Mine, thine, expressed by a suhstantwe in the genitive case. If a substantive or a relative pronoun comes after the verb to he, signifying to belong to, they are both put in the genitive case in Spanish, as well as in English, as : Este caballo es de mi hermano. This horse is my brother's. ^Cuya or de cjuien es esta casa ? Whose house is that ? Chapter VI. OP DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. iiule66, Este,masc, esia, fern, esio, neut, thisj ese, viasc. esa, fem. eso, Jieut. that ; estos, masc. plur. estas, fern. plur. these ; a^zriaquel, masc. sing. that. There are three distinct sorts of pronouns : 1. Este shows the thing or person that is just near or by us. 2. Ese shows the thing that is a little further from th# person to whom one speaks. 3. Aquel shows what is very distant from the person ^vho speaks, as well as from him who is spokea to. — These pronouns are generally used before substantives in -the Spanisli language. Example : Este hombre es dodo. This man is learned. Esta nifia es maliciosa. This little girl is malicious. E^tejardin esta hien cultivado. This garden is in good order. Ese pays es muyfcriil. That country i$ very fruitful* 182 SYNTAX or DEMONSTRATIVE PKONOUNS. j^quel reyno es muy pohlado. That kingdom is very well peopled. The demonstrative pronouns are repeated before e^ ery substantive, and agree vi^ith each in gender and number, Exaviple: Este huertOf cslos arholes, esta casa, y todas estas ta- Has no valen quinientas guineas. This garden, these trees, this house, and all these plank3> are not worth five hundred guineas. Este homlre es unpicaro. This man is a rogue. Estas plumas no valen nada. These pens are good for nothing. Esq es lueno de comer. This is good to eat. ^Porque ha hecho vmd. eso sin mi licencia? Why did you do that without my leave ? Bule 6/. Qual, or loque^ what, or that which. The pronouns that which or what, signifying that thing, are expressed in Spanish by qual, or h quaL, al- ways singular masculine j as : Lo que es agradalle al gusto, es muchas veces contrario a la salud. What is agreeable to the taste is often hurtful to the health. Lo que mns deht'mos temer, es la calumnia. What we ought to fear most is calumny. Lo que mas deseo es que se haga la pd%. What 1 wish most is, that peace may be made. Rule 68. Eso, esa, this or that. When the demonstrative pronouns have reference to several substantives, this and these refer to the nearest object or last spoken of, and are expressed by eso and esa-j and those that have reference to the most distant SYNTAX OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 183 I objects are expressed by aquel, niasc. j aquella, fem. j aquello, neut. Eiample : Elcuerpo perJce, el alma es inniortal ; sin embargo nos descuiddmos de esa, para sacrificarlo tndo a aquel. The body perishes, the soul is immortal ; however we neglect this, in order to sacrifice every thing to that. Aqui hay Lutnos Ubros j (^ quales qidere vmd. mas, esos Q. aquellos ? Here are good books ; which do you like best, these or those ? Rule 6g. He who is expressed in Spanish by el que. When the personal pronouns he, she, they, or those, are the antecedent of who, that, or which, they are not ex- pressed by el ox ella, as before, but by he who, rendered by el que j'^she who, by la que ; they who, by los que or las que ; as : El que no puedeguardar un secreto es incapaz de golemar. He who cannot keep a secret is incapable of govern- ing. Chapter VII. OF FxELATIVE PRONOUNS. Rule 70. Que, quien, qual, who, that, or which. The relative pronouns who, that, or which, are ex- pressed in Spanish by que, for all sorts of objects, either with or without a nominative case between them and the verb. Example : El hombre que kabla. The man who speaks. El libra que tengo. The book which I have, L2 casa qu" he visto esta Men labrdda. The house that I have seen is well built. r2 1B4 SYNTAX OF RELATIVE PRONOUNS* Rule'^l. Pel qual, cuyo, de quien j of whom, whose^ or which. The relative pronouns whose, of whom, of ivhich, are usually expressed in Spanish by cuyo, m, cuy^a, f. making^ their plviral cuym, cuyas ; de (/uien, hy which, piur» ^uienes ; qual\ ly wh)m, whose, ^IwxdW'i quales, serving for all sorts of objects. Example: ijfe vis to al hambre de quien vmd. halla. I have seen the man of wfiom you speak. Es una indispodcion de la qual el cirujano no conoce la causa. It is ao illness the CtUise of which is unknown to the surgeon. If the antecedent be not in the nominative or accusa- tive case, whose or whom are expressed by cuyo, cwja, according to the gender to which they refer. Example : Pedro, cuyo libro teng/). Peter, whose book I have* Es un homlre cuya diserecion no niego. He is a man whose discretion I do not deny. N. B. The relative pronoun ^om whom, which an- swers to the Latin ablative, is always expressed by de quien. Example : El homlre de quien he reciUdo una carta ayer, estd en- fermo. Themanyrow whom I received a letter yesterday, is ill. Rule 72. Quien or el qual, la qual ; tuhom, which. When the relative pronouns are in the dative case, or after any preposition, they are usually expressed by quien, speaking of persons, and always by el qual, nu la qual, f , and /o qual, n. losquales, and las quales, pi., speaking of animals or things. Example : Su padre devmd. es un howlre'dqu'\er\ debeohedech,^ Your father is a man whom, you ought to oUey , SYNTAX OF INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 185 La gloria a la qual los heroes pretenden es una gloria falsa. ^ The glory to which heroes aspire is a false ^ory. Es una raznn a la qual no hay que replicar. It is a reason to which there is no reply. Evite las culpas en las quales he caido. Avoid the faults into which i have fallen. Rule 73. Place and concord of the^relative pronouns. The relative pronouns are placed in Spanish imme- diately after the nouns or pronouns to which they refer, and agree with them in gender and number, as : Los lihros d los qnales hJ subscrito son may huenos. The books to which I have subscribed are very good. Chapter VIIT. OF INTERROGAIiVE PRONOUNS. The interrogative pronouns are in English these three : who, tvhich, and what ; they are expressed in Spanish as follow ; Rule 74. Que, el qual, la qual j who, which, what. When the word which is interrogatively used, it is al- ways expressed in Spanish by que or qual for the singu- lar, and que and qunles for the plural. Example : (J Qual de csos caballosvie aconseja vm. de comprar ? Which of these horses do you advise me to buy r Is thai ? No es ? Is not that ? In English the demonstrative pronouns this or that for the singular, and these or those tor the plural, are put before the possessive pronouns viy, his, your, their^ when questioning to whom such or such thing belongs. Those sorts of iuterrogations are expressed in Spanish by es j or, if the sentence is negative, by no es. Example : ^Es ese su sombrero ? Is that your hat ? ^No es esa su casa ? Is not that your howse ? ^No son i stas smoritas muy lindas ? Are not those ladies very pretty ? 18S SYNTAX OF INTER KOGATTONS. ^Hdn producido lien la^ vinas 9 Have the vines borne a good crop ? ^ No hay abimdancia defrulas ? Is there not abundance of fruit ? Chapter X. Different sorts of que. There are in the Spanish language six sorts of que, called, 1. que, relative j 2. que, interrogative; 3. que, admirative ; 4. que, conditional ; 5. que, conjunctive ; 6. que, comparative. Having spoken at large of the two first in the seventh and eighth chapters, we will now treat of the remaining four. Rule 80. Quo ! {admirative) how ! or how much I The que admirative expresses wonder or surprise ; it answers to the En^^lish words how ! tvhai J how much ! how many I Example : [ Que huen aijre tiene vm. ! How well you look ! ; Que visla tan hermosa ! What a fine prospect ! / Que honita ! Parece tan Iiermosa como un angel. How pretty ! She looks as beautiful as an angel. Observe, 1. That the adjective which follows how ia English is always put after the verb in Spanish : / Que soy inftliz I How unhappy I am ! / Que trabdjo wdd vm, por mi ! How much trouble you take for me ! 2. Uhow maity were preceded by the preposition to, oj\ or any other, it should be expressed by quanios or quan.' tas. Example : SYNTAX OF INTERROGATIONS. 3 89 / A quantos pdlgros no esti'we yo expuesto en Francia ! To how many dangers have I not been exposed in France ! Rule 81. Que (conditional), whether or if. The conditional (pie is used in the beginning of a sen- tence for the word whether, and in the middle to avoid the repetition of si j in both cases it governs the sub- junctive mood. Example : Que lo haga 6 no, no me dd cuidddo. "Whether he does it or not, I do not care. Si el Setior B. vinitse y no estuviese en casa, que me aguarde. If Mr. B. comes and I am out, let him wait for me. Ride 82. Que used with several conjunctions. The que conjunctive may be used with many conjunc- tions, and particularly with the twelve following : 1. j^n que, that. 7. Desde que, since. 2. A mcTios que, unless. 8. Hasta que, till. 3. Antes que, before. 9. Quando que, when, 4. Aun que, yet. 10. Par que, because. 5. For terndr que, for fear. 11. Luego que, as soon as. 6. Es menester que, it must, 12. Que (coraparat,), than. Examples. 1 . Fenga aqui quele hahle a vm. Come here, that I may speak to you. 2. No ire a verle a menos que me convide. I will not go and see him, unless he invites roe. 3. No ird vm. antes que e/ sol saiga. You shall not go out before the sun rises. 4. Aun que tubiera todo el oro del mundo, no estaria sa^ tisfecho. Though he should have all the gold in the w^orld, yet he would not be satisfied, IQO SYNTAX OF INDETERMINATE PRONOUNS* 5. Fay use, por temor que el amo venga. Go, fur fear the master should come. 6. Es menester que vm. se vnya inmediatamente. Ytiu must go immediately. 7. Estd sienipre /u?iguido desde que estd enfermo. He is always lingering since he has been ill. 8. Quedese vm. hasta que pdse la lluvia. Stay here till the rain be over. 9. Yo estdba en Madrid quando viurio. 1 was in Madrid mhcn he died. 10. No quierejuntarse con nosotros, por que no tiene dinero. He will not join with us, because he has no money. W, Le volvere a vm. su libro luego que mi padre lo hdya leido. I will return you your book as soon as my father has read it. •12. Su padre es mas viejo que el mio. Your father is. older than mine. Note. The conjunction que is also placed between two verbs, and serves to particularize the sense of the first j as : Creo que ninguno puede serf ellz sin practicur la virtM, I think no one can be happy without practising virtue. ChapteRjXL OF INDETERMINATE PRONOUNS. Rule S3. Use of the particle su J one. All vague and general reports expressed in English by they say, people say, one says, it is said, it is reported, and such like, are rendered in Spanish by se; with the verb in the third person singular of die active voice ; as Se dice, se cree, se ratijica de todas partes que la cosa es asi. People say, it is thought, they ^maintain every where that it is so. SYNTAX OF INDETERMINATE PRON'OUNS. iQl Se cree que la pdz se hara este ano. It is believ.ed that peace will be made this year. ^Se han recihido cartas de Espaita hoy ? Have letters been received from Spain to-day ? Se ha despachado hoy una pasta d Jlemdn'ia. A courier has been sent to-day to Germany. Se must be repeated before every verb of which it is the nominative case -, as : Se ceUhra, se culpa, se amendxa, se castiga, ^c. They praise, they blame, they threaten, they punish. Rule 84. Different significations of raismo, misraa. The word the same is expressed in Spanish by el mis' mo, ra, la misvia, f. for the singular ; los mismos, m. las viismas, f. for the plural, whether it be joined or rela- tive to a substantive ; as : La misraa cosa iio gusta a todos. The same thing does not please every body. Las costumhres no son las mismas en todos ^los paises. Customs are not the same in every country. The words mismo and misma are sometimes used in Spanish to give more energy to the speech; then they come after a substantive or a pronoun, and answer to the English expression himself, herself, itself Example : El rey mismo no lo quiere. The king himself op^poses it. La religion misma lo ha prohilido. Religion itself has forbidden it. The words mismo and tamhien are sometimes used like an adverbial particle ; then they answer to the English words a/50 and even. Rule 85, Muchos, muchas j many or several. The words many and several are expressed by muchos, ra. pi. and muchas, f. pi. Example: 192 SYNTAX OF INDETERMINATE PRONOUNS, Muchos sc eiiganan queriendo enganar d otros. Many deceive themselves when they want to deceive others. No se aplique vm a muchas cosas d la par. Do not apply yourself to several things at once. jRide 86. Otro, otra, pronoun and adjective^ another. The indeterminate pronoun other, another, is ex- pressed by otro, m. otra, f. otros, pi. m. otras, pi. f. These words are either pronouns or adjectives : when pronouns, they are always masculine 3 and when adjec- tives they agree in gender and number with the substan- tive to which they refer. Example : Otro no le hubiera perdonado a vm. tanfacilmente conio yo he hecho. Another would not have forgiven you so easily as I did. No haUe vm. mat de los otros si quiere que los otros ko kahlen de el. Do not speak ill of others, if you will not that others speak ill of you. N. B. When the word others is in the genitive or da- tive case, it is most commonly expressed in Spanish by proximo ; as : No debemos desear la hacienda de nuestro proximo. W^e must not covet other men's goods. No haga vm. a su proximo lo que no quisiera que h hiciese. Do not do to others what you would not they ^ould do to you. Jlule 87. Cada uno, cada una 3 every one, every body. The indeterminate pronouns ev€ry one, every body, are generally expressed by cada uno, m. cada una, f. and are always singular. Example: Dios prevtiard a cada uno styunsus ohras. God will reward €ve7y body according to his merits. SYNTAX OF INDETERMlNrAT* PROKOUXS IQS Cada uno ohra a su manor a. Every one acts after his own way. The word every before a substantive is expressed bjr cada, adjective. Example : Cada ciencia tiene sus principios. Every science has its principles, t Cada pais tiene sus costumbres. Every country ha? its customs. The word each is also expressed by cada uno ; as ; Ponga vm. esos Ubros cada uno en su lugar. Put these books each in its place. Los quadros de los grdndes maestros tienen £ada. uno su merito. The pictures of great painters have each their merit. Rule SS. Alguno, alguiw, awrfalgun, somebody. The indeterminate pronouns somebody, any body, are expressed by alguno, masc. alguna, fern, singular. Ex- ample : Alguno veridrd hoy a comer con nosotros. Somebody will come to dine with us to-day. fiHa alguno dudado jamas de la existencia de Dios ? Has ever any body doubted the existence of God ? When some or any are substantively used, they are ex- pressed by unos or unas, or algunos or algunaSy always in the plural. Example : Me servire de algunos de sus Ubros. 1 will make use of some of your books. ^Condce vm. algunas de a(fuellas senoras ? Do you know any of those ladies ? Tengo naranjas, ^ quiire vm. algunas ? I have some oranges^ will you have any ? 19*1 SYNTAX OF INDETERMINATE PRONQUNS. Of TOD o, and its various, constructions. The word todo admits of a great diversity in the Spa- njsl^ langiw^c^ beixig either a substantive, an adjective, a pronoun, and even an adverb, according to the following explanation. Rule 89. El todo, sul)stanilve, masc. sing, the whole. When the English wor4 the whole is not placed before a noun, it is a subs^tantive, and expressed in Spanish by el todo, always sii-igalar masculine. Example : El todo cs mas grande que su parte. The whole- is greater than its part, Tomare'el todo. I will take the tvhole. The word all or every thing followed by a verb is also a substantive, and expressed by todo without an article j as : Todo es vafiiddd en este viundo. All is vanity in this world. Rique%as, dignidades, honras, todo desapartce e?i la muerte. Fortune, dignities, honours, every //ziw^ disappear when we die. Rule 90. Todo el, toda la, adject, all, or the whole. When the word all or the whole comes before a sub- stantive it is an adjective, and expressed by todo el, m. toda la, f. for the singular, and by todos los, m. todas las, f. for the plural. Example: Soy con todo tl respecto posible su humilde servidor, ^c. - I am with all possible respect your humble servant, &:c. Note. When todo stands for the word every placed be- fore a substantive, it takes an article in the plural, and not in the singular. Example: Todo muchacho dele oledecer d sus superiores. Every child ought to obey his superiors. SYNTAX OF iNnETEHMlNATE PROKOUN'S. 195 Todos los homlres dmdn sus plac&es. Every man is protie to pleasures. Rilegi, Todo lo que, all that, even/ thing thai* , The Bnglish word nil thaty evirry thing that, an^ ^Iso whatever signifies «// /Aof, are' pronouns, and expre^se I in Spanish by todo lo yr/e, always singular i^ p.. 1 masculine* Eramfile • Todo lo que dice vm. es vcrdad* Jtl that you say is trae._^ f{No havhilo vm. todo lo qne^aHa que ver ? liave yon not seen every thing \\\2iX. was to be seen ? * .......... Rule Q2. Todo, decVinnVfe and'tadccnnaile, anslvcrhttr to the Evgliih word quite. When the word todo stands f9r the adverb ^7/ j/^^^.eTi- iireiy, in a sentence, it is always indeclinaWe. befo|:e^ noun masculine, singjular «i- piuraL Example: , Su padre es todQ podefoso ,ea estahia. . , Your tather is quite pmv^rfTd Inr tbiti. bTjuJ. La Semra M.fuc todo sorpresa aloir estas notfciat. Madam M. w as 'quite surprised at that news. Sus hermdna3 todas opulentas y todas hermusas que scan no se casa?i. Your sisters, a* rich ^d handsoline as they are, do not marry. Rule 93. Qualquiera, however, whatever, isfc, . The English word whatever , followed by a substantirfe-' and any other verb than to be, is an adjective, and ex- pressed by qualquiera before a noun singular, as well as (before a plural number. The construction is, I . qualquiera ; 2. the substan- tive 3 3. que; 4. the verb in the subjunctive 5 — the rest- as in English ; as : s 2 IC}6 SYNTAX OF INDETERMINATE tBONOUNSS. Qlualqwerafalta que haya cometido, le perdoriard. Whatever fault he has committed, 1 will forgive him. Qualquiera riqutza que ter/ga vm. nunca estd satis- fecho. Whatever riches you may have, you are never satisfied. Qualquiera cosa que hiciere para mi le preiniare d ym, por el la. Whatever you do for me, I will reward you for it. Rule 94. Qualquiera, qutenquiera j whoever, whosoever. The indrterminate pronoun^^ whoever, whosoever', are most ccmmonly exj;re8sed in Spuijinlj by quulqukra or quleiiquiera, when thty are tho nominative or accusative case. Example: Dlos castigard quienqiiiera hahrd traspasado ms ler/es, God will puiush whosoever hhall have transgressed his laws. De quienquiera que tu hdl'les evita la calumnia. Of whomsoever you speak, avoid slander. Rule 95. Uno y otro, one another f The indeterminate pronouns one another and each other, are expressed in Spanish by otro, m. otra, f. for tlie singular ; oiros, m. pi. otras, f. pi. The first of these pronouns is always in the nomi- native in Spanish : thus, if they are preceded by a prepo- sition in P^nglish, that preposition must be put between them in Spanish j as : Mi hermano y su hermana hahlan siempre uno c^eotro j piensan uno en otro ; han nacido uno para otro 5 iio puc- den vivir uno sin otro. My brother and your sister speak always of ow^ another j they think of owe another ; they are made for one another-, they cannot live without one another. SYNTAX O F I X D E T« I. W I N-A^'fi- FHO X O U N S . lt)f Pcule gd. AmloSj uno u olro, lu uno ni olro. Both J either; neither. These pronouns agree in gender and number with th:; noun to which they have a reference j if they are pre- ceded by a preposition in English, that preposition must be repeated in Spanish before uno and before otro. Ex- ample : Lo hare por vno y por otro. I will do '\iJor them both.. Lo hare por uno 6 por otro. I will.do it. for either. No lo hare ni por uno ni por otro. I Vv'ill do ityb?- neither of ihfni. Me sirvo de ambas manos. I use loth han.ds. Rule gy. NingUTta persona, nadiCj nobody. The indeterminate pronoun nobo'ly is expressed by nivguna persona, masculine and singular. Example: Ninguna persona conoce sus sentimientos. Nobody knows his sentiments. J ningima persona gusta vm. You please nobody. Persona is masculine as a pronoun, and feminine as a substantive. A ninguna persona conozco ta?t erudiia como vm, I know nobody so learned as you. Conozco una persona tan docta r'omo vm, (Fern.) I know a person as learned as you :ire. Rule 93. Ninguno, ninguna, none, Tiot one. None at^d not one are expressed in Spai1i«?h by nlnguno and ninguna, both used adjectively. Exampl Tenia muchos cimigos ; pero ninguno de t.a..^ //ic : asistido. I h:!d many friends -, yet not one of tbemb^ reli€ved;^mc -l:smg\in2i de estas mugcres estdba prtsente, iyp/ie of those women were present. s,.3. IPB SYNTAX OF NEGATIOKS. Rule 99. Nada^ nothing. The word nothing is expressed by nada. Example : Nada hay mas daTioso a la reputacion que la calumnia. Nothing is tnore hurtful to reputation than slander. Nada he vis to mas ogiadalle. 1 have seen nothing more agreeable. Chapter XII. SEVERAL MODES OF NEGATION. This chapter is divided into two sections : the^ri^ ex- plains how to express in Spanish the English negations j the 5eco72c? shows the several circumstances in which a ne- gative expression is required in Spanish^ though there may be none in English. SECTION I. How to express in Spanish the English negations. The English negations are eight : 1 . nolody ; 2. noney or 720^; 3. nothing; 4. neither', 5, never ^ (}, ly no means; 7. no; 8. 7iot. We have spoken in the pre- ceding rules of the three first, therefore we wilU only treat here of the five others, Rule ICO. No, ni ; neither, or r^pr. The word neither, besides its being an indeterminate pronoun (as has been said before, rule 96), is also a ne- gative ccnj unction when followed by nor. "When neither and nor come before two nouns, or two verbs in the in- finitive moody they are both exp essed by ni before the verb which is in the indicative mood. Example : SYNTAX OF NEGATIONS. IQQ Ni supUcas, ni amenaxas le pudieron enternectr. Neither prayers jior threats could move him. El no sale ni leer ni estrihir. He knows neither how to read nor write. Rule 101. No and nunca, Tzeuer; de nmguna ma- nera, by no means, De ninguna manera requires no before the verb. JSr- ample : Nunca he vista la reyna de Inglaterra. I have never seen the queen of England. No apruelo de ninguna manera su conducta, - I by no means approve of his conduct. Rule 102. Ninguno, niguno, wo, no. The negative expression no, before a substantive, is ex- pressed in Spanish by alguno or ningi/no, masc. sing, al- guna or ninguna, fem. sing, algunas, f. pi. Example : No iieuc vm. algunas buenas calidddes: You have no good qualities. El no toma ningun cnidado de sus negocios. He takes no care of his business. When no is used in an answer to a question, it is ex- pressed by no J as \ ^Havm. vis to al rey ? — No, Senor. Have you seen the king. — No, Sir. ^Aprende vm. la lengua Italiana ? — No, Senorita, Do you learn the Italian language? — No, Miss. Rule 103. No, not; no que, not that. The negative not is usually expressed by no before the verb or its auxiliary, and no que after. Example : Lo hare; no que s6a obligddo a ello, pero para tenet la paz. I will do it ', not that I am obliged, but to have peace. 200 ' SYNTA X OF NEGATIONS, Nofe. The words, tzo more, or not any more, are ex- pressed by mas de, without comparison ; and mas que niinca, or jamas, when more is followed by than compa- rn lively used. Example: No teugo rnas de quarcnta y c'lnco anns. 1 am no more than forty-iive years old. No hay m?s de vna semdna que he vUto d su liermano : vm. no le vera nunc^i or jjimas. It is no more than a week since I saw your brother : you will see him no more. SECIION II. Negative expressed in Spanish and not in English. Rule 104. Negative used in Spanish and not in English, The particle no is used in Spanish afier the following- words J mas, more ; mejor, better ; ?nenos, less ; pear, worse ; mas presto, sooner ; de otro modo, otherwise. In all these cases there is no negative expressed in English.. Example : Su hermano cs masjoven.que nb pensaha. Your brother is younger than I thought. Vm. ha venido mas prt'sto que noestnva eiperado, You are come sooner than yon were expected. Le impedire que no le agrdvie, 1 will hinder him from injuring you. Piulc 105. Negation used in Spanish and not in English. The following conjunctions — amenos que, unless ; per temor que, for fear ; para que, lest ; si, used for unless ^ que, for before or until — require the particle ?zo before tlie next verb. Example :, ' . No ire alii amenos que vm. no venga coitwigo. I i^'ill not go there, unhss you come with m^ \ SYNTAX OF VERBS. 201 Ftulc lOti. No before the verb, and que after, but or only. When the words but or only come after a verb, with- out any stop between them, they are expressed by n(^ be- fore and que after. Example : ' No tengo mas que veiute guineas. I have /?«/ twenty guineas. The word only after a verb is expressed by solo ; if be- fore it, there is a conditional expression. Example : Si vni. tuvic.se solo dos amigos mas, saldrici bien con tndf>* If you had only two friends more, you woujM succeed. When but begins the second part of a sentence, it » usually expressed by pero. Emm pie .• De seo mucho vinjar, pero no tengo dlnero, I wish much to travel, hut 1 have no money. SYNTAX OF VERBS. Thi verb is a part of speech the most extensive, the most essential, and altogether the most ditBcult, cither to teach or to learn ; therefore close attention must be given to the following pages, in which the construction of verbs is fully explained, and the different genius of the two languages is pointed out with accuracy and precision. Chapter XIU. OF THE GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. Rule 107, Verbs which govern the genitive case in Spanish. I. Most of the reflected verbs not mentioned in the next rule govern the genitive case in Spanish, whatever case they govern in English. 202 SYNTAX OF VEKB3. Juft'irsede a!gu?jacosa, to boast 0/ any thing. MaraviUarse de algo, to wonder at any thing. Mofarse (XQ-algimo, to make game of any one. Quilarse de chimeras, to free oneself Jrom chimeras. 2. The following-— fener laslima, to pity; gozar, to enjoy; mor'tr, to die, &c. — govern the genitive case iii the c'panish language. Thus we say : Tener lastima de los pohres, to pity the poor. Gozdr de nna luena salud, to enjoy a good health. Morir de 7^7?a evfermeddd, to die o/' an illness. And so on for others. 3. The verbs passive followed in Engiish by the pre- position /rom or wiih, also govern th-s genitive in Spanish. Example : Estd cargado de botin, he is loaded wiih spoils. E'te libro estd traducido del Ingles. This book is translated jro?/? the English. 4. The word ly^ which comes sometimes after a verb- passive, is u^^nitUy es|3rrrido muckos peligros. Your faiiher has run many dangers, OM3«/oera Joven freqlviuaba la camedia. ' When / was young I frequented the playhoo^e. • U2 220 SYNTAX OF VERBS. Rule 1 2g. IVhen the preterite indicative is to he used. The preterite indicative, as, hable, I spoke -, hice, I did ', vendif I sold, &c. n used in Spanish to express a partrcular fact or event which has happened but once or very seldom, and in a time quite past. Example : Los Romanos desterraron a Tarifuino de Rema, The Romans expelled Tarquin from Rome. Cesar fue muerto en el senddo. Caesar was killed in the senate. Ciceron tubo la cabeza cortada, Cicero had his head cut off Cante ayer en la asamhlea. I sung yesterday in the assembly-room. Rule 130. When the compound of the present is used. Tlie compound of the present, as he hahlddo, I have spoken 3 /^e ffca^aofo, I have finished j he recihido , Ih^MG received, &c. is used in Spanish to express a thing past, but in a time not quite elapsed. A time is not elapsed when the pronoun this or our are or could be prefixed t« the words age, year, month, week, or day, mentioned in a sentence ; as : Nuestro sigh lia producido homhres ilustres. Our age has produced illustrious men. Hemos recibido mucha compAHia este invierno. We had much company this winter. Observations. From the three preceding rules it appears, that a verb which is in the imperfect tense in English, may some- times be put in three ditferent tenses in Spanish. 1. In the imperfect, when it expresses an habitual thing, or which was present when another thing hap- pened 3 as : fftNTAX OF TEB8S, 221 Quando e-itaba en el campo, me paseaba todos hs dias. When / was in the co inrry, I walk^ed every day. Est aba muy malo quanda vm. vino. 1 was very ill when you came. 2. In the preterite, when it denotes a particular fact which happened in a time quite past. A time is quite past when the pronoun this or our cannot be prefixe.l to it ; as : Examine ayer los papeles de su pleyto. I examined yesterday the writings of your law-suit. Estuve nidlo la semdna pasdda. I was ill last Week. 3 . fn the compound tense of the preienty when the time is not quite past. Ecample : Me he paseado esta manana durante una hora,. I have walked this morning for one hour. Oiservation. These exaniplies have been repeated, in order to render more obvious the distinction between the imperfect, the preterite, and the compound' of the present. Mule 131. IVheJitJw future of the indicative is- to he iLsed: The future of the indicative, as hnblare', I shall or will speak J hare, I will do^; rmdire, I shall receive^. &:c. is used in ^^panish,. as well as in English, to express a future time. ExampU: Nuestros cuerpos resucitariin el ultimo dia. Our bodies will rise agaim on ihe last day. Ghapteh XVf . Of the use of the suh^ujictwe mmd^ This chapter is divided into three sections. The first enumerates the adjective*^ prom>Qns, verbs, and conjnnc* u3 iJ22 SYNTAX OF VERBS. tions which always govern the subjunctive niood. The second^ the verbs and conjunctions which govern the following verb, sometimes in the indicative and some- times in the subjunctive, and points out in what circum- stances each mood must be used. The third explains when the verbs governed in the subjunctive must be put in the present^ when in the preterite, and when in the compound tenses ; with some observations on the imper- fect and future of the said mood. SECTION I. Words which always govern the suljunctive mood. Rule 132. The subjunctive is used after a superlative. 1 . A verb preceded by que is put in the subjunctive ; as : La Tpgor guardia que un rey put'de iener es el coxazon ie sus vasal I OS. I he best guard a king can have, is the heart of his subjects. Pm. es el mas dodo que conozca esta ciuddd. You are the most learned man / know in this city. 2. After these three words — m?iguno, u/idie, riada — as*we ha^^e said before in speaking ot indeterminate pro- nouns J as : No conoxco d ninguno que sea tan dichoso como vm. I knijw nobody, who is so happy as you. No he visto nada que pueda ser reprehendido en su con- ducta. I have seen nothing that can be blamed in his conduct. 3- After the ordinal numbers, as eZj&nmeVo, the first; el segundo, the second, &c., as ; F". es el pri ner amigo que haya encoritrado en Londres, You are the first friend I have met with in London. Rule 1 33. lae subjunctive is used after the verbs of fear or doubt. A vepb preceded by que is always put in the saojunctiv© SYNTAX OF VERBS. 223 after the verbs which express any doubt, wish, command, order, fear, ignorance, or any affection of the mind 5 and particularly after the following : MnndaTy to command. Dudar, to doubt, Temer, to fear. Refusar, to deny. Prohibit, to forbid. Estdr a/egre, to be glad. Jgnorar, to be ignorant. Suplicar, to pray. Desear, to wish. QuereTj to be willing. Examples. Temo que mi padre haya muerto. I fear my father ie (or is) dead. Deseo que vm, pueda acertar. 1 wish you may succeed* Dudo que haya llegado. I doubt that he is arrived. DesM que se haga la paz. I wish they would make peace. Rule 134. The suljunctive is used after the following conjunctions, A verb is always put in the subjunctive after the fol- lowing conjunctions : A menos que, unless. Sin embargo que-, for all that. Antes que, before that. A'o que, not that. Aun que, though. Supnesio que, suppose that. Por temor que, lest. Con tal que, provided that. Pot ?niedo que, for fear. Por que, tliat En caso que, in case that. Bien que, though. Como que, though. Sin que, without. Hasta que, till. Sea que, whether. JVo obstante que, for all that. Pue.^to que, because. Examples. A menos que vm. venga conmigo no saldre. Unless you came with me, I will uot go out. 224 SYNTAX OP VERBS, Aunque sea perezoso, adelanta mucho. Though he is lazy, yet lie improves much. Estare pronto avtes que vengan I will be ready before they are come. N. B. The subjunctive is always used in the beginning of a sentence to express surprise, and imprecation, or aa ardent desire j as : Pudiese vm. ser dichoso ! Might you be happy ! Que mut'ra si no me vengo J May I rather die, than not revenge I SECTION II. Fcris and conjunctions zvhich govern sometimes the indi" cat'we, and sometimes the subjunctive mood. Rule 135. Verbs which govern the indicative and sub-- junctive mood. AJirmar, to affirm. Percibir, to perceive. Asegmar, to assure. Confesar, to confess. Concluir, to conclude. Predecir, to foretel. Convenir, to agree. Preveer, to foresee. Creer, to believe. Prometer, to promise. Declarar, to declare. Publicar, to publish. Decir, to say. Pen^ar, to think. Espeiar, to hope. Rejlexionar, to reflect Juzgar, to judge. Mantener, to maintain. Jurar, to swear. ' Suponer, to suppose; Sostener, to maintain. Ver, to see. Oividar, to forget. Saber, to know. And in general alt those which express the intelfecttoal faculties of the mind govern the indicative, when t\}ej are affirmatively used j and most commonly the subjunc- tive, when they are used negatively, or preceded by the conjunction 5i. 5 as; SYNTAX OF VERBS, 225 Creo que tiene raxon. (Indicative.) I believe he is in the right.. ^Cree vm. que el tenga raxon ? (Subjunctive.) Do you believe he is in the right ? No creo que tenga razon. (SubjuRctive.) I do not beheve he is in the right. Espero que vendrci. (Indicative.) I hope he will conie. ^Espera vm. que su hermdna venga? (Subjunctive.) Do you hope your sister will come ? Jlule 136. The subjunctive is used after some impersonal verbs. A verb preceded by que is always put in the subjunc- tive after the impersonal verbs, espreciso que, it must j es triste, it is sad ; es justo que^ it is right : es injusto que, it is unjust j conviene, it becomes ; importa, the matter is, &c. j as : Es necesario que haya un Dios, Criador del universe. It is necessary that there should be a God, Creator of the universe. Es menester que vdya d la ciuddd. I must go to town, A menus que vm. venga u que me escriba no lo hard. Unless you come or write to me, I will not do it, SECTION III, IVhich tense of the subjunctive must be used. Rule 137. Which tense of the subjunctive must be ustd. A verb required to be in the subjunctive mood by any of the preceding rules, is usually put in the' present when the first verb is in the present indicative or future. Example : Temo que vm. se man'e. I fear you may be sick upon tjie sea« - 226' SYNTAX OF VERBS. Sera necesario fjue vvi. haga esta 'jbra. J I wilj be iiectssaiy that you do this work. Rule 138. When the imperfect of the suljunctive must he used. The imperfect of the subjunctive reijuires the first verb in the present indicative. Example : Sii pri/no de vm. mc dice que se alegraria mucho de irse (i Madrid. Your cousin tells me he would he very glad to go to Madrid. Vm. picrde su tiempo en tonterias ; haria mejor 4e em^ plearlo eu el cstudio. You spend your time in trifling things j t^ou would do better to employ it in study. Rule 139. Preterite of the suhjunctive. Though the first verb be in the present or future, the second is put in the preterite subjunctive when it is fol- lowed by the conjunction si, or a conditional expression. Sample : Si tuviese dintro, compraria un sombrero nuevo. If I had some money, I would buy a new hat. Rule 140. Compound tenses of the suljunctivt. A verb required to be in the subjunctive mood is usually put in the compound of the present in Spanish, when it is in English in the compound of the present or of the fi^iture j but it is put in the compound of the preterite in Spanish, when it is in any other compound tense in English ; as : Temo (juevm. se hay a q^iejddo de mi. . I fear you have complained of Uic. — That is^ You ma) have. &c. JVb creo que haya aprendido la gengrqfia. I do not believe he has learnt geography. SYNTAX OP [RHEGULAR VERBS. Hj No creia que hubicse aprendido la geografia, I did not believe he had learnt geography. Observation on the future subjunctive. The scholar must observe, there is a great difference between the future subjunctive in Spanish and the future indicative : the former is always preceded by the con- junction r/uaudo, and cannot be inditferently used, as some pretend, for the latter. Example : Quando hubiere cumidu, saldre para fiabldr con el. As soon as I have dined, I will go to speak wfth him. Finds, juganin quando hubieren escrito sus traducciones . You will play when you shall have written your exercises. Chapter XVII. 0/ the irregular verbs would, c«uld, should, and might. The words would, could, should, and might, which have been considered only as the distinctive marks of tenses, and with which we have conjugated all verbs, regular and irregular, are also sometimes verbs them- selves, and expressed in Spanish by querer, puder. or de- her, as will be seen in the f)! lowing rules : Rule 141 . 1.* Hoiv to express will and would. When the words will and would are not joined to any verb, they are verbs themselves, and must be expressed by the same tense of querer, as should be the verb to be willing, if it was used. Thus we may say : (^.Porque no escribe vm. su traduccion ? Why do you not write your exercise ? Porque no quiero. Because / will not -, or, I am not willing. 228 SYNTAX OF IRREGULAR VERDS. Si no soy casado, es porque no he querido. If I am not married, it is because / would not, or I have not been willing. The words will and would, thougli followed by another verb, are also expressed by the verb querer when they imply a command or order. Evample : Quiero ser ohedecido, I will be obeyed. Queria que le pidiese per don. He would have me beg his pardon. 2. Should. The word should is a verb, and must be expressed in Spanish by some tense of the verb deler, when it denotes necessity or duty. Example : Puesque la religion lo prohile, vm. no debe hacerlo. You should not do it, since religion forbids it. 3. Could or might. The words could or might are verbs when they denote possibility ; they are both expressed in Spanish by the sartie tense of the verb podcr, as should be the verb to le able, if it was used. Example : Si pudicrcL ohligar d vm. lo hiciera con todo mi corazon. If I could oblige you, / would do it with all my heart. Fm. hubiera podido hacer su traduccion si lo hubiese querido. You could have doue your exercise, if you had been ■willing to do it. The words may and can are also verbs, and expressed in Spanish by the present tense of the verb poder. Ex- ample : rm. puede escribir su carta antes de comer. You can write your letter before dinner. Rule 142. In which tense would and could are to be put in Spanish. When the irregular would, could, should, or might, are SYNTAX OF IHREGULAR VERBS. 22^ not followed by any verb, or are by one only, they can be expressed by the imperfect, the preterite of the indi- cative, oV the imperfect or the preterite of the subjunc- tive, according as the sense requires it. Thus, / would can be rendered by either querta, {/uisicse or querria, qui- sitra or quisiese ; 1 should, by debia, deli, or dehicra^ de* beria, or debiese ; and could, by podia^ pude, or pudiera, podria or pud'iese. Example : Podia haler hccho eso ayer. I could have done that yesterday. Lo pudiera hacer si quisiese. I could do it if I would. No creo que pudiese vm. I do not think you could. Rule 143. Would and could followed by two verbs. When the irregular would, could, should, or might are followed by a verb and a participle, they are rendered in Spanish as follow : Fm. hubicra podido escrlblrme una carta, ya que sabia mi paradtro. You might have written a letter to n:e, since you knew my direction. Vm. podria haber estado engahddo. You might have been deceived. N. B. If you are at a loss in which tense to put the irregular, would, could, should, or mighty change it\>uld inio the verb to be zinlling-, should into to be obliged; could into to be able ; and then put the verbs poder, qucrer, debcr, into the same tense in Spanish as the verb to be is in Spanish, and you will never be mistaken. Chapter XVJIL OF THE IMPERSONAL VERBS. The impersonal verbs in Spanish, as well as other laur guages, are only used in the third person either singular X 230 SYNTAX OF IMPERSONAL VEUBS. or plural, and are generally construed as in English, ex- cept the following — es menester, hay^ es — which require a particular attention. Rule 144. Use of the impersonal verb es menester, ii must. The impersonal it must, is always expressed by es me- nester for the present, and by sera menester for the fu- ture. The noun or pronoun, which in English is the nomi^ native of the impersonal verb must, becomes in Spanish the nominative of the next verb, which is put in the subjunctive. Example : Es menester que vaya. 1 must go. Es menester que vm. venga manana. You must come to-morrow. Sera menester que su hermano de vm, le escriha. Your brother must write to him. The verb have, which comes often after the impersonal it must, is sometimes put in the subjunctive j as : . Es menester que tenga una casaca. 1 must have a coat. Es menester que su hermano de vm. tenga un sombrero. Your brother must have a hat. Rule 145. Use of the impersonal hay, there is. The verb to be preceded by the adverb there becomes impersonal, and is expressed by the third person of the verb haber, thus : Indicative present. Hay or no hay j there is or there is not, there are or there are not. Imperfect. Hab/a or no habia ; there was or there was not, there were or there were not. SYNTAX OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 231 Preterite. Hiibo, or no hulo ; there was, or there was not> &c. Preterpluperfect. Ha habido, or no ha hahido ,• there haS been, or there has not been, &c. Second Preterpluperfect. Halia hahidd, no hahla habido, there had been, there had not been, &c. Future. Habrd, no Itabrd ; there shall be, there shall not be, &c. Imperative. Haya, or no haya; let it be, or let it i^ot be, Sec. Subjunctive mood. Que haya, or no haya j that there may, or there may not, be. Imperfect. Hubicra, habria, no hubitra, no habrla ; there should, or there should not, be. Preterite. Que hubihet or no hubiese} that there might, or there might not, be, &c. Compound of the present. Que haya habido, or no haya, tsfc. ; that there may, or may not, have been. Compound of the preterite. Que hubihe Jiabido, or no hubihe ; that there might, or might not, have been. Future. Quando hubicre, or no hubiere ; when there shall, or shall not, be. Compound of the future. Quando hubiire habido or (wo) ,• when there shall, or shall not, have been. x2 232 SYNTAX 01 IMPERSONAL VEKUS, Let us illustrate this by gome examples : Hay muchas dl/icultades en sus negocios. There are many difficulties in your afiairs. Ko hay lalento mcts hrillante que el de la palahra. There is no talent rrtore shining than that of speaking. The verb /o be, preceded by the word so7ne or many, is also often expressed by the impersonal hay, habia, hubo, &c., as if it was there are some. Example : Hay algunos Chris tianos indignos deesie nombre. Some Christians are unworthy of that name. Hay mmhosfalsos aminos. Many friends are false. The impersonal hay, habia, &c. is also used in Spanish in three circumstances in vvhich the7-e is is not used in English. 1. lb ask the distance from one place to another: then it answers to the words I^owfar ? Example : {Quantas leguas hay de Bristol d Londres ? How many leagues are there from London to Bristol ? or How far ? &c. 2. To ask the number of such and such things : then it ansvvers to the words Hoiu many ? as : ^Qaantos hahitadores hay en Inglaterra ? Hoiv many inhabitants are there in England ? 3. To aik how long it is since such and such a thing happened : this question is not made by quatito, but by desde quando Example : jDesde quando estd vm. malo ? How long have you been ill ? The answer may be this : Desde an6che ; since last night. Rule 146. Es, it is. The irat>ersonal it is, itivas, it will be, &c. is expressed in Spanisli by the verb ser, used impersonally, as es, era, sera, son, eran, serdn, &c. when it is followed by an ad- jective without a substantive, or by a substantive of time. Example : SYNTAX OF ADVERBS. 233 Son cerca de las seis ; es tiempo de salir. It is near six o'clock j it is time to set out. Es dijicil de agradar d todos. It is difficult to please every body. N. B. When a Spaniard asks another. What o'clock is ?/ P — d Que hora es? if the hour has struck, the answer is, Acahan de dar laS seis, or las doce, Sic. ; it just now struck six, or twelve, o'clock. If there was almost a quarter, the answer would be, Han dado las seis, &:c. Dar, in that sense, answers to it is, or it is past, &c. It is not, it was 7iot, is generally rendered by ?io es, no era, &c., when it is followed by a substantive which has no reference to time, by a pronoun or a verb in the infi- nitive ; as : Ko es elvro ni la plata lo que nos liace dlchososj esla virtud. It is not gold or silver which renders us happy 3 it is virtue, Es vm. quien lo ha visto. It is you who have seen it. Es dar authoridad cl vkio, wo castigar a los malos. Not to punish the wicked, is authorising vice. Chapter XIX. OF ADVERBS. Rule 147» U^ere the adverbs are to be placed. Adverbs are generally placed after the verb in a simple sentence, and between the auxiliary and the par- ticiple in a compound one. Example: AT) hablo nunca mal de ninguno, I never speak ill of any body. Rule 148. Adverbs after the participle, 'I'he adverbs which govern a noun are always placed x3 234 SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. in Spanish after the participle in a compound sentence. Example : Su hermano dc vm. ha ohrddo segun sus prhicipios. Your brother has acted agreeably to his principles. Advei-bs of time, and those composed of two or three words, are usually placed after the participle in a com- pound tense. Example : Ha hecho hiien tiempo hoy. It has been fair weather to-day. Note 1 . Many adverbs may begin a sentence in Spa- nish, or a member of it. Such are adema's, moreover j todavia, nevertheless j por esto, or por esta razSn, for this reason j como ? how ? quanto ? how much ? (juando ? when ? dondcy and adonde? where? Example : ^ Quando ira vm a Francia 9 ? When will you go to France ? Niite 2 The adverb can, almost, always goes befoi-e siempre, always, and d mehudo, often ; and these two go before all others,' when several meet together. Example .• El rey estd can siempre mnlo. The king is scarcely ever well. Su hermano de vm. y elmio estdn siempre juntos. Your brother and mine are always together. Chapter XX. SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. Rule 149. Prepositions ere placed lefore the word which they govern. Prepositions are placed in Spanish before the word they govern; in English they are sometimes placed after ; as : ^Con quien hahla vm 9 Whom do you speak to ? SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. 235 ^De que se qtieja vm ? What do yon complain of 9 Para escrilir lien, es mejiester t.-ner luen papel, Luena t'mta, y luenas pluvias. To write well, one must have good paper, good in'.:, and good pens. When the prepositions de, a, para, por, despues, iin, govern an infinitive mood, they may be separated from it by the negative; and the pronouns governed by the verb, if there is any. Example: tiicnto inucho de no halerse lo dicho a vm. antes. I am ver)' sorry I did not tell it you before. Ha vendido su casa, sin advertirnos de su intencion. He has sold his house, without giving us notice of it. Rule 1 50. De, a, and en, expressed hy to and from. The prepositions de, d, or en, used to express the di- stance or going from one town to another specified, are lendered., de, hy from j o, by to ; and en, hy in ; as : Foy en un dia de Bristol a Jf^ells. I go in one day from Briatol to Wells. They are also rendered, f/om by de, and to by en, in all other circumstances, when they are used to express a distance, or going from one place to another. Example : He caminddo de colle en calle, de ciuddd en ciuddd, de provincia en provincia, sin poder halldr la Fortuna. I have travelled from street to street, from town to town, from province to province, without being able to meet Fortune. When the preposition to signifies so far as, it is gene- rally exjjressed by ha^ia. Example : He Itlido la copa hasla la hez. I have drunk the cup to the dregs, Lo proseguire hasta al caho. 1 will prosecute it to tlie end. 236 SYNTAX OF PREPOSITIONS. Rule 151. Prepositions expressed ly several luays. The English preposition clout has three different ways of being expressed in Spanish, as may be seen by the following examples ? 1. He venido para hahldr dvm. acerca de nucstro negicio. lam come to speak to you about our business. 2. Ire a ver a vm. hacia el Jin de la semdna que viene. I will go and see you alout the end of next week. 3. Estd para venir de Irlanda. He is about to come from Ireland. Rule 152. When the prepositions are to be repeated. The prepositions de and a are usually repeated before every noun, pronoun, or verb -, or others, such as con, contra, sin, &c. are repeated before nouns or verbs of different significations, whether they are or are not re- peated in English. Example: El Hijo de Dios vino a este mundo para redimir a los hombres, y para destruir elimperio del diablo. I'he Son of God came into this world to redeem men, and to destroy the power of the devil. They are not usually repeated before words which have nearly the same signification. Example: El Hijo de Dios vino a la tierra para redimir a los hombres y libraries delpecado. The Son of God came on earth to redeem men, aud- io free them from sin. Nuestra ley nojuzga a ninguno sin haberle oido, y ex- dminado. Our law judges nobody without having heard and ex- amined him. OF CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. Having spoken at large of the conjunctions^ page 141 SYNTAX or SPANISH IDIOMS. 237 and following, their use and construction have been fully explained in the Syntax in the rules 85, 130, and 139 } what we could add here on this subject would be a te- dious repetition of what is before explained under dif- ferent heads as occasion required it. The different species of interjections have been treated of, page 143 j their construction is the same in Spanish as in English, therefore they require no explanation. Chapter XXI. OF SPANISH IDIOMS. Idioms are a mode or way of speaking peculiar lo a language, and cannot be literally translated into another. This chapter of idioms is divided inio two sections : the first explains the idiomatical expressions of the auxi- liary verbs lo have and to he ; the second shows the idio- matical signification in which the verbs ir or andar, lener, venir, dar, hacer, and viorir, may be taken. SECTION I. Idiomatical expressions of tht verbs to have flwrf to be. Rule 153. Cases in which the verb to be is expressed by the verb tener. The verb to le is expressed in Spanish by the same tense of the verb lejier in several cases. 1. When it is followed by a word of number, such as one, two, three, &c. Example: Nuestra casa tiene vciiite pies de ancho. Our house is twenty feet broad. Tengo treiiitay cinco anos. I am thirty-five years old. 2. When it is used to ask the age of a person or an animal. Example: (I Que cddd tiene usted ? How old are you ? 238 SYNTAX OF SPANISH IDIOMS. d Que edad tiene su gato 9 How old u your cat ? 3. When it is followed by the words hungry, dry, or thirsty. Example : ^;Tienes hambre, hija mia? Are you hungry, daughter? Si, madr€f tengo mucha hamhre. Yes, mother, / am very hungry. (Tiene vm. sed ? Are you dry ? No, no tengo sed nhora. No, / am not dry. 4. When it is followed by. the words hot, warm, or coldf the part of the body which is cold or hot js pre- ceded in Spanish by en for the masculine, en la for the feminine, en los for the masculine plural ; en las for the feminine plural ,• instead of the possessive pronouns my, thy, his, her, our, your, their, used in English. £r- ampLe : Tengo frio en los pies. My feet are cold. (Tiene vm. calor en las manos ? Are your hands warm ? Acirquese a la lumhre si vm. tiene /rio. Draw near the fire if you are cold. Estoy lien uqui, no ieugofrio. I am well here, I am not cold. 5. When it is or could be followed by the' adverb there, without altering the sense of the sentence y as : Hay muchos ladrones en Francia. There are many robbers in PVance. 6. When it is followed by the words in the right, in the wrong, or afraid, as ; Tenia vm. ra%6n, y yo haUa err ado. You were in the right, and I was^ in the wrong. ^Vorfjue tiene vm. miedo ? Why are you afraid ? Rule 154. To be, expressed by hacer. The verb to be is expressed^ by hacer, in speaking of SYNTAX OF SPANISH IDIOMS. 239 the weather j and with the words dia, the day 5 noche, the night J sol, the sun ; viento, the wind. Example: Hace buen tiempo hoy. It is fine weather to-day. Hacia mucho calor ayer. It was very warm yesterday. Hace viucho calor en Espana, It is very hot in Spain. But if the word weather is the nominative of the verb to he, then it ought to be expressed by estar, and not by hacer. Example : El tiempo estd secO, humedo, UuviosOy tempestuoso, ^c» It is dry, wet, rainy, stormy weather, &:c. El ayre estdfrio. The air is cold. Rule 155. The verb to be, expressed hy estar. Tiie verbs to he and to do, used in English to inqr.ire or to speak of the health of somebody, are both expressed in Spanish by the verb estar. Example : ^Como estd, vm ? How do you do. Sir ? Estoy muy lueno, para servir d vm. I am very well, at your service. Or, Estoy muy lueno, gracias d Dios. I am very well, thank God. ^Como estd su seuor hermano ? Hovir does your brother do ? Estdla lueno la ultima vez que le vi. He was well the last time I saw him. ^ule 156. The verb to have, expressed by the verbs haber or ser. The verb to have is expressed by the verb ser, but most commonly by the verb haber in the compound tenses of reflected verbs, in Spanish. Example : Me he levantado esta manana d las seis. I got up this morning at six o'clock. ^Aque hora se acosto vm ? At what o'clock did you go to bed ? 240 OP THE SPANISH IDIOMS. Levanlese v?n. presto. Get up immediately. Le ha parecido a vm. que este homlre estdba lorrac pero se ha enganddo. It did seem to you that this man was drunk, but jm: have been mistaken. Rule 157. Doler, speaking of an illness. The Spaniards make use of the verb doler when tl feel a pain in any part of their body. Exawple : Me duele la cabeza, el pecho, y el estomago. I have a pain in my head, in my breast, and in my stomach. Me duehn los njos. My eyes are sore. f^Le duelen a vm. las muelas? Have you the tooth-acl . No, pero me duele el pescuezo. No, but I have a pain in my neck. Chapter XXII. SFXTION I. This chapter will contain a list of several Spai verbs, with the difterent significations in which theyj used J and should it be committed to memory, it be found very useful towards acquiring the idiom? phraseology, which constitutes one of the beauties of Sj)anish language. go. Of the different slgvificatiovs of andar, to Andary to go, to vv'^nk, to travel. Andar con Dios, to go in peace. Andar en hora buena, to be preserved from danger." fAndar a caza de gangas, to waste one's time in friiil pursuits. OF THE SPANISH I]>ieMS. 241 Andar d degas, to go groping along, Andar adelante, to go -before. Anddr a gatas, to walk upon hands and (t^. Andar a grillos, to lose one's time in doing something. Andar a la Jlor del berro, to stroll and wander about. Andar a la sopa, to go a-begging. Andar en vue/ias, to shuffle. Andar a la ventura de dios, to abandon oneself to one's bad or good fortune. Andar al paso del buey, to be slow or lazy at work, Andar al rededor, to go round about. Aiidar al -uso, to conlbrni to the times, Andar a monte, to skulk. Andar a palos, to fight one another with stlck-s. Andar a porfin, to be stubborn. Andar arrastrado, to live in indigence. Andar a sombra de iejado, to be at hide and seek. Andar a sas anchurqs, to live splendidly with profusion. Andar a tientas, to gi'ope in the dark. Andar iebiendo los vientos, to make all diligence possible to obtain any thing. Andar xcdle arriba y calle abaxo, to spend one's time in walking up and dotvn. Andar con el tiempo, to praise to-day what will be blamed to-morrow. /■ Andar con mosca, to be angry, to breathe -for revctige. Andar con pics de plomo, to act with reflection in otie's dealing. Andar con reserva, to be reserved or prudent. Andar con segundas, to go with a design to deceive some- body. Andar de gorra, to go to dine at the expense of another, Andar detecho, to go straight, to be just. . Yo ie hare andar dcrecho, I will make you honest, Andar en buenos pasos, to act right, to be virtuous. Andar en cuenios, to f«ll to loggerheads. Y S42 OF THE SPANISH IDIOMS. ^ Andaren cueros , to' be naked. Andar -en dimes y diretes, to deal in ifs and ands. AndarachacosOy to be sickly. Andar^en la maroma, to engage in a perilous undertaking, Andar^en malos pasas, to be abandoned. Andar en zelos, to be jealous. Andar errado, to err, to be under an error. Andar homlro con hombro, to go cheek by jowl. Andar a uno en los alcanxes, to be at one's heels, to watch him. Andar pie con lola, to lead an oeconomical life. Andar por tierra^ to be despised. Andar sobre aviso, to be on one's gtiard. No andar bueno, to be ill. En el andar se parccea Pedro, by his gait one would say it is Peter. Andar en cuerpo, to go abroad without a cloak. SECTION II. The different significations of the verb dar. Dar, to give, to present. Dar, to beat, to strike. Dar, to administer a remedy. Dar, to confer. Dar, to give as a fact. Dar, to persist obstinately in doing a thing. Dar, to deliberate. Dar que reir, to give cause of laughing. Dar que Uorar, to make one cry. Dar a correr, to make one run. Dar por libre, to free any one. Dar por esclavo, to keep in slavery. Dar por traidor, to condemn one as a traitor^ Dar de vestir, to clothe one. Dar recado de escribir, to furnish what is necessary to write. Dar que sentir, to give trouble. OF THE SPANISH IDIOMS. 243 Dar gustOi to give pleasure; Dar trisieza, to pimse sadness* Dune, to give up oneseif. Darse almxdf t© fall down: Dar abrazoSy to embrace one another. Dnr ajiada, to trust. Dar a entender^ to give to understand. Dar agua vianos, togive\vater to wash one's handB, Dar a la estampa, to cause any thing to be printed. Dar d la mano, to put in hand, Dar el alma, to die. Dar de traste, to run a-ground. Dar a lux^ to bring to light. Dar asalto, to give assault. Dar asuKto, to give cause to speak. Dar aud'tencia, to give audience, Dar laroto, to sell cheap. Dar barro d la manot to furnish materials, Dar ^a^a, to jest atone. Dar hregQy to piny a trick. Dar buena vejez, to con^fort old age. Dar mala vejez, to vex old age. Dar luenas palabras, to give fair word*, Dar calla, to heat the iron. Dar calle, to clear the way. Dar carta de pago, to give a receipt. Dar con algjina persona en tierra, to throw one on th« ground. Dar con la puerta en las ojos, to shut the door upon one. Dar consigo en el suelo, to fall upon one's nose. Dar con unoy to meet witli the person one looks for, Dar credito, to beheve what is said. Dar cuerpo, to give a substance to any thing. Dar cuerpOy to exaggerate. Dar de cogote, to fall upon one's back. Dar de comer al d'mblo, to act contrary to religion. y2 244 eP THE SPANISH IDIOMS, Dar ^an, y palos, to provide for the subsistence of others, and to act severely with them. Dar de si, to stretch oneself Bar diente con diente, to be starved with cold. Dar el hgar, to leave the place. Dar el pcsmne, to give compliments of condolence. Dar el si, to consent to any thing. Dar el voto, to vote for any one. Dar encomiendas, to give orders. Dar en el bianco, to guess right . Dar en el punto, to hit the mark. ^ Dar en rostro, to reproach one v/ith any thing. Dor entrada, to give entrance. Dar esiado, to alter one's condition. Dar exercicios, to instruct children. Dar expediente, to conclude a business. Darjavor, to protect. Darfianxa, to caution one. Dar forma, to form or dispose. Darfruto, to produce fruit. Darfuego, to unload a firelock. Dar gana, to give courage. Dar garrote, to strangle. Dar guerra, to vex one. Dar /ado, to favourize. Dar la enhorahuena, to compliment or congratulate. Dar la muerte, to kill. . Dar la obedienHa, to reverence, to bow before one. Dar la piel, to die. Dar las pasquas', to wish a good Christmas to one, Dar la ultima mano, to fmish or end any work. Dar la vlda, to die. Dar licencia, to give leave. Dar lugar, to make room. Dar Imnbre, to make fire. Dar lu%, to give light to a room, OF THE SPANISH IDIOMS, 245 I>ar lux, to light a person to go out. Dar mala espina, to torment one. Bar malrato, to molest one. Dar tnano, to consent to every thing. Bar muestras, to show one's good or bad qualities, Dar viusica, to give a concert. Dar nomhre, to baptize. Bar oidus, to listen attentively. Bar or den, to command. Bar ordenesy to confer the ecclesiastical orders* Bar orejas, to pay attention to what is said. Bar pan de perro, to cudgel one soundly. Bar parte, to share with another. Bar perro por gato, to deceive by fair words. Bar picon, to excite one to do something. Bar plie^o, to give a sheet of paper. Bar paso, to clear the way. Bar puvto, to begin the holidays. Barpuntos en la boca, to be discreet, to hold one's tongue. Bar quartet, to give quarter. . Bar quejas, to complain. Bar querella, to bring a bill in justice against one. Bar setial, to give earnest- money. Bar sehal, to nod to one to come nearer. Bar una panzada, to give an abundant meal to some- body. Barse una vuelta, to look at oneself with attention. Bar sohresaltos, to fright one suddenly. Bar sabre uno, to assault one. Bar soga, to put one to despair. Bar su espiritu, to give up die ghost. Bar su merecido, to chastise according to the fault. Bar su recado, to beat one unmercifully, | Bar termino, to grant a delay. Bar testimonio, to be a witness, to testify. Dar tiempo at tlempo, to wait tor aa opportunity, X 3 246 OF THE SPANISH IDIOMS. Dur tormento, to torture one. Dar tras unOy to follow one, to go behind. Dar una vista, to look at any one. Dar una zamlmllida, to fall into the water. Dar un hatacazo, to get a fall. Dar un estallido, to make a noise. Dar un impetu, to do something with precipitation. Dar un tapahoca, to give a blow on the mouth. Dar un xalon, to scold one. Dar voces, to brawl. » Dios te dc huena ventura, God give you a happy success. No se me da nada, this is nothing to me. No te de cuidado, fear not. SECTION III. Different significations of tfie v^rl estar, Estdr, to be present. Estdr, to comprehend. Estoy en lo que vm. me dice » I comprehend what you say, Estoy a eso, I answer for that. Estar, to be. Estar leyendoy to read. Estar escrilienda, to write^ Esiar trisbe, to be sad. Estar sordo, to be deaf, Estar a exdmen, to be examined. Estar de priesa, to be in haste. Estar en misa, to be preser>t at mass. ^ Estarse, to stop, to stand. Estarse muriendo, to be on the point of death, Estarse cayendo, to be ready to fall. Estar d la mduQ, to be at hand. Estar d la trinca, to wait for the wind. Estar a punto, to be ready for. Esiar a ray a, to refrai» oneself. OF THE SPANISH IDIOMS. 24^ Estar de huen humor y to be in a good humour. Estar de wal humor, to be cross or in a passion. Estar degorja, to be merry. Estar en si, to reflect within oneself. Estar en sujuicio, to have a sound un(]erstandi ng. Estar lejos, to be far off. Estar muy sohre si, to be vain. Estarse mano sohre mano, to be idle. Estarse en sus trece, to be very stubborn. Estar en lodo, to know every thing. SECTION IV. Different signijications of the verh hablar. Hallar, to speak. Hallar, to harangue. Elalogado habl6 muy Hen, that advocate spoke very welU Hallar, to speak in behalf of somebody. Hablar, to inform, to warn. Hablar a borboiones, to speak quickly, to stammer. Hablar abulto, to talk at random, Hablar al alvia, to speak sincerely. Hablar al caso, to speak seasonably, in due tinae* Hablar al gusto, to speak politely. Hdblar alto, to talk loudly. Hablar a tontas, to speak foolishly. Hablar bien, to speak elegantly. Hablar con Dios, to pray to God. Hablar con lengua deplata, to solicit any thing with money* Hablar con el diablo, to be cunning. Hablar con los ojos, to look sweetly upon one. Hablar de burla 6 chanza, to jest at one, to mock him, Hablar de hilvan, to speak unintelligibly. Hallar de la mdr, to speak of things that can neither b* understood nor executed. JIallar de mem^ia, to speak at random. 248 OF THE SPANISH IDIOMS. Hablar de talanquera, to slander people that are in dag- ger or distress. Hablar de veras, to speak true. Hablar en comun, to speak in general. Hablar en griego, to speak confusedly. Hablar en publico, to speak publicly. Hablar entre dientes, to mutter. Hablar consigo, to speak within oneself. Hablar gordo, to speak in a passion. Hablar paso, to speak discreetly. Hablar par detras 6 a las espaldas, to speak ill of a per- son absent. Hablar por hablar, to speak for pleasure' sake. Hablar por la mano, to speak with one's fingers. Hablar por /a? narices, to speak through one's nose. Hablar por senas, to speak by jests, as mimics do. Hablar reclo, to speak violently or in a passion. Hablarse alguna cosa, to publish, to divulge. De la alundancia del corazon habla la boea, the tongue speaks from the influence of the heart, Es hablar por demds, it is to speak in vain. Hacer hablar, to make one speak. Mire corno haila, consider how he speaks. No hablarse, not to speak to each other, to be at variance* SECTION V. Different signi/ieations of the verb hacer; The several significations of the verb hacer being no - less interesting than t':;oseof the preceding verbs, the scholar will do well to learn them with as much atten^ tion as lies in his power, Hacer, to do, to foiiii. Hacer un detito, to commit a crime.- Hacer conccpto de alguna cosa, lo form to oneself an idea" ot something. OF THE SPAfflSH IDIOMS. 24Q Iloy hace tantos ahos que sucedio tal cosa, there are to- day so many years since such a thing happened. Hacerse el vino, the grapes grow ripe. Los semhrados se kacen, the grain grows ripe. Hacer, to give or grant. j4L convento de Florencia hizo limosmas rtmy grctndes, he gave great alms to the convent of Florence. Hacer, to contain. Estejiasco hace tantas axumlres, this bottle holds, or con- tains, so many pints. Hacer, to cause, to put. Ilacergaslos, to put to, or cause any one, expense. HaceVy to resolve, to dettrmine. Dios lo hi%o, God determined it. Los jueces In hicieron, the judges resolved it so. Hacer, to dress or prepare. Hacer la coviida, to prepare the dinner. Hacer la olla, to make the meat boil, Hacer t to bring to perfection. * Estapipa hace huen vino, this cask makes the wine good, Esta coxa hace huen iabaco, this snuif-box renders tbd snufF good. Hacer, to correjjpord, tp fit. Esq hace lien acjui, this fits very well here. Esq no hace con aquello, this don't correspond with that. Hacer, to join, toassemble, Hacer genie, to raise soldiers. Hacer audiiorio, to assemble an auditory. Hacer, to use, to accustom. Hacer un cahallo alfuego, to accustom a horse to the fire. Hacersf alfrio, to accustom oneself to the cold. Hacerse a todo, to use oneself to every tiling. Hacerse atras, to draw back. Hacerse d un lado, to draw oneself on one side. Hacer agua, to take a provision of water in a ship, Hacer alarde, to boa^t of. 250 OF THE SPANISH IDIOMS. Ilacer a pluma y a pelo, to be disposed for every thing. Hacer no nay que hacer ascos, there is not so much to despise. Hacer luena la venta; to warrant a sale to be good. Hacer las cosas por su cabeza, to act according to one's own fancy. Hacer cama, to keep one's bed, to be ill. Hacer cara^ to put on a biazen countenance. Hacer correrias, to make incnrfsions. Hacer coscjuiUas, to tickle, to please. Hacer corteslas, to compliment. Hacer costilla, to bear with paitence. Hacer de las suyas, to do one's frolics. Hacer del cuerpo, to ease oneself. Hacer el pko, to give a dinner to somebody. Hacer espaldas, to defend one, to protect him, Hacsr exemplar, to be a pattern for oihera. Hacer Jiesta, to make a holiday of a working-day. Hocer honraSf to do honours, to assist at a funewl, Hacer huvw, to stay long in a place, No hacer humot not to stay long in a place, Hacer justiciar to do justice to every body. Hacer la larha, to render a piece of service to one. Tal cosa hixo la harla a fulano, such thing did good to such an one. Hncer la viamona, to jest at one, to mock him. '^ Hacer merced, to grant a favour. Hacer la olla gorda, to procure to one the means to be- come rich. Hacer la ra%on, to drink to the health of another. Hacer Id rosea del galgo, to sleep in any place without undressing oneself. Hacer las partes, to divide. Hacer la vista larga, to feign not to see. Hacer niericion, to. meutipn any thing to another. Hacer mysterio, to make a mystery of a little thi-ng. OF THE SPANISH IDIOMS. 251 Hacer noche, to stay in an inn to sleep. Hacer novedad, to invent any thing. Hacerse noche, it is lost or stolen. Hacer orejas de mercader, to feign to be deaf, not to be 'A iiling to hear. Hacer Jigura, to have a sort of authority over others. Hacer Jiguras, to play the mimic. Hacer papel, to act a character. Hacer pic, to intrude oneself in any business. Hacer pinitos, to endeavour to walk after a long illness. Hacer pompa, to make a show. Hacer par hacer, to do something for pleasure' sake. Hacer prenda, to take in pawn for wiiat is lent. Hacer pucheros, to feign crying like a child. Hacer punta, to excell. Hacer ray a, to excell, to surpass. Hacerse a la vela, to sail. Hacer cargo, to make one pay his share. Hacerse cargo de una cosa, to take care of a thing. Hacerse chiquito, to ftiign to be ignorant. Hacerse de algo, to buy what is necessary. Hacerse de miel, to be too indulgent to others. Si 710S haccmos de miel, nos comeran las moscas, if yoQ be too indulgent, you will be trodden under foot. Hacerse lenguas, to praise exceedingly. Hacerse tortilla, to tall down flat. Hacerse en agua, to perspire. Hacer sombra, to shelter, to protect, to favourize. Hacer su hecho, to come to the desired point. SECTION VT. Different significatio7is of the verb \r, to go, Ir, to go, to walk. /r, to lay a wager. Fayan cien doblones a que es cierto eso, I lay one hundred pounds it is so. 252 OF THE SPANISH IDIOMS.. Ir, to consist. £71 eso vd la vida, in this depends the life. Jr, to be distinguished. 2r, to lead or conduct. Estecamino vd a tal parte, this road leads to such a place. Ir lien ptiesto, to be well dressed. Jr vendido, to be sold. Ir atenido, to be pursued. Ir a cabal lo, to go on horseback. irie, to go away. Irse, to be dying. Irse, to escape. Irse, to let oneself fall thr6ugh weakness. Irse, to evaporate. Irse, to be rotten, (in speaking of fruit) Irse, to rent. Ir adelante, to pursue a business closely. Ir con alguno, to be of the same opinion with another Ir bien 6 mal, to be well or ill. Ir con dios, to go peaceably. Irse de la viano, to let any thing fall out of one's hand Irse de la viemoria, to forget something. Irse de boca, to speak impertinently. Irse los ojos, to look attentively at the thing we wish f Irse por pies, to run away, to escape. Ir y venir, to go up and down, to spend one's time walking. ^Quien vd a la puerta ? who is at the door ? Vdyase, go about your business. SECTION VII. Different significations of the verb venir^ to come. ^ Venivy to come, to happen, to arrive. ^ Venir, to appear before a judge. I OF THE SPAJJISH IDIOMS. 253 Veniry to agree with another. Venirt to draw one's origin from. p^enir, to have recourse to. Venir, to resolve, to determine. Venuy to grant a favour. VeniTj to come in company. Venir, mover se, to come, to move. VeniTy to become quite reformed, Venhj to amount to. Fenirse a casa, to return home. Venirse a partido, to yield to reason* Venirse, to perfect oneself, Venirse el vino, to ferment. Venirse el pan, to rise, (in speaking of dough). Fenir, pasarse de un lugar a otro, to go from one place to another. Las inspiraciones vienen dd cielo, inspirations come from heaven. Jesu Christo vino al mundo para redimirnuSy Jesws Christ came into the world to redeem us. Nuestro vino va menguando ; ya no sale mas que gotapor gota, our wine diminishes, it only comes drop by drop. Esta guarnicion viene Men con estc pafio, this trimming fits this cloth very well. Llegar a las manos, pelearse, to come to hands^ to fight. Venir al socorro, to come to help. 254 PART IV. A VOCABULARY OF WORDS NECESSARY TO BE KNOWN. Del cielOf y de los elementos. Of heaven, and the elements. J^/OS, God. Jcsu Christo, Jesus Christ. ElEspiritu Santo, the Holy Ghost. la Trinidad f the Trinity. los angelesy the angels, un profeta, a prophet. elcielo, heaven. el paraiso, paradise. eliiifierno, hell. el mundo, the world. los diablos, the devils, elfuego, the fire. el ayre, the air. la tierra, the earth. el mar, the sea. clsolj the sun. la luna, the moon. Del tiempoyde las estacions.- el dia, the day. lu noche, the night. elmediodia^ noon. las estrellas, the stars. los ray OS, the rays. las nuhes, the clouds. elviento, the wind. la lluvia, the rain. el trueno, the thunder. el reldmpago, the lightning. el granizOt the hail. el rayo, the thunderbolt. la nieve, the snow. helada, the frost. el yelo, the ice. la escarcha, the glazed frost. el rodo, the dew. la nieila, a fog. el diluvio, a deluge. el caloTy the heat. elfriOf the cold. -Of the weather and seasons. media noche, midnight. la manana, the morning. la tarde, the evening. A VOCABULARY OP WORDS. 255 una hora, an hour. un quarto dehora, a quarter of an hour. media hora, half an hour. ires (juartos de hora, three quarters oi an hour. hoy, to-day. oyer, yesterday. el dia antes de ayer, the Jay before yesterday. el dia despues de man ana, the day after to-morrow. esta tarde, this evening. esta mnnanay this morning. despues de coiner, after din- ner. Los dias dda semana,- Lunes, Monday, Maries, Tuesday. hiier coles, Wednesday. Jueves, Thursday. despues de cewflr,aftersuppe>. una semdna, a week. un mes, a month. un aho, a year. un momento, a moment. la primauera, the spring, el verano, the summer. el otafio, autumn. elinvierno, the winter. dia de fiesta, a holiday. diadetrabajo,A working-day. la salida del sol, the sua- rising. el ponerse del sol, the sun- setting. la aurora, the dawn. -The days of the week. Viernes, Friday. Sabado, Saturday. Domingo, Sunday. Los meses. — The months. Enero, January. Felrero, February. Marzo, March. Airil, April. Mayo, May. Junio, June. Julio, July. Jgosto, August* Septiemhre, September. Cktubre, October, Noviembre, November. Diciembfe, December. Dias dejiesta del ana. — The holidays of the year, el primer Dia del Am, New-year's-day. Din de Reye9, Twelfth-day la Quaresma, Lent. las ^atrotemporas, the Em». ber weeks. Domingo de Ramos, Palm Sunday. z2 25^ A VOCABULARY OF WORDS. Viernes Santo, Good Friday. Pascua de naviddd, Christ- Pascua de resurreccion , Ea- mas. ster-day. la Figilia, the Eve. Pascua del EspirUu Santo, la cosecha de Granos, the Whitsunday. Harvesl; Dia deD'ifuntos, AH Sonls'- da3^ De las dignidades ecclesiasticas . Of ecdesiastlcal dignities. el papa, the pope. un canon/gn, a canon. un cardrnal, a cardinaJ. un sacerdoie, a priest. un arzohispo, an archbishop, un capdlan, a chaplain, nn obispOj a bisiiop. un limosntro, an aimoner. un nu7icio, a nuncio. teuicnte de cura, a curate. un prelado, a prelate. vn predicadorj a preacher, un cura, a rector. enter radar, a sexton. un vicario, a vicar, un sacristan, a vestry- un vicarif) general, a vicar keeper. general nninusico, a musician, un dean, a dean. un perliguero, a beadle. Admires de las cosas que se coinen comimmente. Names of things most usually eaten. /5G«, bread. unarcOanadadepan, asWcQ agiia, water. of bread. vijw, wine. una sopa, a feonp. came, meat. - un caldo, a brotli. pe%, fisli. una ensalada, A salad. el cocido, boiled meat. una salsa, a sauce. cl asado, toast meat. un estofado, a stew. un hocado de pan, a mouth- un guisado, a nigout. ful of bread. Insjrutas, fruits. un pastel, a pie. el tjueso, cheese. El aparato de la mesa. — Tlie covering of the table. lamgsa, the table. el mantel, the tablecloth » A VOCABULARY OF WORDS. 257 una silla, a chair. un cuchilto, a knife. nn tenedor, a fork. un, plato, a plate. plalo grande, a dish. un salero, a saltseller. viaagrera, a vinegar-bottle. axiuqueroy a sugar- box, una vela, a candle. un candelero, a candlestick. las^despabiladeras, the snuf- fers. el braserito, a chafingdish. palangana, a bason. Gopa, a glass. una servilleta, a- napkin, unjiasco, a flask. una xicara, a cup. una salsera, a saucer. una toalla, a- towel. un servicioy a service. una canasta, a basket. un galon, a gallon. WW medio galon, a half gal- lon. una pinta, a pint. una media pinta, a half pint, unjarro, a jug. 2^7m lotella, a bottle. Loque se come en la mesa cocidoi. What is eaten at table boiled. Ui vaea, beef. el cordero, lamb. el carneroy mutton.. una gallina, a fowl. la ternera:, veal.. Phra el primer sewicio. — For the first course. un guisadOi a. ragout. unafricasi, a fricasee. estofadoy stewed meat. lechecillaSy sweetbreadw una torta, a. tart. pastelillos, petty patiies. jarnon, some ham. salchichns, sausages. salchiihade Bolona, a Bo- logna sausage.. morciUa, black- pudding. higadd, liver. ruhanos, radishes, melon, a melon. Loque es asddo. — What is roasted. un capon, a; capon. polios, pullets. pichdnes, pigeons. gallineias, woodcocks* pe^dicos, partridges. tordos, thrushes. alondrasy larks. codornices, quails. Jaymnes, pheasanlat un pQVQj a cock turkey.:, Z 3; :?5S A VOCABULARY OF WOllDS. un g' nso, a goose. gan pequeno, a go-Jing. un pato, a duck. tola iieb/'e, a hare. vn conejo, a rabbit. un cerdo., a hog. lechoncillo, a roasting-pig unjdbali, a wild boar. u?i ciervo, a stag. Para sazonar la came. — To season meat with. pierna de carnero, a leg of mutton lomo de ternera, a loin of veal. Irazuelo de carneroy a shoul- der of mutton. torrezno, a slice of bacon. ca%a, game. saly salt. pimientay pepper. cceyte, oil. v'magre, vinegar. agraz, verjuice. Viostaza, mustard. chvos-y cloves. canela, cinnamon. alcaparraSy capers. laurely laurel. perifoUo, chervil. setas, mushrooms, criadillasy tvuflies. cebollas, onions. escalonas, eschalots. ajos, garlic. tocinOy bacon. naranjas, oranges. - • I'unojieSy lemons. perexiL, parsley. I cehoUeias, young onionsi htitvos, eggs. Para una ensalada.—Vov a salad. yerltty herbs. perifoUo, chervil. endihiaSy endives. Uchitga Romana, lechuga, lettuce. chicorea, succory. beiro, cresses. apioy celery. Para im dias de ayuntt. — For fast' days. Roman lettvice. manteca, butter. iechey milk. huevos cocidos., eggs in tJbe shell. huevos esir^llados, poached eggs. toriiUa de huwoSy an omelet* cangr^jo de agua dulce^ crawiish. un lucioy a pike. una carpa, a carp. una trucha^ a trout. A VOCABULARY OF WORBS. 25^ knguado, a sole. angu'da, an eel. ^ienca, a -tench. esturion, a sturgeon. arenquey a herring. ostras, oysters. salmon, salmon. ahadejo, codfish. guisantes, peas. habas, beans. Para las poslrcs.- manzanaSy apples. per as y pears. melocoiones, peaches. albaricoqueSy apricots. cerezas, cherries. crespas, gooseberries. higosy figs. ciruelaSy plums, frambuesas, raspberries. uvas, grapes. tajadaSy fritters. tarla, a tart. confiies, sugarplums. Grados de parentesco.- el padre, the father. la madre, the mother. el al'uelo, the grandfather. la abuela, tlie grandmother. el bisabueloy the greatgrand- father. la bhahuela, the great grand- mother. el hijo, the son. la kyUf the slaughter. espinacas, spinage. clcachojas, artichokes. esparragos. asparagus. berzas, cabbages. basfagos, sprouts. col'ijiores, cauliflowers. hinojo, fennel. escombro, a njackarel. langosta, a lobster. -For the dessert. dulces sccos, sweetmeats. nueces, nuts. avellanas, filberts. castanaSy chesnuts. almendras, nlmonds. nisperos, medlars. zarzas, blackberries. vitmbrillos, quinces. grajiadaSy pomegranates. naranjaSy Portugal oranges,' aceUunaSy olives. woraSy mulberries. grosellas, currants. -Degrees of kindi'ed. el hermano, the brother. la Itermana, the sister. el primogenito, the eldest son. el hijo ^gundo, the second son. el tio, the uncle. la tia, the aunt. el sohrino, the nephew, la sobrina, tfce niece.. 260 A VOCABULARY OF WORDS, el hijo del sobriw» the ne- phew's son. la hija de la sobrina, the niece's daughter. el primo, the ecus n. la prima, the female cousin. el cunudo, the brother-in- law. la cunada, the sister-in-law. el suegro, the fatiier-in-law. la suegra, the mother- in- law. el yerno, the son>ii>law. la nuera, the daughter-in-- law. el nieiOy the grandsort. la ?iieta, the granddaughter. los padres, the fathers and mothers. si esposo, the spouse. Mas^ la esposa, the spouse. Fern, nn. consorte, a consort. mellizos, twin brothers. meUixas, twin sisters. un bastardo, a bastard. el compadrey a he-gossipv. la coinaxlre, a she- gossip. el padrino, a godfather. la mudrina, a godmother, el aiiijado, a godson. la ahijada, a goddaughter. muger parida, a lying-in- womanv ama de criar, the narse. la partera, a midwife. un parientOj a relation. una parienta, a female relac tion, el am'igOy a friend. la amiga, a female friend*. el eneinigo, an enemy. Mas*, la enemigayiin enemy. Fern,, un viudo, a widower. una viuda, a widow.. el herederOi an, heir. la heredera, an heiiess. unpupiloi a pupiL. Masc. zma pupila, a pupiL Fern,, un casamientOy a marriage. las budas, a wedding. JOe los est ados del hombre y de la muger. Of the conditions of man and woman* un homlTe, a man. una muger, a woman. unviejo, an aged man. ' una vitja, an aged woman-. hombre anciano, an old man. muger. anciana, an old wo-- man. unjoven, a young man. una moza, a young girl; pedmetre, a spark. una sefiura, a.lady.. el marido, a husband* la muger, a wife. un infante, an infant.. un hijo, a boy.. un muckacho, a little boyo A VOCABtrtARY OF WOHD«. 26t una muchacka, sl little girl. una doncella, a maid. wia virjren, a virgin. el amo, a master. • el avia, a mistress. un criadOf a man servant. una criada,?i female servant. un ciudadano, a citizen. un paisGTU), a countryman. vn ezhangeroj a stranger, un bribon, a rogae. un estafudor. a siiarper. un engaiiador, a cheat. un ladron, a thief. un ratcroj a pickpocket. De lo que es wenester para vestirse. Of what is necessary for dressing oneself. un veslido, a suit of clothes, calceias, under stockings. un somhrtroy a hat. los hordes, the brims. cordon de sombrero, a hat- band, una peluca, a wig. una corvata, a cravat. lasaca, a coat. casaca d lafrancesa, a close coat. los calzones, small clotlies. las medias, stockings. medias dt seda, silk stock- escarpines, socks. los zapatos, the shoes, las chinelas, the slippers, una camisay a shirt, una nlmiila, an under waist* coat. una chupa, a vest. las mangus, the sleeves, las vueltas, the ruffles. un gorro, a cap. W/va lata, a night-gown, e/ bolsillo, a fob. lafaliruiutra, the pocket. (7ow /o5 vesiides es menestei' tener. With clothes one must have. cinta de seda, ribbons. encaxe, lace. botones, buttons. ojales, button- holes. Jranja, fringe. guantes, gloves. viltoncs, mittens. reloxdefaltriquera, a watch, un panuelo, a handkerchief, un manguitOy a muff. las kebillas, buckles. liga'Sy garters. anilhy a ring. peyne, a comb, ^ > 262 A VOCABULARY OF WOSDJ^. Para aquellos que van a cahallo. For those that ride on horseback. Los espuelas, the spurs. la campana de la lota, the top of the boot. la estrella de espuela, the rowel of the spur, la pierna, the leg. el talon, the heel. la sucla de la hot a, the sole. la espada, a sword. el cinto, a girdle. las pistolasy the pistols. elfreno, the bridle. la silla, the saddle. los estribos, the stirrups, el latigo, the whip. las betas, the boots. Para las mugeres. el tocado, a cap. 'una camisa, a sfiift. una suya, an under petticoat. la cotiila, the stays. un guardapk's, an upper petticoat. ropa de levantar, a morn- , ing gown, medlas, stockings. ligas, garters. las chinelas, the slippers. el delantalf an apron. un peyne, a comb. el peinador, a combing- cloth. el tocador, the toilet. el espejo, a looking-glass. polvos, powder, lapomada, pomatum. aguas deoloT, sweet" waters. los alfileres, pins. el acerico, a pincushion. una mascara, a mask. una es(;Qjia, a head-dress. — For the ladies. un bonetCy a bonnet. un sombrero, a hat. un velo, a veil. los pingajos, bobs, los rl%os, the curb, • la pasta, pasteboard. d alanico, a fan. una palatim, a tippet. un mangiiito, a muff, losguantes, gloves, las tablillast tables. lotellita de oler, a smelling- bottle, una capa, a cloak. una mantilla, a mantle. una casacona, a pelisse. el dedal, a thimble. la aguja, a needle. el hilo, thread. el lienzn,, linen.. el espejo de faWiquera, a pocket looking- glas.s, una bata, a gown. la gargantilla, a necklace^ A rOCJlBULART OF WORDS. 263 jeydSy jewels. piedras preciosas, precious stones. unjoya, a jewel. un diamante^ a diamond. 7/7m esmeralda, an emerald. un ruH, a ruby. una per la, a pearl. medias de seda, silk stock- ings. medias de algodon, cotton stockings. zapatoSf shoes. galochas. pattens. el encrespador, the curling- irons. el para agua, an umbrella. el quita sol, a parasol. an Ttlax de faltriquera, a watch. una casacona, a great coat. un pahuelo, a pocket hand- kerchief. los an'iUos, rings. los xarcillosy earrings. los brazaletts, bracelets. De las partes del cuerpo humano. Of the parts of the human body. la caleza, the head. la cara, the face. lafrente, the forehead. los ojos, the eyes. las cejas, the eyebrows. los parpados, the eyelids. la niiia del ojo, the eyeball. las orejaSy the ears. el pelo, the hair. las sienes, the temples. el hueco de la oreja, the hol- low of the ear. el timpano del oido, the drum of the ear. las pestanas, the eyelashes. las mexiltas, the cheeks. la nariz, the nose. Uls ventanas de la nariz, the nostrils. la loca, the mouth. la lengua, the tongue. los dientes, the teeth. las encias, the gums. los colmillosy the eye-teeth. las muelas, the grinders. los laCios, the lips. elpaladar, the palate. los hlgotes, the whiskers. la tarl'a, the chin. las barlas, the beard. el cuelloy the neck. la gargarita, the throat. el seno, the bosom. el pecho, the breast. el estomago, the stomach. los hombros, the shoulders. los brazos, the arms. el codo, the elbow. 264 A. VOCABULARY OF WORDS. h miineca^ the wrist. las rmnoSf the hauds. elpulgar, the thumb. el deda hidice, » he tqr,- ^ager. el cledo del corazon, ri:,^ iw.d- ■dk- liriger. el deda dnular, the fourth finger. el dedo meniquey tl:e little finger. la yema de los dedos, the brawn of the tingers. las uiiaSy the naiis. la harriga^ the belly. las costiUos, the ribs. el omWigOj the navel. las ingles, the groins. los muslos, the thighs. las rodillas, the knees. las piernas, the legs. la pantqrrilla, the calf of the leg. hueso del tolillo, the ancle- bone. la garganta delpU^ the in- step. el pic, the foot. el talon, the heel. la plant a del piHy t|ie sole of _the foot. el semllante, tke mien. Los ciiico sentidas,' la vista, the sip^ht. el oiJo, the hearing, el olfato, the s«iielL la complexion, the co plexif el ayre, the air. el pnrte, the demeanour. la gnrdura, the fatness. la magrura, the leanness los costados, the sides. la eslatura, the stature. el paso, the gait. elgesto, the gesture. el cclehro, the braiii. la sangrc, the blood. las venas, the veins. las arterias, the arteries. hs nervios, the nerves. los musculos, the muscles el cutis, the skin. el cor axon, the heart, e/ higado, the liver. Zo^ pulmones, the lungs, /a vexiga, the bladder, /a AieZ, the gall. la saliva, the spittle. e/ sudor y the sweat. WW resfriado, the rheum, /a ^z, a cough. la respiracion, the breath la vo%, the voice. lapalahra, the speech. el suspiro, a sigh. -The five senses. el gusto, the taste. el tacio, the feeling. A VOCABUIAKY OF W0RD5. 2(55 De las edades. — Of ages. 7d ninez, childhood. infancia, infancy, puericia, boyishness. ' platos, plates. /ojf cuckilloSy ki\ives» A VOCABULAUy OP WORDS; 2{>9 los tenedores, forks. los saltros, saltcellars. la escudiUay a porringer. los platos, dishes. las cucharas,, spoons. ei jarrOy a mug. una tasa, a cup. gran platOy a bason. la pala del homo, the peel of the oven. ^/^q;WoVj a chopping- block, lalena, some wood, Los criados de una casa,— The servants of a house. el mayordomo, the steward. el limosnero, an almoner. el capellan, a chaplain. el secretario, the secretary. "el despensero el camarero, the purveyor. the chamber- lain. el page, a page. d lacayo, a toot man. el cocker 0, a coachman. el mozo de caballos, a groom. el cahallerixo, the master of the horse*. el copero, the cupbearer. el bodtguero, a butler. elhulconero, a falconer, el cocinero, the cook. la codnera, a woman cook - el galopin, the scullion, la criddd, the maid servant. donctlla de la sefiora, the chambermaids done el la de cdmara, the waiting-woman. el trinchantey the carver. el jardinerOy the gardener. el porter 0, the porter. el amo de la casa, the master of the house. Ijo que hallamos en la lodega. VVhat we find in the cellar. u.na lota, a butt. un Imrril, a barrel. el sitio de la huta, a stand for a butt. el emludo, a funnel. algunos cercos, some hoops.. la hex, the dregs. el vino, wine. vino anejo, old wine. vino nu^'o, new wmev . vino tinto, red wine. vino blancoy white wine. vino claretey claret. vino agrioy sour wine. . vino duke, sweet wine. cervexa, beer. cerveza pef/ueiia, ^mall been sidra, cider. 2a 3 nyo A VOCABULARY OF WORDS, vinagre, vinegar. el martillo, a liamnier. la linterna, a lantern. dec eniar unh aril ^ to tap a butt. sacar vino, to draw wine. Lo que se halla cerca de la puerta. What is found about the s;ate. la Have, the key. In cerradura, the lock. si picaporte, the latch. cl cerrojo, the bolt. la campanula, the belT. el aldaho7i, the knocke^r. los guardas de la cerradura, the wards of a lock, la ira?7C», the bar. el umhrali the threshold. los go%neSy the hinges. Lo qu^ se halla en. la cahallerixa. What is fotind in the stable. d keno, the hay, la auenay some oats. la paja^ .some stiaw. el enrtjado, a rack. el p€sebre, a manger. el salvado, the bran. el pei/ne, the comb. el ahuohaza, the eurryeomb el tamix, a sieved dfreno, a bridle. la sill a, a saddle. el petral, the breast plate^ las cinchas, the girths. las cerneja^ the fetlocks. algunos flfwos, some nailiv el arxofi, the saddle-bow. lu cuerda, a halter. elesial'iero, the- groom, /o.f cal^allos, the horses. «r^ carro, a cart. JLo ^tte .fe Aa//fl fn eljardln ; Jiores, urholeSy tsfc. What is found in the garden ; flowers, trees, &c kilera de drholes, a row of violeias, violets. trees. el emparrado, an arbour. una rosa, a rose. unjazmin, a jessanmin* daveles, pinks. tulipanes, tulips, linos, liliesr. alhelies, gilliflowers. junqui/los, jonquils. amapolaSf poppies. inan%an0y an apple-tree. naranjo, an orange- tree. la espina, the gooseberrjf- bush. A VOCABULARY OF WORDS. 271 el rosal, a rose-bush. la vidy ihe vine. la yedra, the ivy. un ramo, a branch. el almeridroy an almond-tree. calle de arholeSy an alley. un bosquecitOy a little wood. la sombray the shade. el fresco y the cool. un p^aly a pear-tree. nn cerexo, a cherry-tree. un ciruelo, a plum-tree. un albaricoquey an apricoJ- tree. vn moral, a ranlberry-tree. un alberchigOy a peach-tree. una higueray a fig-tree. U7i olivoy an olive-tree. el boXy the box-tree. el laurely a iaurel-tree. el abetOy a fir-tree. elrobk, an oak. e/ o^«o, the elm. la haya, the beech-tree. elplantely the nursery. Ijfuente, the fountain. /o.y eitanque^y the canals, WW arbustOy a bush, e/ mirlo, a myrtle-tree. /a mejoranay . sweet mar- joram, e/ tomllloy thyme. la veidura, verdure. u n ra m illete, a nosegay . Dignidadcs temporales. — Temporal dignities. el chancillery the chancellor. d guarda selloSy the keeper of the seals. el secretario del estado, the secretary of state. el superintendente, the sur- veyor. el tesorero, the treasurer. el presidentCy the president. el co7isi'jerOy tiie coun.sellor. d maestro de las suplicasy the master of requests. el maestro de cuentas, the master of accounts. eljuez, the judge. el consul, the consul. el magistrado civlly the civil magistrate, el correg'ulor, the mayor. el alcalde de barrio, the alderman. el abogado, the advocate. el procurador general, the attorney-generaU vn escrihano, an attorney. un diputadoy a deputy. un notarioy a notary. un secretario, a secretary, un procurador y a solicitor, un escribiente, a clerk, un escriiory a writer. el portero, the door-keeper. 272 A VOCABULARY OF WOllDS. el alguacil, the Serjeant. el carcelero, a gaoler. un litigantey a pleader. Oficiales de guerra. el general, the general. el almirante, the admiraK el teniente general, the lieu- tenant-general. el mariscal de campo, a field- marshal. el brigadier, a brigadier. el coronel, the colonel. el sargento mayor, the major. el ayudante mayor, the ad- jutant. el capitan, the captain. el teniente, the lieutenant. el corneta, the cornet. el alfcrez, the ensign. ei sargento, the serjeant. el ca/io de escuadra, the corporal. el hal'ilitddo, a quarter- master. el coinisario, a commissary. el precursor, a harbinger. Del exerc'Uo.- un exercilo, a land army. una armada,, a fleet. el cuerpo del exercito, the main body. lavanguardia, the vanguard. ki retaguardia,. the rear- guard. un preso, a prisoner. el corchete, a bumbailhl:^ —Officers of war. soldado de d caballo, a horse- man. la infanteria, the infantry. un dragon, a dragoon. un mosquetero, a rausque- teer. el trompetero, a trumpeter. un tambor, a drummer. el pifano, the fifer. la centinela, the sentiner. la ronda, the round. la patruUa, the patrolc una espia, a spy. wi gastador, a pioneer. el artillero, a cannoneer; un minero, a miner. un voluntario, a volunteer: /oj voluntarios, the volun>- teers. soldados perdidos, the for- lorn hope-. ■Of the army. el' cuerpo de reserva, the body of reserve; el campo volante, a flying camp.. kt cahalleria, the horse. la infanteria, the foot.. A vocabulahy or wokds. ,273 un es(/uadron, a squadron. un batallon, a battalion. la pritnera Jila, the tirst rank. la segundaJHa, the second rank. el Lagage, the baggage. De las fort'i/icaciories. — Of the fortifications. la artllUria, the artilleiy. las tlenrlas, the tents. el pahellon, the pavilion. un regimiento, a regiment. una comfjahia, a company. la guarjiicion, a garrison. una ciudud, 2l city. una ciudadela, the citadel. unfuerte, a fort. una forialeza, a fortress. un Castillo, a castle. las murallaSy the walls. elfoso, the ditch. la palizada, a palissado. ia coriina, the curtain. una contra mina, a counter mine. una torre, a tower. el parapeto, a parapet. terraplen, the rampart. un bastion, a bastion. los viveres, provisions. las municiones, ammuni- tion. la media luna, the halt moon. elsUio, a siege. estrada cubiertOf the covered las capitulaciones, the capi- way. tulations. un reducto, a redoubt. un socdrro, succours. las trincheras, the trenches, una salida, a sally. U7ia mina, a mine. un asalto, a storm. De las profisioncs y negocios. — Professions and trades. un medico, a physician. un cirujnno, a surgeon. un boticario, an apothecary. un grabador, an engraver. 7tn plalei'o, a goldsmith. un reloiero, a watclimaker. tin mercadar, a merchant. wercadtr de sedas, a mercer. tcndero de cint:is, a iuiber- dasher. ?/^i"orf/o£/or, anembroiderer. w;?a/(7«i7ri£ior,anupholsterer, un chamarillero, a pawn- broker, un pasielero, a pastrycook. un carnicco, a bu^clier. un mesonero, an innkeeper. un sonibrerero, a hatmaker. un sastre, a tailor. un zapatero, a shoemaker, un imprcsor, a printer. un /ihero, a bookseller. 274 A VOCABULAftY OP WORD; un panadero, a baker. iin vidriero, a glazier, un remeridon, a cooler. un herrudor,, a farrier. un dlleroy a sacller un comedhnUe, a player. un hnrlero, a b.irber. un musico, a musician. un larpinlero de obrajina, a un piiitor, a painter. joiner un carpiniero, a carpenter. un alb ami, a mason. un serrngero, a locksmith. \m vwitnero, a miller. icn guanlero, a glover. una lavandera, a washer- woman. mercadir de vino, a wine- merchauL un espadero, a sword cutler. un enrjuadcrnadur, a book- binder. una modista, a milliner, una hatera, a mantuamaker. un inierprete, a linguist. Calidades, defectos, e mperfeciones de un kombre. Qualities, defects, and imperfections of a man. un tuerto, a one-eyed man. un enano, a dwarf. un ciego, a blind man. un iadron, a thief. w«Joroiacio, a hunch-backed un belitre^ a rascal. man. el verdugo, the executioner. un estropeado, a cripple. un ratero, a pickpocket. un viancOf a cripple. un picaro, a rogue. z^« 2;w?afo, a left-handed man. un alcahuete, a pimp. un manco. a one-handed man. un .sordo, a deaf man. un^.mudo, a dumb man. un tartamudo, a stammerer, un calvOf a bald man. un magico, a magician, im hechicem, a sorcerer. una bruxa, a witch. un malvado, a wicked fel- low. un pobreie, a sad wretch. Buenas calidades del hombre, y las enfcrmedadts a las quales eiid txpucsto. Good qualities of a man, and the illnesses to which he is subject. hombre de lucva cara, a hombre de7nala cara, a b^d- , good-locking man. looking Uiau. A VOCABULARY OF \vr»RDS. 275 hovilre rico, a rich man. desgracia, a misfortune. un enfe-rmo, a person ill una enjh-meddd, an illness. Unas caleniurns, a fever. calentura quotidiana,-A quo- tidian ague. las tercianaSj a tertian ague. las qiLor tanas, a quartan ague. elparasismo defrio, the cold lit. una herida, a wound. una contusion, a contusion. la gotay the gout. un dolor coiico, the colic. las viruelas, the small-[»ox. cl sarampiony the measles. un catarro, the rheum. unajiuxiou, a cold in the head. ia to%, the cough. ioz convuls'wo, the hooping- cou^h. la sarna, the itch. la (omezony the itching. un apostema, an impost- hume. la corrupcion, the corrup- tion. la piedra, the stone. las arenillas, the gravel. M« nudo, a bunch. z/« aranOy a scratch. wwa cairtstar, to lend. dar, to give, ■pedlr prestad%, to borrow. engafiar, to cheat, empenar, to pawn. Para la iglesia. — For the church, ir d la iglesia, to go to bautizar, to baptize, church, corifinnar, to conhrm. rogar a Dios, to ipniy God. repicar las cam partus oir el sermon, to hear the sermon. prcdicar, to preach. comulgar, to receive the sa- crament. adornar, to adorn. fo ring the belis. sepultar, to bury. can tar, to sing. enterrar, to inter. arrodiUarse, to kneel. levantarse, to rise. jicciones y movimientos de los homlres. Actions and motions of men. andar, or ir, to go. (juedar, to stay. habitar, to dwell. vcnir, to come. ■pas ear, to walk. correr, to run seguify to follow. escapar, to escape. partir, to depart. adelantar, to advance, e.v^ar deltas, to stand back, t'^/ar /e appeased, crrar, to mistake. emhrollarse, to embroil one- self, w/ar ct>/7o, to be certain. e5/t/r zeloso, to be jealous. Para /as ar/e^ y negocios. — For arts and trades. pintar, to paint. delinear, to draw a sketch* gravar, to engrave. Ijordarp to embroider. 2S6 A VOCAi^ULARY OF WORDS. esmaltafy to enamel. dorar, to gild. platear, to silver over. ataractary to inlay. Para el exercUo.- tevaniar gente, to raise sol- diers, tocar el tamlor, to beat the drum. tocar el clarin, to sound the trumpet. viarchar, to march. arampar, to encamp. ahjar, to lodge. opearse del cal: alio, toaliglit. dar batnlla, to give battle. gaiiar la victoria, to gain the victoiy. poner en desorden, U) put in disorder. destruir, to rout. hurtar, to rob. saqueaTy to sack. pillar, to plunder. bloquear, to block up. imprlwlr^ to print. t/itjnadtrnnr, to bind a bocill. iial)ujar, to labour. —For the army. sitiar, to besiege. asaltar, to storm. tomar de asalto, to take by storm. saltar la mina, to spring a mine. eTicender, to fire. capitulary to capitulate. rcndirsH, to surrender. ' sacar la espada, to draw thtJ sword. vwiar, to kill. dai quartely to give quarter. herir^ to wound. ahrir la irmchiraj to open the trenches. tocar a la retirada, to sound the retreat. perseguir alenemigOy to pur- sue the enemy. END OF THE VOCABULARY. 287 rAMILlAR DIALOGUES, DIALOGO L Acerca de saludar e infi)r- marse de la salud de una persona. BUENOS dias, tenga^ vmd. Buenos nnches, icnga vmd. f^Cnrnn estd, umd?* Bneno^ no muy huuno ; asi, asi. Muy hue7i(ypara servir/e. A I seriicio de vm. I'll a vm. mudios ancs. Lc diiy las gracias. ^^Coino esUi su scilor her- •mano ? K'ita lueno. Se alegrard de vcr a vmd. No iengo tiempo de verle futy. SieiUese vmd. un rafo. Dd una si/la al schor. No es necesarlo. JE? vienester que vdya d hac^r una v'mla en la vecinddd. Estd vm. de priesa. Folvere luego, Adios, senor. DIALOGUE I. About saluting and 'uiqui" ring after ttie health of a pet son. GOOD morning, sir. Good night, sir. How do you d(), sir ? Well, not very well} so, so. Very well to serve you. At your service. J am obliged to you. ] thank you- Mow does your brother do? He is well. He will be i;lad to see you. I shall liave no time to see him T ocho. U Como^ las ocho ! han dada^ How, eight ! it has struck las diez. . ten. Es mcnester que me levante Xlien I must rise with all X pronto. speed. f DIALOGO HI , DIALOGUE HI. ," Para veslir-e. To dress oneself. ^ ^;Quien es? or ^,f/u'ien eslaahiP Who is there ? [ ^:Que gustavvidP What will you pleasfe to have, sir? Presto, haz caf.dela, y ven Be quick, make a fire, and a vestirtTte. dress me. Lstd la candcia cncemUda, Ihere is a tire, sir. sehor. JJdme mi carnisa. Give me my shirt. No esta caliente, cstdftia. It is not warm, it is qv.i's cold. calmtare si vm gusta. If you plense, I will warm ir. , no ', traeiue mis medias No, no ; bdng me my silk de scila, stocking?. 2 c .4290 DIALOGUES. Tien en punfos. Remiindalas un poco. Lds he dado a la remend6na de media a. Has hecho hien. ^Adonde estan nris chine/as ? ^Adjande esta mi bala ? . Peyname. Tomn otro peyne. Dame mi pauuelo. Jlqui csld itno limpio, sefior. Dame el que estd en mi fat- trig Iter a. Lo di a la lavandvra; estaha sudo. filJa Iraida ella-mi ropaP .Si, senor, no falta iiada. ^ Que vestido llevardvm. hoy, smor ? El ffUe Ueve ayer. El saslre dde traer iiiego su reolido nuevo de vm Alguno lia^:a d la puerta ; ■ve cfuiun e^. ^ Qifien is ? Es el sastre, smor. Dile que entre. DJALOGQ IV. El hidalgo y el sastre. l^Me trae vm. mi vest'ido 9 Sij, senor ; cqui estd. They are torn. Stiich [hem a little ; mend them. I liave given them to the stocking- mender. You have Joi le right. Where are my slipj)ers ? Where is my ni;^ht gown ? Comb my bead. Take another comb. Give me my handkerchief. There is a clean one, sir. Give m.e that which is in my pocket. I gave it to the washerw'o- man ;, it was foul. Has she brought my linen ? Yes, sir ; there wants no- thing. What clothes will you "wear to-day, sir ? These I had yesterday. The tailor will bring your suit of clothes presently. Somebody knocks j see who it is. Who is it ? It is the tailor, sir. Let him come rn^ D'ALOGUE rv. The gentleman and the tailor. Do you bring me my suit of clothes ? Yes, sir j here it is. DIALOGUES. 291 Vmd. me hace esperar largo tien,po. No pniia venir inas pronto ; no tstaba acabudo. El forro no estaia cosido. ^Quiere um. prohar la ca- saca 9 Vvdmos si estd bien hecha. Espero que le gustard a Me parece bien larga. Sc usan largns ahora. Aiotonane vm Mc aprieta demasia h. Para estnr lien kecka, es predso que ajusle bien. ^No son las mangas detna- siado anchas ? No, senor : van wuy lien. Este veMdo le vd muy bien d vm. Esta demasiado corto, l^rgo, grande, pequem. Perdone vm , le va muy bien, Adonde estd el resto de mi pano. No hay siquira un resto. ^Ha vm. heclio su cuenta ? SenoTy no ; no he tenido tiempo. Tray gala manana, quelepa- gare. You make me wait a great while. I could not come s^ner j it was not finished. The liaing was not sewed. Will you be p eased to try the close coat on ? Let us s-e whether it be well made. I believe it will please you. It seems to me to be very long. They wear them long now. Button me. It is too close. T(j tit properly, it ought to be close. Are not the sieves too wide ? No, sir ^ they fit very well. This suit becomes you mighty well. It is too short, too long, too big, too little. Pardon me, it fits very well, "Where is the rest of my dull ? There is not a bit lefl. Have you made your bill ? No, sir J I had not time. Bring it to-morrow j I will pay you. 2 C2 292 DIALOGUI Dl/iLOGO V, Para alrro) zar, Tr-n/g(Uios a/guna cosa, para almorxur. Si, sehor ; ahi iienen salchi- chas y pasteUUos. ^.Gustan vms.jamon ? Si, trdelo ,* que coriaremos una tajada. Poll los manteks. J)d?ios plaioSy cudnlhs, y tenedvres, l.ava hs vasos, i)d una silla al smor. Sienlese vm. junto a la can- dela, Esioy lien aqui } no tengo frio. Vedmos si el vino es bueno. Dame esa lotella y un vaso. Pritelc vm. estevino, seuor. Coma le halla ? que le pa^ rece ? No es.malo j es may bueno. ulh'i estdn las salchichas ; fjuita este plaio. Coma Unas salchichas. He comldo almuias ; son muy biienas. Deme V7?i algo de bcber. Caballero a la salad de vm. DIALOGUE V. To go to breakfast. Bring us something for breakfast. Yes sir; there are sau- sages antl petty-})atties. Do you ehoose the gammon of bacon S Yes, bring it j we will cut a slice of it. Lay the table-cloth. Give us plates, knives, and forks. Rinse the glasses, Give the gentleman a chair. Sit. down, sir j sit by the fire. I am very well here } I ^m not cold. Let us see if the wine is good. Give me that bottle and a glass. Taste that wine, pray. Kow do you like it ? What do you say to it ? It is not bad ; it is very good. Here are the sausages ; take away this plate. Eat some saiu sages. I have seen some ; they are very good. Give me some drink. Y;our health, sir. DIALOGUES. 293 JLe doy las gracias. Dei de Leber al sehor. j4calo de beher. Los pn^leliUos eran muy buenos. Solo estalan demasiado co- cidos. No come vm. Tanlo he comido, que no tendre ganas d medio dia. Vm. se burla; no ha comido casi nada. He comido de buena gana las morcillaSf las saUhi- chasj y eljamon, DJALOGO VI. Para liablar Espauol. ^Como vdmos con el Espauol? ^Ha hecho vm. viuchos pro- gresos ahora ? %* • No mucho i no se casi nada. Die en, no obstante, quevm, lo habla muy bien. I Oxoldfuera verdad . Los que Lo dicen se enganan muc'iu. Le aseguro d vm. que me lo han dicho. Puedo decir algunas pala- bras que he aprendido de memoria. 2c Sir, I thank you. Give the gen;leman some- thing to drink. I drank but just now. The petty-patties were very good . They were baked a littl® too much. You do not eat. I have eaten somuch, I shall not be able to eat my din- ner. You only jest j you have eaten nothing at all, I have eaten very heartily black -pudding, sausages, and ham. DIALOGUE VI. To speak Spanish. How goes on your Spanish ? Are you much improved in it now. Not much J 1 know scarcely any thing. It is said, however, you speak it verj' well. Would to God it w ere true ! Those that say so are much mistaken. I assure you, I was told so. I can say a few word$ which i have leaint by heart* 3 294 DIALOGUES. Yes quanta lasta para em- pezar a hablar. El prbuilno no cs el todo ; es preciso ocular. Halle vm. siempre, 6 lien 6 vial. Ttmo decir disparates. No hay vadr que terner ; la lengua Espanula no es di- ffil. Lo v^; y que ticne t.mMen alundancia de ^racuis. La apiicacion es el solo m'do de nprenderla. ^Quanto tenipohd, <{uevm. la tslu aprendieado ? Api^nas dos mtses. ^No did su maestro de vm. que es menester hallar si- empre E^pafiol ? Si, sefior, we lo dice & me- nu'.lo. ^Pnrque no halla vm 9 ^Con quien ki^de hallar^ Con todos los que le hallen a vm. Quisiera hallar j pero no ms atrevo, Vm. no dele tcner miedo. Es menesler ser atrevido. And it is as much as it is ne- cessary to begin to speaK, The beginning is not all ; you must make an end. Be always speaking, either well or ill. I am afraid of committing blunders. Never tear J the Spanish language is not hard. I know it ; and that it has abundance of graces. Application is the only way of learning it. How long have you been . learning? Scarcely two months. Dees not your master tell you, you must always speak Spanish? Yes, he often tells me so. "* Why don't you talk, then ? Whom will you have me , talk with ? With those tliat talk to you. I would fain talk, but I dare not. You must not be afraid. You must be bold. DlALOGUfci. 205 DIALOGO Vll. DeJ tiempo. jjQwf' tiempo kace '? Have huen tienipa. Have mal tientpo. ^Hace fi'io ? ^h ice color? No liacefrio ; no ivice calur. t seJior, no hallara otra semejante en ninguna parte. ^A quauto la vara f Sin pedir demasiado, vale veinte schelines. Wo estoy acostumlrddo a re- gatear;ruegodvm. queme diga el ultimo precio. He dicho a vm. quanta vale. Es demnsiado caro ; le dare diex-y -ocho schelines. No puedo rebaxar un quarto. No dare d vm, lo que pide. Prn. me preguntS el ultimo precio f y se lo he dicho. yjmos, corte vm. dos varas y media. you will see the finest ib London. Show me the best you have. There is a very fine one, and what is worn at pre- sent. It is a good cloth j but I don't like the colour. There is another lighter piece. I like ^ hat colour well j but the cloth is not strong, is too thin. * Look 3t this piece, sir; you will not find the like any where else* What do yoa ask for it a yard ? Without exacting, it U worth twenty shillings. Sir, I am not used to stand haggling ; pray tell me your lowest price. I have told it you, sir j it is worth that. It is too dear ; I will give you eighteen shillings. I cannot abate a farthing. You shall not have what you ask. You asked me the lowest price, and I have told it to you. Come, come, cut off twa^ yards and a half of it. DIALOGUES. 299 Ase^uro dvm laxopalnha de honfl'redt Lien, quenoga- no fin CO schtlines ton vm. Atjul hay trei guineas, dJme vm. tambi'i, Uagame vm. el favor de darme vtra guinea; a esta le filta oro. Aqui half otra. AdiOi i sen6r, serviddr de vm. I protect, on the word of an honest mnn, I du not get a crown by you. There a-"e tliree guineas; give ine my change. Be plea-ieJ, sir, t<> give me anotherguinea; this is too light, it wants weight. H-re is another. Farewell ; sir, your servant^ DULOGO X. DIALOGUE X. • De las noticias. ^'Que se dice, de niiei^o ? ^Sabe vm. alguna cosa ? Ao he oidp decir nada. ^ Que se dice en la ciudad ? No se haila de r.ada. ^ No ha oido vm. hablar de la gtiena ? Ko se dice nada de ella Un sugeto me dixo esta ma- nana que el sen-.-r S ha quebroilo ; ^tlene urn cor- respondencia ion el? A'o, seu'jr, gracias a Dios. Tanto m^'jor. Verdaderam^nte vm me sor- prehe de. Querida amigo, no hay nada que eitrahar en todas las quiebras ahora. To inquire after news. What news is stirring ? Do you know any ? I have heard none. What is the talk of the town ? There is no talk of any thing. Have you heard no talk of war ? I heaid nothing of it. A p-^ison told me this morning, that P^. . S. is a bafikrupt j have you any connexion ujth him ? No, tiiank God. So mi'ch the better. Indeed y^u surprise me. My dear friend, there is no wonder in all the bank- ruptcies now. 300 DIALOGUES. ^V or que 9 Porque la mayor parte de los tender OS quieren pa- recer mas de lo que son realmente. ^A quanta llega su quiehra P Entre veinte y cinco 6 veinte y seis mil libras esterlinas. iTantoi vm. me sorprckefide. Quatro anas hd t'stdha de caxero en la tienda del senor M. ^Co7no ha po- dido tener ta?ito credito ? No se, era rico quando al principio alrio su tienda. He oido, tres mil Vihras, Muy lien ; si tenia ires mil lihras y ahora esta bisol- vente, hay ciertmjiente ma- la conducta en el. Lo supc^^o; he oido que- ticne casa de campo mvy soherhiamente adornada, una calesa, dos o' ires criados, sin hahlar de sus mozos de tienda : con lo- das estas eosas st; gasia la mayor parte de la ganan- day ademds de la ccraedia y de los convites. Why so ? Because the greatest par; shopkeepers will apj. more than they reaii are. What is the amount of hi banki-uptcy ? Between twenty-five an twenty- six thousand. So much as that ! you si; prise me. Four years ago he was but a shopman at Mr. M's. How has he been able to be trus*- so much ? I don't know 5 he v> worth something whci- he tirst began to open his shop, I heard, three thousand pounds. Well J if he was worth three thousand and re- duced to be a bankrupt nov.', there must be some misconduct in that. I suppose so,- I have heard he has a country-house ;; mofit handsomely fur-f< nislied, a horse-chaise,^^^ ,two or three servants,! W'iihout speaking of his,^ shopmen: all that takes ^ a great part of the profit,! besides frequent enter- 1 tainuients and the play. } DIALOGUES, 301 5 Si no fuira oira cosa que eso, seria hagaiela. ^Fm. llama eso lagatela P Si, sipuede sosiener se me- jantes gastos 'j mas si los nay pes son su mas grande ocupacion, y pierde en un ins tan te el trahajo de sus moxos y su ganancia, no hay que extranar que sea y insolvente. " No puedo comprehender como un hombre dejuicio puede Sir tan inconsiderado que •arruine a otros y a si misnio. He oido que tieneabundancia de lodas suertes de genet os. Si tiene tantos generos, y no paga los, ^No seria mejor volver lo que no puede ven- der, que hacer gala de lo que no es suyo ? If there was nothing but that, it would be but a trifle. Do you call that a trifle ? Yes, if he can afford it; but if cards are his great- est occupation, and he loses in an instant the labour of his men and his own, I do not won- der at his being a bank- rupt. I cannot comprehend how a man of sense can riin headlong to the ruin of others and his own. I have beard he is over- stocked with e\'«ry thing. If he is overstocked, and does not pay for it, would it not be better to send back what he can- not sell/ than to make a show of what is not his /;;. no considera, que la gente va generalmente a- donde hay mas en que es- coger. Lo concedo ; pero hay un medio en cada cosa. , quando la prudencia es la rtgla de nuesiras ac- Clones i mas quando que- 2 But you do not reflect, that people generally go where there is a greater choice. I grant it : however, there is a medium in every thing. Yes, when prudence dic- tates our actions j but when we will appear 302 DIALOGUES. remosparecer lo que no so- mos, otros sufren por ello. Vm. tiene razon. ^ Quandose ha de presentar ? La gazeia no lo dice. Pronto Jo salremos. Hace veinte y sets auos des- de que abri mi tienda : mi muger y yo no tenidmos seiscientas lihras esterli- nas : hemos educddo doce hijos, y vivido dichosos, sin verme insolvente. Puedo cast decir lo mismo ; mi fortuna verdadera- mente no era tan conside- rable: pero con economia he vencido las dificultades de la vida. (i^Era vm. casado quando abrio su tienda ? No ; tenia tienda die% anos antes de casarme, y tuve la dicha de hallar una muger de mi modo de pen- sar. Somas umbos anciaiios, y hemos escogido el mejor tiempo para nuestros ne- gocios. 'Realmente, es asi; porque, si vm. obserutti pagamos ahora mas caros, lus gC' what we are not, others suffer for it. You say right. How soon will he present himself? The newspaper does not say. It will be soon l^nown. It is twenty-«ix years ago since I opened my shop > we were not worth, ray wife and I, six hundred pounds : I have bred up twelve children, and liv- ed comfortably, without having been a bankrupt. I can say almost the same j for my fortune was not so considerable by a great deal : yet by frugality I have overcome all the difficulties of life. Were you married when first you began business ? No ; I kept shop ten years before I married, and was fortunate enough to find a wife after my own sen- timents. We are both old, and have chosen the best time for OUT business. Truly, it is so j for^ if you observe, now we pay dearer for every article. DIALOGUES. 30S neros, y no son tan lu- enos como lo eran anti- guamente Es verdad; pero los vende- mos cast La mitad mas caro de lo que se vendian diez anos huce. Lo concedo ; pero no tene- mos tanta ganancia como teniamos. and not so good as they were formerly. It is true ; bnt we sell them nearly the half dearer than what they did sdl ten years ago. I grant it j but we have not so much profit as we^ had. DIALOGO XL DIALOGUE XL Para informarse de alguna. To inquire' after any one. ^Quien es ese calmllero que hallaha d vsted algun tiempo ha ? Es un /ileman. Le creia Ingles, Viene de Saxonia. Hdbla Frances muy lien. Los Espnnoles le creen Es- panol^y los Ingleses Ingles. Es dificil ha Liar tantas len- guas diferentes. Hd estddo largo tiempo en esos paises. ^Hdce largo tiempo que vm. le conoce ? Cerca de dos anos. Tiene luena presencia, y el aspecto noble* 2 Who is that gentleman that spoke to you a little while ago ? He is a German. I took him for an English- man. He comes from Saxony. He speaks French very well. The Spaniards take him foe a Spaniard, and the Eng- lish for an Englishman. It is ditiicult to be conver- sant in so many different languages. He has been a long \Wiile in those countries. Have you known him far any time ? About two years. He has a noble air > he ha^ a good mien. D2 304 DIALOGUES. E s lien parecido. No es demasiado alto, ni de- mhsiado haxo. B$ hermoso ; es hien hecho. Toca el laud, la guitarra, y otros muchos inslrumen- tos. Gustaria mucho de cono- eerie. Propordonari a ustedsu con- ocimienio. ^ Adonde vive ? Vive d la orillg, del no, f^Quandoquierevm. quevay' dnws a visitarle ? Quando vm, guste, porque es mi amigo intimo. Sera quando vm. este des- ocupado. Iremos manana por la ma" Se to ngradccere mucho. He is a genteel person. He is neither too tall, nor too little. He is handsome 3 he is well shaped. He plays upon the lute, the guitar, and several other instruments. I s!iould be glad to know him. I will bring you acquainted with him. Where does he live ? He lives by the river side. When will you have us go and wait on him ? Whenever you please, for he is my intimate friend. It shall be when you are not engaged. We will go to-morrow morning. I shall be obliged to you. DIALOGO XIL DIALOGUE Xn. De un viage. ^ Quantas leguas hay de aqul a N. ? Hay ocho leguas. No podremos llegar alia hoy, es itiuy tarde. No han dado las doce, tiene vm. bastante tiempo. For a journey. How many leagues is it from this place to N. ? It is eight leagues. We shall not be able to get there to-day, it is too late. It is not twelve o'clock^ you have time enough yet. dialogues; 305^ ^ Es un luen camino 9 Asi asi'y tiene vm. losques y t'ios que atrauesar. ^ Hoy peligro en el camino real? No se dice nada de eso ; es un camino en que se en- . cu'entra gente d cada mO" men to. ^ No se dice que hay ladrones en los bosques ? No hay nada que temer de dia ni de noche. ^ Que camino he de tomar 9 Quando estt* cerca del monte, tomard vm. a mano dere- cha. ^ Hay necesidad de suhir el monte ? No, sehor i no hay otro monte que un declive in^ sensible en el hosque. ^ Es el camino enredado en el bosque ? * Vm. no puede eMraviatse. Luego que este fuera d^ bosque, acucrdese vm. de tomar d la izquierda. Muchas gracias : lo agra- dezco mucho. Vamos, cahallerost dcaballo. ^ Adonde estd el marques ? Sefuieldelante, Is the road good? So so 3 there are woods- and rivers to pass. Is there any danger upon the highway ? There is no talk of it ; it is" a highway where you meet people every mo- ment. Do not they say there are robbers in the woods ? There is nothing to be fear- ed either by day or night. Which way must one take ? When you come near the hill, you must take to the right-hand. Is it not necessary to ascend the hill then ? No, sir -J there is no other hill but a little declivity in the wood. Is the way difficult through" . the wood ? You cannot lose your way. As soon as you are out of the wood, remember to keep to the left-hand, I thank you, sir, and anv much obliged to you. Come, come, gentlemen, let us tike horse. Where is the marquis > He is gone before. d3 306 DIALOGUES. Esperard a vms. fuera de la ciudad. <5 Que esperdmos ahora ? Va- mos. AdiQs, senores. Dios les d(i d vms. huen viage. Viva vm. muchps afios. * DIALOGO XIIL Para la cena y el alojamento. Apeemonos, senares. Toma los cahallos de estos senores J y cuidalos lien. Veamos ahora que nos dard vm. decenar. Un capon, media dozcna de pickdnes, una ensalada, seis codornices, y una do- zena de alondras. ^No quieren vms. otra cosaP No, esio lasta; pero dcnos huen vino y postres. Jbexenme vms. les aseguro que les dare gusto. MuTfibra d los senores. Denos vm. de cendr quanta antes. Antes que se kayan quitado vms. las iotas, estard la cena en la mesa. He will wait for you just out of town. What do we stay for now ? Let us be gone. Farewell, gentlemen. I wish you a good journey. Thank you. DIALOGUE XIIL For supper and lodgings. Let us alight; gentlemen. Take these gentlemen's horses, and take care of them. Now, let us see what you will give us for supper. A capon, half-a-dozen of pigeons, a salad, six quails, and a dozen of larks. Will you have nothing else ? ^Tii.4t is enough ; but give u^ some good wine, and ** some dessert. Let me alone, I will please you, I warrant ye. Light the gentlemen. Let us have our supper as soon as possible. Before you have pulled off your boots, supper will be upon the table. DIALOGUES. 307 Vengan nuestras maletas y p'utolas al quarto. Quit a mis lotas, y ve a ver si han dado heno d los calallos. Let our portmanteaus and pistols be carried upstairs. Pull otF my boots j and then ,you shall go and see » whether they have given the horses any hay. Llevalos al rio, y cuida que You shall conduct them to les den avena. Tendre cuenta con Descuide vm. todo : Seiiorts, la cena estdpronta-, estd en la mesa. Vamos luego, Vavios, seuores, a cenar, para poder acos tamos tempTuno. Dinos agua para lavarn. Sentemonos a la mesa, se» fiores. Denos de Leber. A su salud, sefiores. ^Es clvina bueno? No es malo. El capon no esta lastantc asado. Denos algunas naranjas. Porque no come vm. pi- chone.^ ? Me he comido un pichon, y ires alondias. Vaya por un escalfad6r. the river j and take care they give them some oats. I will take care of every thing; don't trouble vour- self. Gentlemen, supper is rea- dy ; it is upon the table, AYe will come presently. Let us go to supper, gen- tlemen, that we may go to bed in good time. Give us water to wash our hands. Let us sit down at table, gentlemen. Give us some drink. To your health, gentlemen. Is the wine gooti ? It is not bad. The capon is not done enotigh. Give us some oranges. Why don't you eat of these pigeons ? I have eaten one pigeon and three larks. Go, call for a chafing-dish. 108 DIALOGUE?, Di at posadero que venga d Tell the landlord we want kavlarnoS' to speak with hhn. DIALOGO XIV. » Para ajustar cnentas con el mesonero. * • Buenax noches, senores. ^Les gtista a vms. la cena ? SI, senor ; pero es menester pagar. ^/.Quanto hemos gastado ? El escote no sule a mucho. Vea vm. (pianto le debemos, par nosotros, nuesiros cri- ados, y cahatlos. Ilogan vms. la cuenta, y haUaran quetodo importa d\e% pesos. Me parece que es deniasiado. Al contrario, es muy harato. ^ Quanto ?ios hace vm. pagar por el vino ? Veinte sueldos la hotella. Trayganos otra hotella, y majiana por la manana le pagar emosdiezpesos in- cluyendo el almuefzo. Me parece que este seiior estd vialo. Estoy hueno, pero estoy mo^ lido y cansado. DIALOGUE XIV. To reckon with the landlord. Good evenings gentlemen. Are you satisfied with your supper ? We are ; but we must sa- tisfy you too. "What is the reckoning ? The reckoning is not great. See what you must have for us, our men, and our horses. Reel; on yourselves, and you* will find it comes to ten crowns. Methinks you ask too much. On the contrary, I am very reasonable. How much do you make us pay for the wine ? Twenty-pence a bottle. Bring us another bottle, and to-morrow morning , we will pay you ten crowns with breakfast included. Methinks the gentleman is not well. I am very well, but I am weary and fatigued. DIALOGUES. 3CK> Es menester tomar atiimo. Estaria mejor en la cama, que en la mesa. Maude vm. calentar su ca^ majyvaya vm.uacostarse. DI a mi criado, que venga a desnudanne. Esta esperando avm. en su aposento. Buenas noches, senores, Le falta avm. algo ? Nada quiero sino descanso. Manda que nos den sdbanas limpias. Las sdbanas que les envio son muy buenas. Despierlanos manana tern" prano. Lo hard sin falta. Buenas fioches tengan vms. se^ nores. You must take courage. It would be better for me to be in bed than at table. Get your bed warmed, and go to bed. Bid my man to come and undress me. He waits for you in your chamber. Good night, gentlemen. Do you want any thing ? Nothing but rest. Order them to give us cleaa sheets. The sheets you are going to have are very clean. Let us be called to-mor- rov/ morning very early, J will not fail, gentlemen^^ Good niffht. 310 CARTAS^DE COMERCia CARTA PRIMERA. Lion, 2 de Julio, de 1802; A los senores N., y M., y €"*"' Londres, Muy senores nuestros, NUESTRO priiner deseo es reconocer su reputacion dando parte a vms. de nuestro estaUecimiento en estaciudad, lajo la casa de comercio de B. y D. cuyas Jirmas hallardn at pie de esia ; y de las quales se servirdn vms. tomdr 7iQta, Los caudales consideralles que el senor B. acdla de ad- quirir por elfallecimiento de su padre, y los del senor D. juntos a su larga experiencia respectiva, son los fundament tos de nuestro commercio ; que esperamos con la asistencia de Vios, y la conjlanza de nros amigos, estahlecer sohrc un luen pie. Nada contrihuira mas en ello, senores, que ver nuestros servicios admltidos. Siendo nuestro intenta relativa d los negocios de vms., nos proponemos estcnder los nuestros lo que la prudencia perrnitiere, sea en giro de letras sohre las principales plazas de Europa, coma en cargamentos para el Levante y las Indias Occi- dentales, comis'iones en pahos, sedas, generos de seda, mercanciasy especias, drogas, aguardiente, plomo, es^ tauos, ^c. Deseamos con ardor que vms. hallen en esos diversos ^ generos algun ohjeto de especulacion que les empcJie d hacer un cnsayo con nosotros, por el qual procuraremos proharles nuestro %elo, y el cuidado, que tenemos de los. intereses que nos cor\fian nuestros amigos. Interin quedamos su COMMERCIAL LETTERS. LETTER THE FIRST. Lion, July 2d, 1 802. Messrs. N., M., and Co., London. Messrs. OUR first desire being the acknowledgment of your reputation, we give you advice ot our esiablisiiment in this city under the firm of B. and D. 3 of whom at the bottom of this letter you will tVnd in conformity their signatures, of which you will take due notice. The considerable fortune Mr. B. has just now inherited by the death of his father, added to that of Mr. D., and tlieir long experience in tlie mercantile line, are the foimdations of our commerce ; which we hope, with the blessing of God and the confidence of our fi*iends, to establish on a good order. Nothing can contribute more to it. Sirs, than the honour of your commands for the offer of our services. Our design being relative to your commerce, w^e purpose to extend ours as far as pru- dence will permit us, either in bank upon the principal places of Europe, or in embarkation for the Levant and the "West Indies, in commissions for woollen-drapery, silk, silk-stufF, commodities, spices, drugs, brandies, leads, pewters, &c. We wish ardently you could find among these divers sorts of goods some objects of speculation which might engage you to make an essay with us, in which we would endeavour to prove our zeal to you, and the care we take of the interests of our friends that confide in us. 312 COMMERCIAL LETTERS. ' con el was verdadero aftclo, con el que rogdmos a Dios 'que guarde sus vidas /nuchas anas, » B. L, Ms. de vms. Firm a de su hum?/de servidor, B, Firma de su humilde servidor, D. Firma de su humilde servidoTj L. CARTA SEGUNDA. Bristol, A de Mayo, tZe 1802. Al senor N. Valencia. Muy senor mio, EN respuesta a la de vm. de 5 del corriente digo, que tengo acceplada la letrn de 5C0/. esterlinas que ha lihrado contra mi a la orden de los senores P. R, y Compajiia, que pagare a su cunriplimienio, y en consequencia la he cargado a su cuenla de vvi. abonandole su iwporte. La adjunta se servird vjn. entregar al oviigo M. que es ■quanta ocut re y quedo a su disposicion, Piditndo a Dios -que guarde su vida m". a\ B.L.M'. ^c. ^ CARTA TERCERA, Londres, 8 de Fehrero, de 1804. Al Senor Don Carlos Sabio, Londres. Muy senor mio, Conio la dicha que ten go de conocer d vms. procede so- 2am en te del renomire de su casa la qua I tiene correspondent cia con muchas en esta y constandome al mismo tiempo COMMERCTAL LETTERS. 315 i a the interim we remain, with the most sincere affec- tion. Messieurs, Your most humble servants, B. D. L. The firm of your humble servant, F. B, The firm of your humble servant, J. D. The firm of your humble servant, P. L. LETTER THE SECOND. Bristol, May 4th, 1802. Mr. N. Valence. Sir, IN answer to your fiivour of the 5th instant, I have the honour to acquaint you 1 accepted the bill of ex- change for 500/. sterling you have drawn on me, to the order of iVIr. P. R. and Company, which I shall pay at its expiration j and in consequence of which I have placed it to your account and settled it. I beg you to deliver this letter to our friend Mr. M., which is all I can tell you for the present. Praying God to presene your life for many years, Sir, yours, &c. LETTER THE THIRD. London, February 8th, 1804. Mr. Charles Sabio, London. , Sir, AS the pleasure of my knowing you proceeds entirely from the reputation of your house, which corresponds 2 s 314 COMMERCIAL LETTERS. f/ue los generos en que vm. trata tienen su destino al Mar del SuT : Pido a vm. me haga la grncia de enviarme, una lista de ellos la qual vie servird de norte para encargorle dvm. to que mas salida ienga en Indias. Siendo todo lo que al presente se me ofrece, quedo aguardando el honor de su respuesta y ruego d Dios le guarde muchos auos como desea S.A'^'-S. Q.S.M.B. DIEGO LALUZ. CARTA QUJRTJ. Londres, 2 de Fclrero, de 1804. Sftr. Don Diego LaluXy Cadiz. Mny sefior mio, CON la llegada de este correo me hallo favor ccido con su mui estimadajt'cha de 1 del proximo pasado, y en respu- esta de la misma hallard vm. adjunta como desea la lista de los generos que son vtndihlcs en las Indias de Espana, y para que le sirva degoMerno, los precios correspondientes a su ca/idad ; vjn puede qucdar persuadido que pondre toda la dehida atencion y conato en la execucion de sus ordenes d Jin que quede tan satifecho de mi conducta como los demus amigos que me favor ecen, d los quales me rcferopara que se informedel modo con que los sirvo. Y con toda estimacion quedo al servicio de vm. d quien Dios guarde muchos y f elites anos y I ha sus manos, Su servidor, CARLOS SABIO. COMMERCIAL LETTERS. 315 whh many persons here, and perceiving at the same time that the goods you deal in are proper for the vSouth Sea : Therefore desire you will do me the favour to send me a memorandum of the above sort of goods, that they may serve me as instructions to commission you for sucU as m ly be fit for the Indies. This being all that now offers, I wait the honour of your answer, "and pray God preserve you many years. Kissing your hands, I remain. Your humble servant, JAMES LALUZ. LETTER THE FOURTH, I^ndon, 2d February, 1804, Mr. James Laluz, of Cadiz, Sir, ON the arrival of this post I am favoured with your much esteemed of the 1st ultimo ; and in answer thereto you will find inclosed a minute of the goods proper for the Spanish Indies, with the prices thereof according to their quality for your government 5 you may be well as^ sured I shall pay due attention and regard to the execu- tion of your orders, that you may be satisfied with my conduct, as my other friends are to .whom I refer you, that you may inquire of the manner how I use them, Mean time I am, with much esteem, at the service of yon, whom God preserve many and happy years, and kissing your bands I remain Your humble servant, CHARLES SABIO; 2e 316 COMMERCIAL LETTEKS. CARTA qUINTA. Cadiz, 3 de Marzo de 1804. Senor Doji Carlos, Sahio, Londres. Muy senor mio, AC ABO de rccilir su mui estimada del 2° proximo pa- sado, con liva nota de los ghieros vendibles enlndias; lo que ahora se me qjrece decirle es, que lajlota lui de par- tir parajines de Noviembre, para cuyo efecto estdn apare- jando los galeones con todapriesa, en cvya conformidad se strvirdvni. mandarme por el primer navio veintepiezas de pahos, mitad azules y mitad obscuros, de J, todosde veinie chelines la vara, bien a cofidicionados, y marcados LL No. 1 d 20, lo que cargard vm, en derechura para Bilbao, d la co?isignacio?i de los senores Bonitos y hijos, con orden que a la llegada de dicho navio los dlchos senores despachen los dos fardos con toda brevedadj hacienda el seguro por mi cuenta, y lihrando letra de cambio d dos usos por el importe de sufactura, la que aguardo de vm,, a quien Dios guards muthos felices anos, y besa sus manos, Su Servidor, DIEGO LALUZ. CARTA SBXTA, Londres, 4 de Alril de 1804, Smor Don Diego Laluz, Cadlx.^ Muy seilor mio, TEN GO el honor de su viui estimada del 3 de Mar%o fr6xinw pasado, referiendome d la mia del 2 de Febrero, con ncta de los generos vendibles £7i Jndias, y aviso del tiempo de la salida de lafiota, con orden al wisjim tiempo de enviar* ie veinte piezas do pauosi ^n conseqiipuia de lo qua I acalo COMMERCIAL LETTERS. 31/ LETTER THE FIFTH. Cadiz, 3d Marciv 1804, Mr. Charles Sabio, of London. Dear Sir, I HAVE just received your much esteemed of the 2d of last month, with a memorandum of goods for the Indies : what I would now inform you is, that the fleet will depan at the latter end of November, for which purpose they are getting ready the galleons with all expe- dition, so that you may send me by the first ship twenty pieces of cloth, half blue and half dark colour, of J, all of twenty shillings a-yard, in good condition, and marked LL No. 1 to 20, which you will load directly for Bilboa, consigned to Messrs. Bonitos and sons, with orders on the said ship's arrival for those genilemen to- send away the two bales with all speed. You will make the insurance for my account, and draw a bill of ex- change at two usances for the amount according to in- voice, which I wait for from you, whom God preserve many years : kissing your hands, am Your humble servant, JAMES LALUZ. LETTEK THE SIXTH. London, 4th April, 1804.. Mr. James Laluz, of Cadiz. Dear Sir, I HAVE the honour of your much esteemed of the 3d of March last, referring me to mine of the 2d Feb., with a note of goods for the Indies, and advising me of the time of the fleet's departure, with an order from you at the same time for twenty pieces of cloth 3 in conse^ ' 2E3 318 COMMERCIAL LETTERS. de cargar por su cuenta dichas veinte piezas marcadas LL. No. 1 d 20, alordo el hergantin Fanny, su capitan Diego Burletto, destinado para Bilbao, a la coTisignacion de lo^ senores Bonitos, todos las quales gcneros he asegurado, y al tiempo mismo por su cuenta y erden he lihrado contra vm, una letra de camhio d dos usos de 6\Q\. 10s. esterlmas, siendo el importe de dichos generos, segun factura y cono' cimiento inclusos, la qual honrard con su aceptacion y pago en debido tievipo. Es iodo lo que se ofrece ; y quedo a la obediencia de vm. a quien Dies guarde vmchos f dices anoSj y besa st4s manos, Su mas kumilde servidor, CARLOS SABIO. CARTA SEPTIMA. Cadiz, 5 de Mayo de 1804. SenorDon Carlos Salio, Londres. Muy sennrinio, H JiL LOME favor ecido con la de vm. de 4 del prdximo pasado, con factura y conocimiento de los referidos dos far* dos de mi cuenta, los quales he recti ido aviso de los senores Bonitos yde Bilbao, haber llegddo con el bcrgantin Fanny ; y al mi^mo tiempo abonado su cuenta de vm. segun factura 6lOjl. 105. yd la presentacion de su letra Iiare honor con la aceptacion, y se pagard el debido tiem.po con toda pujitJiO' liddd, esperando quevm. me haya servido como amigo, tanto en la calidaJ como en los predos ; lo que no dexard de ani- marme a durle may ores or denes, siendo cstas 20 piexas por muesira. Mientras quedo con todo el debido afecto al ser- vido devm. a quien Dios guarde mucliosfelices anos, y be- su sus manos, s S. H. Servidor, DIEGO LALUZ. COMT.IERCIAL LETTER!?, 319 qiience whereof I now load for your account the said twenty pieces, marked LL. N. 1 to 20, on board the Fanny brig, captain Tames Burletto, bound t6 Bilboa, and consigned to Messrs. Bonitos, all which goods I have insured, and at the same time have this day drawn a bill on you for your account and order, at two usances, for QUjL lOv. being the amount of the said goods, ac- cording to the inclosed invoice and bill of lading, which you will honour with your acceptance and payment when due J this is all that offers. I remain at yotir command, God preserve you many years, kissing your hands, I am Your most humble servant, CHARLES SABIO. LETTER THE SEVENTH. Cadiz, 5th May, 1804. Mr. Charles Sabio, of London. Dear Sir, I AM favoured with yours of the 4th of last month, with the invoice and bill of lading of two bales for my account, of which I have had advice from Messrs. Boni- tos, of Bilboa, of their arrival there in the Fanny brig j at the sam9 sime have credited your account the sum of 6\gl. 10s. as per invoice, and on presentation of your bill shall honour the same with my acceptance, and make punctual payment when due, hoping you have used me like a friend, as well in the sort as in the lowest prices, which will not fail to encourage me to give you larger orders, these 20 pieces beitig only for s{>eculation. Mean time, with all due regard and service to you, whom God preserve many happy years, kissing your hands, I remain Your humble servant, JAMES LALUZ. 320 COMMERCIAL LETTEi;.?. CARTA OCTAFJ. Londres, 6 de Junio de 1804. May senor mio, CON la llegdda de este correo me hallo favorecido con su mid estimdda del 5 proximo pasado, referiendome a lafac- tura y cojiocirniento de los fardns de panos de su cuenta, y €11 conformidad de lo qual he librado contra vni. dos leiras de cambio, una de 3001. y otra de 3 I9I. 10s siendo el im- porte de toda su cuenta, a dos usosy cada una pagadera d nuesiros d'tchos amigos los senores Bonitos, en Bilbao, y no dudo de su honor en la debida acceptacion, y pago de ellas d su vencimiento ; y vm.puede quedar persuadido que le serviri siempre con una buena caliddd segun su genera, asegurandoleque el precio es mui equitatim, lo que hago para fonservar su amistad y correspondencia^ y animarle a dor me viayores comislones en adelante : espero que lo ha- Ird hallado todo d su gusto y en buen ordeny satisfaccion }. en atencion d lo qual quedo el servicio de vm. ^c^ CARTA NONA. Cadiz, 7 de Julio de 1804.. Muy senor mio, CON la debida atencion respondo d la suya del 6 del proximo pasado, con aviso de haber vm gira'o ami cargo dos letras de cambio orden de los senores Bonitos, de Bilr- bao, las que accepte ayer, yasu vcncimiento las pagare con todo el honor acostumbrado^ Le dire a vm. que ayer recilri los dos far dos que los senores Bonitos me despackaron de Bilbao, todo parece bien acondicionado ; pero exdminand-o elfardo No. 1, hallo una pieza defectuosa y cuyo color azul time dos maticeSj la qual quedapor su cuenta, visto que de COMMERCIAL LETTERS. 321 LETTER THE EIGHTH. London^ Gth June, 1805. Sir, BY the arrival of this day's post I am favoured with your much esteemed of the 5\h of last month, referring me to the ipvoice and bill of lading of the bales of cloih for your account, and in consequence thereof I have drawn upon you two bills of exchange, one for 300/. and another for 3 1 9/. lOs, being the amount of the whole of your account, at two usances, each payable to our said friends Messrs. Bonitos, at Bilboa, and doubt not your honour in accepting them, and paying the same when due ; you may always depend on ray serving you with a good sort according to their quality, assuring you the price now is very easy, which I do to preserve your friendship and correspondence, and to encourage you to furriish me with larger commissions hereafter : hope you have found every thing in good order and to your satis- faction J in due regard to which I remain always at your service, &c. LETTER THE NINTH. Cadiz, 7th July, 1804, Sir, WITH all due regard I answer yours of the 6th of last mouth, advising me that you had drawn two bills of exchange on rrie in favour of Messrs. Bonitos of Bilboa, which I accepted yesterday, and shall pay the same when due with honour as usual. I must here inform you, that yesterday I received two b?les which Messrs. Bonitos sent me from Bilboa, and all seemed in good order and condition J but on examining the bale No. I, I find one piece defective and of two blue colours, which remains 322 COMMERCIAL LETTERS. la mantra que eslu es invendille ; las demas. piezas quedan perfcctas, como esiaii las diez piezas ohcuras del se^undo Jardo. Sie?ido lo que se me ojrece, quedo, isfc. CARTA DECIMA, LondreSj 8 de Jgosto de 1804. Muy senor wlo^ EN respuesta a la de vm. recibida el correo pasado, mucho me adtniro de oir que eosdminando el fard» No. I, hailo una pieza defectuosa y matizada de dos colores azul, lo quepuede haher ajoontecido por no estdr esta pieza lien doblada 6 por haver estado expuesta at aire, lo que hace fnudar el color ; pero sea como fucre, noes menester que vm. se quede con ella, porque tal no es mi intento, y le tengo acreditado por el importe de dicka, que espero no al- terard nuestra correspondencia ; y teniendo vm. ocasion de venderla, lo hard como y quando lien le pareciere, de lo que le quedare muy agradecido teniendome asi mas cuenla que el mandarmela otra vex. Me alegro mucho de oir qiw las demds piezas esimi perfectas y de su gusto : no dudo que vm, pueda vender las d un precio ventajoso, lo que desearJ que haga y quedo, d^c, CARTJ UNDECIMA. Cadis, gde Sctlemhede IQ04, Muy senor mlo, CON la mui estlmada devm. me hallo favorecido, su fecka del 8 de proximo pasado, y veo que me dene atonadn el importe de dicha pieza defectuosa ; con todo verede ven- dersela lo viejor que sea possible : las demos las hallo a mi saiisfaccion, y dentro depoco k mandare mis ordenes. Fui, Commercial LETTF.Re. 323 for' your account, because in the present manner it is quite unsaleable : the other pieces are god, as are also the ten dark ones of the second bale. Being all that offers^ I remain, &c. LETTER THE TENTH. ^ London, 8th of August, 1804. IN answer to yours received last post, I am surpri No. 1 d 10, segunsa orden, lo mismo en colores y^calidades que los antecedentes^ como parecen por lafacturay ctienia inclusas, cuyosfardos cargue d bordo de dicho navio destinado para Sevilla, d la consignacion de sus amigos los senores PeritoS} y he libra' do contra vm. por el importe del, el qual tojnare en casa de los dichos senores en su debido tienipo, quedando siem- pre al servicio de vvi, i^c. CJRTJ DECIMA qUARTA. Cadiz, a' 31 de Diciemhre, 1804. Muy senormio, TENGO en mi poder cl honor de la suya, en la qual hallo que vm. ha cargado por mi cuenta y riesgo diezfardos de panos, a bordo del navio nembrado la Amistad ; su ca- piian PierrOy destinado para Sevilla, d la consignacion de mis amigos los senores Peritos ; y tocante d la Ictra de cam' lio que vm. me dice habia librado contra mi por el importe de los dichos, puede recibirla en casa de los dichos senores d su vencimiento, como me dice quefue su intenlo. Espero que todos los gineros vendran bien acondicionados, asi como ioshepedido^ y aguardando la llegada del dicho navio quedo con sentimientos de gratitud y de veneracion, k^c. CARTA DECIMA QUINTA, Barcelona, 2 Febrero, 1805. Sefior Bon Bartolome Barber, en Bourdeaux, Muy Sefior mio, TUVE la dicha de recibir su mas estimada del 4 del prSximo pasado, en la qual me hallo honrado con una COMMERCIAL LETTERS. 32^ on board the ship Friendship, captain Peter Pierro, bound directly for Seville, ten bales of cloth, marked LL. No. 1 to 10, the colour and quality like the former you ordered, as appear by the inclosed invoice and ac- count thereof, which bales so loaded on board the said ship bound for Seville, are consigned to your friends Messrs. Peritos j and I have drawn on you for the amount thereof, which I shall take up at the house of tlie said gentlemen in due time, remaiuing always at your sei^ vice, &c. LETTER THE FOURTEENTH. Cadiz, 3 1 st December, 1 804. Sir, I AM now honoured with yours, wherein I find you' have loaded for my account and risk ten bales of cloth, on board the Friendship, captain Pierro, bound to Se- ville, and consigned to my friends Messrs. Peritos ; and as to the bill of exchange, which you say you have drawn on me for the amount thereof, you may receive it at their house when due, as you say was your design. I hope all the goods will come in good cx)ndilion, and as I ordered them ; and thereupon waiting the said ship's safe arrival, remain with the highest sentiments of gratitude and veneration, your, kc. LETTER THE FIFTEENTH. Barcelona, 2d February, 1805^ Mr. Bartholomew Barber, of Bourdeaux. Sir, I HAD the pleasure to receive your most esteemed letter of the 4th of last month, wherein I find you have 2p 2 328 ' COMMERCIAL LETTERS. cqmiswn para comprar por su cuenta 312 sncosf tie cochi- rMla-aL precio nias ventajoso que pucda. No dado (lue esie enterddo que el precio'^de este genero ha suhldo mas de lo acostunihrado; con todo eso yd hecompradopor su cueitia IdOsacos, d3].conl2s.porsacQ, queleemblurecon elprimer 7iavio que saiga de aqui para esa ; deseo que vm. we diga si csmencster queprosiga kasta elimporte de su comision ; he dadoordenes tocanted susletras de cambio lilradas con- tra Masero y Cavallo, y de la acceptacion y pago de ellas a su vcncimievto. Si vm, t'lene mas ordenes, las curnplire C071 toda precisioti y proniitudj asegurundole que siempre quedarc a su servicio. Dios guarde d K muchos y felices anas. S. 5. Servidor Q. S. M, B. BENITO BONELLL IFin de esta cfirrespondencia.'] COMMBRCIAL LETTEIS. 32g honoured me with a commission to buy for your account 312 bags of cochineal at the lowest price I can for your advantage. I doubt not but you well know these sort of goods have risen to a higher price than usual ; neverthe- less have already purchased for your account 150 bags, at 3/. 12s. per bag, which shall send by the first ship that goes from hence to your place. Desire you will inform me if it be necessary to proceed to the whole amount of your commission ; I have given orders about the accept- ance of your bill drawn on IMasero and Cavallo, and the payment thereof when due. If you have any further commands, I will fulfil them with all exactness and dispatch, assuring you that I shall always remain. Sir, Your very humble servant, BENEDICT BONELLT. ^Here ends this correspondence.} 2f3 330 BILL OF LADING. CONOCmiENTO. YO Pedro Galvez, maestre que soy del navio, quk Dlos salve, nombrado el Principe de la Paz, del porte de docientas toneladas, que al presente estd surto y anclado, en el puerto de Cadiz, para con el favor de Dios, seguir este presente viage al puerto de Londres, co- nozco haher recihido, y tengo cargado dentro del dicho mi navio dehnxo de cuhierta de vos L. A. senores Lopez y Compafiia, quatro caxones C. de libros Espanoles, enjutos y lien aeon- No. 1 a 4. dicionadosy y marcados con la warca defy era, con lus quales prometo, y me ohligo, llevan- dome Dios en huen salvamento con el dicho mi navio, al dicho puerlo, a acudir por vos y en vuestro nombre a los senores Lack- ington, Allen, y Compania, pagandome el Jlele, a razon de dos libras esterlinas por cada caxon, y sus averias acostumbrada^, y para lo qual asi tener y guardar, obligo a mi pernor a y bienes, y el dicho mi na- vio, Jletes, y aparejos, y lo mejor par ado de el. En fe de lo qual, os di tres cono- cimientos de un tenor, Jirmados de mi nom.' Ire por mi, o por mi escrivano, el uno cum- plido, los otros no valgan. Fecha en Cadiz, a 1° de Diciembre de 1806. PEDRO GALVEZ. BILL OF LAPIXG. ^31 BILL OF LADING, SHIPPED, by the grace of God, in good order and well -conditioned, by Messrs. Lopez and Company, in and upon the good ship called the Prifice of Peaces whereof is master, under God, for this present voyage, Peter Galue%, and now riding at anchor in the port of Cadiz, and, by God's grace, bound L. A. for London, to say, four chests of Spanish C. looks, being marked and numbered as in No. 1 to 4. the margin, and are to be delivered in the like good order and well conditioned, at the aforesaid port of London ^the act of God, the king's enemies, fire, and all and every other dangers and accidents of the seas, ri- vers, and navigation, of whatever nature and kind eoever, excepted) unto Messrs. Lackington, Allen, and Company, or to iheir assigns, he or they paying freight for tlie said goods after the rate of two pounds sterling for each chest, with primage and average -accustomed. In wiaiess whereof, J the said master (or purser) of the said ship have affirmed to three bills of lading, all of this tenor and date ; the one of which three bills being accomplished, the other tivo to stana void. . And so God send the good ship to her desired port in safety. Amen. Dated in Cadiz, December 1st, 1800. PETER GALVEZ. J32 INVOICE. FACTURA. FACTURA de quatro caxones de lihros Espanoles, que con la marca y numero delmargen, van embarcados en el imvlo nomhrado El Principe de la Paz, su capitan Pedro Galvez, por los sehores Lopez y Compania, y a cuenta y vies go de los smores L/ac king ion, Allen, y Campania. A saver, Libras. L.A. No. i . 30 Folumenes, 14 C. — 2. 24 Dichos, No. 1 o4. —3.16 Dichosy — 4. 40 Dichos, 8 8 6 6 18 7 6 Derechos y gastos 14 4 61 5 c^ Comision, a 2 pr. ciento - 14 6 i. 62 10 3 INVOICE. S33 INVOICE. INVOICE of four chests of Spanish books, marked and numbered as per margin, shipped by lilessrs. Lopez and Company, on board' Tlie Prince of Pence, Peter Galvez nnister, for the account ami risk of Messrs. LackhjgLon, Allen, and Compary. To say, £. s. d. £. J. d. L.J. No. 1 . 30 Volumes, 14 C. -—2. 24 Ditto, 8 8 No, I to 4. —3. 16 Ditto, 6 6 — 4. 40 Ditto, 18 7 6 47 1 6 Duties and charges - - 14 4 3 6i 5 9 Commission, nt 2 per cent. • 1 4 (> £.62 10 3 334 BILLS OF EXCHANGE* LETRAS DE CAMBlO. Cadiz, y V de Diciemhre de I8O6. Por Lii\ 62 10 3- A dos usoSf mand&rdn vms, pagar por esia primka de camMo, sesenta y dns libras ester Imas, dh% chelines y ires penif/ues} a la orden de los sthores Taylor y Compania, valor recibida, que cargardn vmi. en cuenta segun avU9 d9 S. S. S LOPEZ y Compania^ A los Sertores Laclingtorit Aliens y Comp. Londres, Cadix, yX'^de Die, de ISOG, A los Settores LacUngtov , Allen j y Companiaj Londres, Muy Senores nuestros, HEMOS lihrddo contra vms. hoy, una letra de camh'w por libs. 62 10 3 ; a favor de los senores Taylor y CompaTna, la que cslimaremos que vms. honrcny carguen.- a cuenta, segun aviso de s s. s, Q. S. M. B. LOPEZ y Companla, BILLS OP EXCHANGE. 335 BILLS OF EXCHANGE. •Cadiz, December 1, 1805. Vot£.62 10s. 3d, AT two usances, pay my first of exchange to the or- der of Messrs. Taylor and Company, sixty-two pounds ten shillings and threepence, value received, and place "^o account as per advice. LOPEZ and Company. Messrs. Lackington, Allen, and Co. London. Cadiz, Dec. l, 1806. Messrs. Lackington, Allen, and Co. London. Gentlemen, WE have this day drawn upon you, at two usances, the sum of £. 62 10s. 3d. in favour of Messrs. Taylor and Company j which I beg you to honour, and place to account as per advice of Your obedient servants, LOPEZ and Company. 330 EXTRACTS, CAPITULO viir. Del bum suceso que el valcroso D. Quixote tuvo en la c- pantahley jamas imagimkla aveiitura de los Mol'mos a vienio, con otros sucesos dignos defelice recordacion. EN esto desciibrieron treinta 6 quarenta Molinos ^ viento que hay en aqnel campo ; y asi como D. Quixote los vio, dixo a su escudero : la ventura va guiando nues- tras cosas mejnr de lo que acertaramos a desear : porque ves alii, araigo Sancho Panza, donde se descubren treinta 6 pocos mas desaforados gigantes, con quien pienso hacer batalla, y quitarles a todos las vidas, con cuyos despojos comenzaremos d enriquecer : que esta es buena guerra, y es gran servicio de Dios quitar tan mala simiente de sobre la faz de la tierra. ( Que gigantes ? dixo Sancho Panza. Aquellos que alii ves, respondio su amo de los brazos lar- gos, que los suelen tener algunos de casi dos leguas. • Mire vucstra merced, respondio SarK:ho, que aquellos que alii se parecen no son gigantes, sino Molinos de viento; y lo que en ellos parecen brazos, son las aspas que volteadas del viento, hacen andar la piedra del Mo- lino. Bien parece, respondio D. Quixote, que no estas cursado en esto tie las aventuras : ellos sen gigantes ; y si tienas miedo, quitate de ahi, y ponte en oracion en el espacio que yo voy a entrar con ellos. en fiera, y desi- gual batalla : y diciendo esto;- dio de espuelas a su ca- ballo Rocinante, sin ateuder a las voces que su escudero" Sancho le daba, advirtiendole, que sin duda alguna eran Molinos de viento, y no gigantes aquellos que iba a aco- meter : pero el iba tan puesto en que eran gigantes, qr EXTRACTS. 337 ni oia las voces de su escudero Sancho, ni echaba de ver, aanque estaba ya bien cerca lo que eran, antes iba dici- endo en voces altas : non fuyades, cobardes y viles cria- ^ turas, que un solo caballero es el que os acomete. Le- vantose en esto un poco de viento, y las grandes aspas . comenzaron a moverse j lo qual visto por D. Quixote, ' dixo : pues aunque movais mas brazos que los del gigante Briareo, me lo habeis de pagar. Y en diciendo esto, y encomendandose de todo corazon a su senora Dulcinea, '.pidiendola que en tal trance le socorriese, bien cubieito de su rodela, con la lanza en el ristre, arremetio a todo el galope de Rocinante, y envistio con el primer Molino que estaba delante ; y dandole una lanzada en el aspa, la volvio el viento con tanta furia, que hizo la lanza peda- zos, llevandose tras si al caballo, y al caballero que fue ,rodando muy mal trecho por el campo. Acudio Sancho Panza a socorrerle a todo el correr de su asno j y quando llego, hallo que no se podia menear. Tal fue el golpe que dio con el Rocinante. Valgame Dios ! dixo Sancho: ;io le dixeyo a vrad. que mirase bien lo quebacia, que no eran sino Molinos de viento, y no lo podia ignorar, sino quien llevase otros tales en la cabeza ? Calla, amigo Sancho, respondio D. Quixote, que las cosas de la guerra, mas que otras, estan sujetas a continua mu- danza : quanto mas, que yo pienso, y asi es verdad, que aquel sabio Freston que me robo el aposento, y los libros, ha vuelto estos gigantes en Molinos, por quitarme la glo- ria de su vencimiento : tal es la enemistad que me tiene : mas al cabo, al cabo ban de poder poco sus raalas artes contra la bondad de mi espada. Dios lo haga como puede, respondio Sancho Panza, y ayudandole a levan- iir, torno a subir sobre Rocinante, que medio despaldado estaba, y liablando en la pasada aventura, siguieron el camino del Puerto Lapice, porque alii decia D. Quixote, que no era posible dexar de hallarse muchas y diversas (uituras, por ser lugar muy pasagero, sine que ibs muy 2 G 338 EXTRACTS. pesaroso por haberle faltado la lanza : y dicleiidoselo a su escudero, le dixo : yo me acuerdo haber leido, que im caballero Espanol, llamado Diego Perez de Vargas, liabiendosele en una batalla roto la espada, desgajo de una encina un pesado ramo 6 tronco, y con el hizo tales cosas aquel dia, y machaco tantos Moros, que le quedo por sobrenonnbre Machuca : y asi el como sus descen- dientes se llamaron desde aquel dia en adelante Vargas y Machuca. Hete dicho esto, porque de la primera en- cina, 6 roble que se me depare pienso desgajar otro tronco tal, y tan bueno como aquel, que me imagino, y pienso hacer con el tales hazaiaas, que tu te tengas por bien afortunado de haber merecido venir a verlas, y a ser tes- tigo de cosas que apenas podran ser crei las. A la mano de Dios, dixo Sancho, yo lo creo asi comovuesira merced lo dice J pero enderezese un poco, que parece que va de medio lado, y debe ser del molimiento de la caida. Asi es la veidad, respondio D. Quixote : y si no me quejo del dolor, es porque no es dado a los Caballeros Andantes . quejarse de.herida alguna, aunqne le salgan las tripas por clla. Si eso es asi, no tengo yo que replicar, respondio Sancho: pero sabe Dios si yo me holgara que vuestra merced se quejara quando alguna cosa le doliera^. De mi se decir, que me he de quejar del mas pequeuo dolor que tenga, si ya no se entitnde tambien con los escude- ros de los Caballeros Andantes eso del no quejarse. No se dexo de reir D. Quixote de la simplicidad de su escu- dero ; y asi le declaro que podia muy bien quejarse, como y quando quisie»c, sin gana 6 con ella, que hasta enton- ces no habia leido cosa en contrario en la Orden de Ca- balleria. Dixole Sancho que mirase que era hora de comer. Respoiidiole su amo, que por entonces no le hacia menester, que comiese el quando se le antojase. Con esta licencia se acomodo Sancho lo mejor que pudo sobre su jumento ; y sacando de las aUorjas lo que en ellas habia puesto, iba camiuando y comiendo detras de EXTRACTS. 339 su arao muy despaclo^ y de quando en quando empinaba la bota con tanto gusto, que le pudiera envidiar el mas regalado bodegonero de Malaga, y en tanto que el iba de aquella manera menudeando tragos, no se le acordaba de ninguna promesa que su Amo le hubiese hecho, ni tenia por ningtin trabajo, si no por nuicho descanso, andar bus- cando las aventuras, por peligrosas que fuesen. En re- sol ucion, aquella noche la pasaron entre unos arboles j y del uno de ellos desgajo D. Quixote un ramo seco, que casi le podia' servir de lanza, y puso en el el hierro que qui to de la que se le liabia quebrado. CAPITULO XLII. De los consejos que did D. Quixote d Sancho Panza antes que fuese a gobernar la Insula, con otras coias lien consideradas. CON el felice y gracioso suceso de la aventura de la Dolorida, quedaron tan contentos los Duques, que determinaron pasar con las burlas adelante, viendo ei acomodado sugeto que tenian para que se tuviesen por veras, y asi habiendo dado la traza y ordenes que sus criados y sus vasallos habian de guardar con San- cho en el Gobierno de la Insula prometida, otro dia, que fue el que sucedio al vuelo de Clavileao, dixo ei Duque a Sancho, que se adeliaase y compusiese para ir a ser Gobernador, que ya sus insulanos Je estaban ei>perando como efagua de Mayo. Sancho se le huntiillo y le dixo : despues que baxe del cielo, y despues que desde su alta cumbre mirela tierra, y la vi tan pequena, se teniplo en parte en mi la gana que tenia tan grande de ser Goberna- dor J porque que grandeza es niandar en un grano de mostazd i* 6 qua Dignidad 6 Imperio el gobernar a me- 4ia docena de hombres tamaaos como avellanas, que a mi parecer no habia mas en toda la tierra ? 6i vuestra se- 2 g2 340 E5tTRACTS. noria fuese servido de dvirme una tanlica parte del c'elo, aunque no fuese mas de media legua, la tomaria de me- jor gana que la mayor Insula del mundo, Mirad, amigo Sanchoj respoiidio el Duque, yo no puedo dar parte del cielo a nadie, auiique no sea mayor que una una, que a solo Dios estan reservadas esas mercedes y gracias : lo que puedo dar os doy, que es una Insula hecha y dere- cha, redonda y bien proporcionada, y sobremanera fertil y abundosa, donde si vos os sabeis dar maria podeis con las riquezas de la tierra grangear las del ciek>. Ahora bien, respondio Sancho, venga esa Insula, que yo piig- nare por ser tal Gobernador, que a pesar de bellacos me vaya al cielo ; y esto no es por codicia que yo tenga de salir de mis casillas, ni de levantarme a mayores, sino por el deseo que tengo de probar a que sabe el ser Gober- nador. Si una vez lo probais, Sancho, dixo el Duque, comeros habeis las manos tras el Gobierno, por sex dulci- eiuia GGsS ct tnnV.dzv J ^Cr P^^decidp. A bueii se^uro, que quando vuestro dueno llegue a ser Emperador, que lo sera sin duda,,segun van encaminadas sus cosas, que no se lo arranquen como quiera, y que le due!:: y le pese en la mitnd del alma del tiempo que hubiere dexado de ser- lo. SeHor, replico Sancho Panza, yo imagine que es bueno mandar, aunque sea a un hato de ganado. Con vos me entierren, Sancho, que sabeis de todo, respondio el Duque ; yo espero que sereis tal Gobernador como vuestro juicio promete, y qucdese esto aqui, y advertid que manana en ese mesmo dia habeis de ir al Gobierno de la Insula, y esta tarde os acomodarin del trage conve- niente que habeis de llevar, y de todas las cosas necesa- rias a vuestra partida. Vistanme, dixo Sancho, como quisieren, que de qualquiera manera que vaya vestido sere Sancho Panza. Asi es verdad, dixo el Duque; pero los trages se han de acoraodar con el oficio p digni- dad que se profesa, que no seria bien que un jurisperito se vistiese como soldado, ni un soldado como un sacer- dote. Vos, Sancho, ireis vestido parte de Letrado, y I EXTRACTS. 341 parte de Capitan j porqne en la Insula que os doy, tanto son menester las armas como las letras, y las letras conio las armas. Letras, respondio Sancho, pocas tengo, por- que aun no se el A. B. C. ^ pero bastame tener el Chris- tus en la memoria para ser buen Gobernador. De las armas manejare las que me dieren hasta caer, y Dios adelante. Con tan buena memoria, dixo el Duque, no podra Sancho errar en nada. En esto llego D. Quixote, y sabiendo lo que pasaba, y la celeridad con que Sancho se habia de partir a su Gobierno, con licencia del Duque le tomo por la mano, y se fue con el a su estancia j con intencion de aconsejarle como se habia ,de haber en su ofi- cio. Entrados pues en su aposento, cerro tras si la puerta, y hizo casi por fuerza que Sancho se sentase junto a el, y con reposada voz le dixo : Ipfinitas gracias doy al Cielo, Sancho amigo, de que antes y primero que yo haya encontrado con alguna buena dicha, te haya salido a ti a recibir y a encontrar la buena ventura : yo que en mi baena suerte te tenia li- brada la paga de tus servicios, me veo en los principios de aventajarme, y tu antes de tiempo, contra la ley del ra- zonable discurso, te ves premiado de tus deseos. Olros cohechan, importunan, solicitan, madrngan, ruegan, por- fian y no alcanzan lo que pretenden j y llega otro, y sin saber como ni como no, se halla con el cargo y oficio que otros mucbos pretendieron : y aqui entra y encaxa bien el decir que hay buena y mala fortuna en las preten- siones, Tii, que para mi sin duda alguna eres un porro, sin madrugar ni trasnochar, y sin liacer diligencia alguna con solo el aliento que te ha tocado de la Andante Ca- balleria, sin mas ni mas te ves Gobernador de una Insula, como quien no dice nada. Todo esto digo, 6 Sancho, para que no atribuyas ^ tus merecimientos la merced recibida, sino que des gracias al Cielo que dis- pone suavemente las cosas, y despues las daras a la gran- deza que en si encierra la profesion de la Caballeria An- 2 G 3 342 EXTRACTS. dante. Dispuesto pues el corazon a creer lo que te he dicho, esta, 6 hijo, atento a este tu Caton que quiere aconsejarte, y ser norte y guia que te encamine y saque a seguro puerto de este mar proceloso donde vas a engol- farte, que los oficios y graiides cargos no son otra cosa fiinoun golfo profundo de confusiones. Prin eraniente, 6 hijo, has de teraer, a Dios, porque en el temeiie esta la sabiduria, y siendo sabio, no podras errar en nada. Lo segundo, has de poner los ojos en quien eres, pro- curando conocerte a ti mismo, que es el mas dificil cono- cimiento que puede imaginarse : del conocerte saldra el no hincharte como la rana, que quiso igualarse con el buey J que si esto haces, vendr.'i a ser feos pies de la rue- da de tu locura la consideracion de haber guardado puer- cos en tu tierra. A si es la verdad, respondio Sancho, pero fue quando muchacho ; pero despues algo hombre- cillo, gansos fueron los que guarde, que no puercos j pero esto pareceme a mi que no hace al caso, que no to- dos los que gobiernan vienen de casta de Reyes. Asi es verdad, replico D. Quixote, por lo qual los no de prin- cipios nobles deben acompariar la gravedad del cargo que exercitan con una blanda suavidad, que guiada por la pru- dencia, los libre de la murmuracion maliciosa de quien no hay estado que se escape. Haz gala, Sancho, de la humildad de tu linage, y no te desprecies de decir que vienes de labradores ; porque viendo que no te corres, ninguno se pondra a correrte : y preciate mas de ser humilde virtuoso, que pecador so- berbio. Innumerables son aquellos que de baxa estirpe nacidos, han subido a la suraa Dignidad Pontificia e Im- peratoria j y de esta verdad te pudiera traer tantos exem- plos, que te cansaran. Mira, Sancho, si tomas por medio a la virtud, y te precias de hacei heclios virtuosos, no hay para que tener envidia'a losquelos tienen Principes y Senores, porque LXTBACTS. 3i3 la sangre se hereda y la virtue! se aquista^ y la virtud vale por si sola, lo que la sangre no vale. Siendo esto asi, conio lo es, si acaso viniere a verte quando estes en tu Insula alguno de tus parlentes, no le deseches ni le afrentes, antes le has de acoger, agasajar j regalar, que con esto satisfaras al cielo, que gusta que nadie se desprecie de lo que el hizo, y corresponderas a lo que debes a la naturaleza bien concertada. Si truxeres a tu muger contigo (porque no es bien que los que asisten a Gobiernos de mucho tiempo esten sin las propias) ensenala, doctrinala y debastala de su natural rudeza j porque todo lo que suele adquirir un Goberna- dor discreto, suele perder y derramar una muger rustica y tonta. Si acaso enviudares, (cosa que puede suceder) y con el cargo mejorares de consorte, no la toaies tal que te sirva de anzuelo y de cana de pescar, y del no quiero de tu ca- pilla J porque en verdad te digo, que de todo aquello que la muger del Juez recibiere ha de dar cuenta el ma- rido en la residencia universal, donde pagara, con el qua- tro tanto en la muerte las pariidas de que no se hubiere hecho cargo en la vida. Nunca te guies por la ley del encaxe, que suele tener mucha cabida con los ignorautes que presumen de agui- dos. Hallen en ti mas compasion las lagrimas del pobre^ pero no mas justicia que las informaciones del rico. Procura descubrir la verdad por entre las promesas y dadivas del rico, como por entre los sollozos e importu- nidades del pobre. Quando pudiere y debiere tener lugar la equidad, no cargues todo el rigor de la ley al delinqtiente, que no es mejor la fama del Juez riguroso que Ja del compasivo. Si acaso doblares la vara de la justicia, no sea con el peso de la dadiva, sino con el de la misericordia. Quando te sucediere juzgar alguu pley to de algun tu 344 EXTRACTS. enemigo, aparta las mientes de tu injuria, y ponlas en la verdad del caso. No te ciegue la pasion propia en la causa agena, que los yerros que en ella hicieres, las mas veces seran sin re- medio j y si le tuvieren, sera acosta de tu credito y aun de tu hacienda. Si alguna muger hermosa viniere a pedirte justicia, (juita los ojos de sus lagrimas, y tus oidos de sus gemidos, y considera despacio la substancia de lo que pide, si no quieres que se anegue tu corazon en su llanto, y tu bon- dad en sus suspiros. Al que has de castigar con obras, no trales mal con palabras, pues le basta al desdichado la pena del suplicio sin la anadidura de las malas razones. Al culpado que cayere debaxo de tu jurisdiccion, con- siderale hombre miserable, sujeto a las condiciones de la depravada naturaleza nuestra, y en todo quanto fuere de lu parte, sin hacer agravio a la contraria, muestratele pia- doso y clemente j porque aunque los atributos de Dios todos son iguales, mas resplaiidece y campea a nuestro ver el de la misericordia, que el de la justicia. Si estos preceptos y estas reglas sigues, Sancho, seran luengos tus dias, tu fama sera eterna, tus premios col- mados, tu felicidad indecible, casaras tus hijos como qui- sieres, titulos tendran ellos y tus nietos, viviras en paz y beneplacito de las gentes, y en los ultimos pasos de la vida te alcanzara el de la muerte en vejez suave y ma- dura, y cerraran tus ojos las tiernas y delicadas manos de tus terceros netezuelos. Esto que hasta aqui te be dicho son documentos que ban de adornar tu alma ; escucha aliora los que ban de servir para adorno del cuerpo. Carta del Padre Is la a su Herniana. HIJA, hermana, y senora mia : Acabo de recibir tu carta de 20 del pasado : Dios sabe quanto me consolo, y EXTKACTS. 345 el alivlo que experimento en todos mis rnolestos, y ha- bituales trabajos, siempre que la Providencia del Seuor, y tu fraternal amor me proporcioiian este indecible con- sueJo. Si tal vez me he quejado con alguna amargura de que me le hagas desear tan to, no es cierto porque dude de tu fineza, sino porque un amor vehemente es poco sufrido j sus quejas, quanto mas injustas, son mas esti- mables, no por lo que suenan, sino por lo que signitican. Perdoname y amame, bien persuadida a que, no pocas veces las que parecen ofensas del oido, son lisonjas del corazon. Las personas que aqui me tratan con alguna conlianza saben, como ya te lo di a entender, que mis incomodidadcs se aumentan, 6 se disminuyen, segun la mayor 6 menor freqiiencia de tus cartas, tanto que me tienen prevenido las avise prontamente, siempre que las recibo. Bastaesto para que intieras quanto las deseo, quanto las aprecio y el mucho bien que me hacen. Por fin no puedo menos de decirte, que estoy muy poco agra- decido a los que me acortan mi conversacion, quando yo no les estorbo las suyas j y si en las antesalas de Espana se €stilf»ran suizcs con sable en mano, como en las de Francia, los dias de correo pondria yo un par de ellos en la tuya, para que a nadie dicsen entrada, hasta que hu- bieras reparlido mi racion. Como quiera pues, siempre que me escribas poco, por divertirte mucho, lo llevare con resignacion, porque eso de llevarlo con alegria, seria demasiada perfecciou para quien tanto te quiere. Adios hija mia j di en casa lo que quisieres, manda lo que gustares, y vive tanto, como lo desea — I'u hermano. Carta del tnismo a un Aviigo suyo, QUERIDO amigo : Que sobre-humana fuerza es esLi ! Que alma ha jamas sido capaz de tan heroycas ac- cioiies ! lemes, te persuades que estoy necesitado y 346 EXTRACTS. quieres partir conmjgo lo poco que te queda ! Mereces que te erijan estatuas : y si fuera este el liempo de la gentilidad, te adorarian como a Dios de la amistad. Yo no puedo explicarte mi reconociniiento a la picdad que usas conmigo Es cosa deplorable el verse en estado de necesitarla : pero, ;quan dulce y cousolante es encontrar almas taa tiernas, y tan grandes, como la tuya, que lo compadezcan ! Todos mis infortunios, todos mis males son nada, en comparaqion de la salisfaccion que me causa tu humanidad, y afecto. Y quieres condenar mi gratitud al silencio ! Ya se, amigo, si^ ya se que tu corazon exercita su beneficencia, no para recibir el lisonjero tributo del reconocimiento, sino para satisfacer su noble inclina- cion. Pero, ^como quieres que dexe de ser reconocido a, tan singulares beneficios^ como recibo de tu generosa amistad ? Eso no puede ser, amigo j conque permitlras que, obedeciendo a la voz imperiosa de mi corazon, te diga que mi gratitud sera indeleble, y que mi afecto para ti tendra un siempre por termino de su duracion. Enviame solo la mitad de lo que me ofreces, y sobrara para hacer de muy pobre, muy rico a — — Tu fino amigo. 347 FABULAS UTERARIAS. FABULA I. I El Muchaco y la Fortuna, A la orilla de un pozo, Sobre h fresca yerba Un incauto muchacho Dormia a pierna suelta. Gritcle la Fortuna ; Insensato, desp'erta No ves que ahogarte puedes A poco que te muevas ? Por ti, y por otros canal las A veces me motejan Los unos de inconsiante Y los otros de adversa. Reveses de Fortuna Llamais X las miserias: Porque, si son reveses De la conducta necia ? FABULA II. El Amor y la Locura, Habiendo la Locura Con el Amor reuido, Dexo ciego de un golpe Al miserable nifio. 348 FABLES. Venganza pide al cielo Venus, mas con que gritos ! Era madre y esposa. Con csto queda dicho Querellase a los dioses Presentando a su hijo : De que sirven las fiechas. De que el arco a Cupido Faltandole la vista Para asestar sus tiros ? Quitensele las alas, Y aquel ardiente cirio. Si a su luz ser no pueden Siis vuelos dirigidos. Atendiendo a que el ciego Siguiese su exercicio, Y a que la delinqiiente Tuviese su castigo, Jupiter, presidente Dela asemblea, dixo : Ordeno a la Locura Desde este instante mismo. Que elernamente sea De Araorei lazarillo. PABULA III. Los Gatos escrupulosos. A las once, y aun mas de la man ana La cocinera Juana Con pretexlo de hablar a la vecina Se sale, cierra, y dexa en la cocina A Miujufy Zapiron hambrientos Al punto (pnes no gastan cumplientos Gatos enhambrecidos)^ i r ABU LAS. 34g Se avanzan a probar de los cocidos " Fu," dixo Zapiron, " maldita olla ! ^ Como abrasa ! veanios esa polla. Que estaen el asador lejos del fiiego, Yo tambien, escaldado, desde luego Se arrima Mic'ifuf, y en uii instante Muestra cada trinchante Que en el arte cisoria sin gran pena, Pudiera darlecciones a Villena. Concluido el asunto. El senor Micifuf toco este punto: Ulrum si se podia 6 no en conciencia Comer el asador ? O que deraencia ! (Exclamo Zapiron en .altos gritos), Cometer el mayor de los delitos ! No sabes que el herrero Hallevado por el, mucho dinero Y que si bien la cosa se exaraina j Entre la bateria de cocina No hay un mueble tan serio y respetable ? Tu pasion te ha engaoado miserable. Mic'ifuf en efecto Abandono el proyecto 3 Pues eran los dos gatos De suerte timoratos Que si el diablo, tentando sus pasiones . Les pusiese asadores a millones, (No hablo yo de las pollas) 6 me engafio. O no comieran uno en todo el aiio. FABULA IV. El Zapaiero Medico. Un habil y hambriento zapatero En la corte por medico corria ; 2h 350 FABULAS. Con un contraveneno que fingia Gano fama y dinero. Estaba el rey postrado en una cama De una grave dolenciaj: Para hacer experiencii Del talento del medico, le llama. El antidote pide, y en un vaso Finge el rey que le mezcla con veneno : 8e lo manda beber : el tal Galeno Teme morir : confiesa todo el caso Y dice que sin ciencia Logro hacerse doctor de grande precio Por la credulidad del vulgo necio Convoca el rey al pueblo : Que demencia Os persuadio, les dice, a haber fiado La salud francamente De un hombre, a quien la gente Ni aim queria liarle tu calzado. Moral. Esto para los credulos se cuenta En quienep. tiene el Charlatan su renta. FABULA V. Los dos Amigos y el Oso. A. dos amigos se aparece un oso : El uno muy medroso En las ramas de un arbol se asegura : El otro abandonado a la ventr.ra Se linge muerto repentinamente. El oso se le acerca lentaraente ; Mas como este animal, segun se cuen^a^ De cadaveres nunca se alimenta FABULAS. Sin ofenderle, le registra y toca> Huelele las narices, y la boca j No le siente el alien to Ni el me nor movimiento, Y asi se fue diciendo sin rezelo Este tan muerto, esta como raii abuelo Entonces el cobarde De su grande amistad haciendo alarde, Del arbol se desprende muy ligero Corre, llega, y abraza alcompauero Pondera la Fortuna, De haberle hallado sin lesion alguna : Y al tin le dice : sepas que he notado Que el oso te decia algun recado. Que pudo ser ? direte lo que ha side, Estas dos palabritas al oido, Aparta tu amistad de la persona. Que si te ve en el riesgo te abandona. 351 FABULA VI. El Leon con su Eiircito. El Leon rey de los bosques poderoso Quiso armar un exercito famoso. Junto sus animales al instante : Empezo por cargar el elefante Un Castillo con utiles ; y encima Rabiosos lobos, que pusiesen grima. Al oso le encargo de los asaltos Al mono, por los altos Mando que al enemigo entretuviesej A la zorra que diese Ingeniosos ardides al intento. Uno grit6 : la liebre, y el jumento, Este por tardo aquella por medrosa, De estorbo servirian no de otra cosa. 2 H 352 JPOESIAS, De estorbo ? dixo el rey, jo no lo creo. En la liebre tendrenios un correo, Y en el asno mis tropas an tmmpeta: Asi quedo la armada bien completa. Testamento de Don Quixote, ROMANCE. De un raolimiento de huesos, A puros palos y piedras. Don Quixote de la Mancha, Yace doliente, y sin fuerzas. Tendido sobre un paves^ Cubierto con su rodela. Sacando como Tortuga, De entre concha la cabeza : Con voz roida, y chillando Viendo el escrivano cerca Ansi_, por falta de dientes Hablo con el entre muelas. Escribid buen cabal lero, Que Dios en quietud mantenga El testamento que hago, Por voluntad postrimera. Y en lo de su entero juicio Que poneis a usanza vuea, Basta poner de zentado, Quando entero no le-tenga. A la tierra mando el cuerpo^ Coma mi cuerpo la tierra, POEsiAS. 353 Que segun esta de flaco. Hay para un bocado apenas. En la vaina de mi espada, Mando que llevado sea Mi cuerpo, que es ataud, Capaz para su flaqueza^ Que embalsamado me lleven A reposar a la iglesia ; Y que sobre mi sepulcro Esciivan esto en la piedra. Aqui yace Don Cluixote El que en provincias div^rsass Los tuertos vengo, y los vicios A puro vivir a ciegas. A Sancho mando las islas Que gan6 con tanta guerra : Con que, sino queda rico Aislado a lo menos queda. Item al buen Rozinante, Dexo los prados, y selvas, Que crio el seuor del cielo. Para alimentar las bestias. Mandole mala ventura, Y mala vejez con elia ', Y duelos, en que pensar En vez depiensos y yerba. Mando que el moro encantado. Que me maltrato en la venta, Los punetes que me dio, Al momentb se le vuelvan. Mando a los mozos de mulas^ Volver las coces sobervias. 354 poi'SiAS. Que me dieron, por descarga, De espaldas y de conciencia. De los palos que me han dado^ A mi linda Dulcinea, Para que gaste el invierno, Mando cien cargas de lena. Mi espada mando a una escarpia Pero desnuda la tenga. Sin que a vestirla otro alguno. Si no es el orin, se atreva. Mi lan^a mando A una escoba Para que puedan con elia Echar aranas de el techo, Qual si de San Jorge fuera. Peto, gola, y espaldar, Manopla, y media visera Lo vinculo en Quixotico Mayorazgo de mi hazienda, Y lo demas de los bienes. Que en este mundo se quedan, Lo dexo para obras pias De rescate de prineesas. Mando que en lugar de misas, Justas, batallas, y guerras. Me digan, pues saben todos. Que son mis misas aquestas. Dexo por testamentarios A don Belianis de Grecia j ' Al caballero del Febo, A Esplandian el de las Xergas. AHi sabio Sancho-Pan^a, Bien oireis lo que dixera POESIAS. 355 Con tono duro, y de espacio, Y la voz de quatro suelas. No es razon, buea seAor mio. Que quaiido vais a dar ci.euia Al sQ^or que vos crio Dig.'.is sandezestan fieras. Sancho, es senor, quien vos habla Que estaa vuesa cabecera, Llorando a cantaros triste Un turbioii de lluvia, y piedra. Dexad por testamentarios Al cura (jue vos confiesa Al regidor Per Anton Y al cabrero Gil-Pancheca. Y dexaos de Esplandiones Pues tanta inquietud nos cuestanj Y Hamad a un religioso Que OS ayude en esta brega. Bien dices, le respondio Don Quixote, con voz tierna 5 Ve a la pen a pobre, y dile A Beltenebros que venga. En csto la extrema uncion Asomo ya por la puerta : Pero el que vio al sacerdote Con sobrepellis y vela, Dixo que era el sabio propio De el encanto de niguea j Y levanto el buen hidalgo Por hablarle la cabeza. Mas viendo que ya le faltan Juicio, vida, vista, ylengua. El escrivano se fue, Y el cura se sal 16 a fuera. 356 LA ORACION DOMINICAL, PADRE nuestro que estds en los cielos, santificado se& el tu nombre, venga a nos el tu reyno, hagase tu voluntai asi en la t'lerra como en el cielo ; el pan nuestro de cada dw danosle hoy,y perdonanos nuestras deudas asi como nosotro, perdonamos d nuestros deudores -, y no nos dexescaer en la teniacionj mas libranos denial. Amen. EL CREDO, CREO en Dm Padre' Todo-poderoso , criador del del y de la t'lerra,: y en Jesu Christo su unico liijo nuestr SeTior, quefue concehido por olra del Espiriiu Santo ; ciu de Maria Virgen ; padecio dehaxo delpoder de Pond Pilato,fue crucificado, muerto, y sepultado ; descendio los irifiernos ; al tercer dia resuscito, de entre los muertos suhid a los cielos: est a sentado a la diestra de Dios Padr Todo-poderoso : de donde vendra a juzgar a los vivos y los muertos. Oreo en el Espiritu Santo, la santa iglesia catolica ; L comuniqn de los santos ; el perdon de los pecados 5 /a* surreccion de la came, y la vida perduralle. Amen. FINIS. Richard Taylor and Co., Printers^ Shoe-Lane, London. August 1, 18l2 J-iSTABLISHED SCHOOL BOOKS, J, PRINTED FOR LONGMAN, HURST, REES, ORME, and BROWN, PATERNOSTER ROW. ISTORICAL and MISCELLANEOUS QUESTIONS for the Use of Young People ; with a Selection of British and General Biography, &c RICHMAL MANGNAL. The Niiiili Edition, in 12mo. Price 5*. bound. V New TREATISE on the USE of the GLOBES ; or, a Pliiloso- :al View of the Earth aiid Heavens ; comprehending an Account of the Figure, ^nitude, and Motion of the Earth ; with the natural Changes of its Surface, caused Floods, Earthquakes, &c. designed for the Instruction of Youth. By THOMAS ITH. In I vol. l2mo. with Plates. 1 bird Edition. Price 6>. boards. This volume comprehends a great quantity of valuable matter in a small compass, and we • 'k it cannot fail to answer the purposes for wliich it is designed." Brit. Cril. " This wort jly execuied." Gen. Rev. I FAMILIAR INTRODUCTION to the ARTS and SCIENCES, the Use of Schools and Young Persons: containing a General Explication of : indamental Principles and Facts of the Sciences; divided into Lessons, with ,uns subjoined to each, for the Examination of Kipils. By the Rev. J. JOYCE, ■i 1 of Scientific Dialogues, &c. In 1 vol. 12mo. Price 6s. boards, illustrated with per-plates by Lowry, and wood-cuts by Braiiston. Ti.c method adopt d i!> to lay down tht principles of the different tcieticet in a series of -t proposit.ons, which are to be committed to memory, and arc divided into lessons of ap- )riatf length. We deem ourselves fully justihed in rtcommendin| the volurr.e to parents aiul •iictors, as containing much useful u atter io a Cheap and Convenient form," Monthly Rev, \n INTRODUCTION to the GEOGRAPHY of the NEW TEsI < iMENT; comprising a Summary Chronological and Geographical View of the •■ onts recorded respecting the Ministry of our Saviour ; with Questions for Examina- 1, and an accented Index ; principally designed for the Use of Young Persons, and the ."Sunday Employment of Schools. By LANT CARPENTER, LL. D. In 1 vol. 10. with maps. Tliird Edition. Price lys. boards. 'We recommend this book to all such as are anxious to obtain accuracy and creciiion iq 'V i.r geographical and chronological knowledge, as far as relates to the liittory of the events ui.'jjrded in the writings of the New Testament. Lit. Jour. The NEW PANTHEON ; or, an IntrodHCtron to the Mythology ' r the Ancients, in Question and Answer. Compiled principally for the Use of }• 'males. By W. JILLARD HORT. The Third Editioo. With Plates. Price 5*. boards. Tie Nc* Vantheon is scrupulously dtlicate ; it is aliO »eU arranged, and well uritten." :. Rev. " It would be unjust not to i^commend this work at an elegant and useful com- on to young persosely for the Use of young Persons, on the obvious an^ important Principle— tfeffi /•xample is niorepowerfuL and more seductive than precept. By WILLIAM MAYOR, LL.D. The Tenth Edition. Price 5^. bound; containing Accounts of the undermen- tioned distinguished Personages Alfred Walsin?{ham Ilarvey Venn Lytilefon Bacon Crichtoii Blake Addison Chatham Wickiiff Drake Clarendon Marlborough Carnck Chaucer Burleigh Milton Newton Cook AVolsey Shakspcare Marvel WalDoJe Blacksfone Moore Haleigh Sydney Siaii^ Johnson tssex Bacon Tillotson Stoane Lowth r.atimrt Andrews Locke Wolfe Howard Cabot Coke Holt AnM>n Mansfield Jewell etratford Burnet Barnard Reynolds Gresham Jiampden A SELECTION of the LIVES of PLUTARCH, abridged for the Use of Schools. By WILLIAM MAYOR, Li..D. &c. Price 55. bound, and containing Accounts of the undermentioned Personages, the most illustrious and estimable Ciia- racters of Antiquity : Romulus ■'iheinistocles Timoieon Eumenes nemosthenes Cam ill us Aristides Pompcy Cicero Perides cato the Censor Alexander Sic. Ac. AlcibLiJdes Pyrriius Julius CKsar Lycurgus Solon Numa THE ELEMENTS of NATURAL HISTORY, for the Use of Schools. Pounded oh the Linnaean Arrangement of Animals, with popular Descrip- tions- in the Manner of Goldsmith and Buffon. By WILLIAM MAYOR, LL. D. The Sixth Edition. Price Os. bound, illustrated by Fifty Engravings, representing Two Hundred of the most curious objects. , . - . , , ,^ " Natural History is a siudy particularly suited to children ; it cultivates flieir talents for obsd - Tation, a!^pli2s to obiects within their reach, and to objects winch are every day interesting to them." Edgewcrth on Practical Kducathn. , ._,.,• j ■■.,-. ., " It is to be regretied that Buffon, with all his excellencies, is absolutely inadmissible into the library of a young lady, both on account of his immodesty and i^npiety. Goldsmith's History of Anunated Nature has m^ny references tj a divine Author ; and it is to be wished that some person would publish a new edition of this work, purified from Uie indelicate and offensive parts.-'— fljisi More'i Strictures on Ftmalt Education. SCRIPTURE BIOGRAPHY, or the Lives and Chai^cters of the nrincipal Personages recorded in the Sacred Writings, practically adapted to the In- struction and Improvement of Youth. By the Rev. JOHN WATKINS, LL. D. In 1 vol. 12mo. price 7s. bound. ,....„ This important work, which teaches and applie Children between the Age of Six and Twelve. By Miss AIKIN. Price 2s. It is the least praise of the two after-mentioned E!emenlary Works of Geography to s;! the best conceived ar.s« Events which have produced any conspicuous Change in the Aspect of the World, and the general State of Human Attairs. by JOHN BIGLANO. The Third Edition. In 1 vol. demy 8vo. embellished with an elegantly engraved Head of the Author. Price 10*. 6d. or 1 vol. I2mo. Price &. in Boards. " Mr BigUnd displays In this volume a well cultivied and comprehensive mind. His style »» generally correct; his information is extensive; and the many pertinent remarks and inference.? with which he has enriched this suininaiy 01 gtncral history, meet our cordial approbation." AT. HfV. LET I'ERS on NATURAL HISTORY ; exhibiting? a View of the Power, the Wisdom, and Goodness of the Deity. So eminently displayed in the Formation of the Universe, and the varii/us Relations of Utility which inferior Being, have to the Human Species. Calculated particularly for the Use of Schools and Young Persons m general of both Sexes : in order to impress their Minds with a jus'. Knowledge of the Creation, and with exalted Ideas of its Great Author. Illustrated by upwards of One Hundred engraved Subjects, applicable to the Work. By JOHN BI(;LAND. The Second Edition, in One Volume l2mo. Illustrated by Plates, 7« 6d. " We recomm' nd oi;r young readers to peruse the present work as a compilation of very useful and entcrtaiiini.' information, tree from indecorous aUusions, and interspersed with useful reflcc lions." Ecltc. Rev. NEW BRITISH ENCYCLOPEDIA; or, DICTIONARY of ARTS AND SCIENCES, comprising an accurate and popular View of the present improved State of Human' Knowledge. By "WILLIAM NICHOLSON, Author and Proprietor of the Philosophical Journal, and various other Chemical, Philosophical and Mathematical Works. Illustrated with 156 elegant Engravings, bv Fx)wry and Scott. Neatly printed by IV flitting ham. In 6 vols. »vo. Price 61. 6s. in Boards. LIVES OF ANCIENT PHILOSOPHERS, translated from tlie French of FENELON, with Notes, and a Life of the Auihor- By the Rev. J. COIi- MACK, M. A. In 2 vols, foolscap 8vo. The Second Edition, printed by Ballantyn*. Price I2s. in Boards. CONVERSATIONS on CHEMISTKY. In wliith the Element* Books printedfor Longman and Co. 7 " This work may bf'Stroni'ly rccoRimendecl lo young students of boili sexes. The perspiciiiry of the style, the rrgular disposition ol" the subject, tlie judiciinis selection o\ illustrative experi- ments, and the elegance of the plates, are so well adayted to the capaci'y ol beginneis, and especiallv of tho< dpsisn I!!' 'xecutiiin, and of recommend ng it to the perusal and study of all who wish to torm a ju^t estimate of the or«'orical talents of tht- eminent nn n, whose speeches it exhibits, or 10 iaiprove themselves in Hue noble art of eloquence." Ann, Rev. ADVICE to YOUNG LADIES on the IMPROVEMENT of the MIND, and the CONDUCT of HFR. By TftOMAS BROADHURST. Tht Second Edition, greatly improved. Price 5s. Boards. ♦Mtis inipoasibieto read these pages without leeling a respect for the aiitlior, who has addressed bis pupils in such a strain of calm good sense, and witli so warm and atleciionaie a solicitude for their welfare Mere are no tricks of composition, to flatter the ear and deceive the understand- ing, but chaste principles are iticulcated in chaste unaffected language. Advi< e on the variou». «jbj!cts of litcratuie, science, and moral conduct is rarely given in a more enjaging manner." An. Htv. MORAL TALES for YOUNG PEOPLE. By Mrs. IVES HURRY. In l2mo. Price 4*. Boards. " Agrecablv to the intention of the author, these Tales are calculated for the use of juvenile readers, ihc different eifects *hicli rbllow cither a judicious and praiseworthy, or iin impropei* and wicked conduct in young persons, are forcibly pourLrayed, and t bus are many good lessons for a proper demeanor pleasingly taught." um. Riv. An INTRODUCTION to the THEORY and PRACTICE of PLAIN and SPHERICAL TRIGONOMETRY, and the Stereographic Projection of the Sphere: including the Theory of Navigation ; comprehending a Variety of Rules, Formulae, &c. with their practical Applications to the Mensuration of Heights and Distances, to determining the Latituoe by two Altitudes of the Sun, the Longitude by the Lunar Observations, an-i to other important Problem^- on the Sphere, and on Nau' tical Astrotwmy. By THOMAS KEITH, Private Teacher of Mathematics. In 3vo. Price 12y. Boards. The Second Edition, corre' ted and improved. An INTRODUCTION to the KNOWLEDGE of rare and valu- able Editiotis of th-e GREEK and LATIN CLASSICS, including an Account of Polyglot Bibles; the best Gietk, and Greek and Latin Editions of the Sepluagint and New Testament, the Scriptores de Re Rustica, Greek Romances, and Lexicons, and Gram • mars. By the Rev. T. FROGNALL DIBDIN, F. S. A. In 2 vols, crown: 8vo. The Third Edition, with additional Authors, anid Biographical Notices (chiefly of English Authors.) Pi-Ice iSs. in Boards. •' We are deciuti)!i of op'niin liiat np bibliographical collection can be compUte without Mr. Dibdin's volumes, which ;ire, ind- p'-wlent of the solid information they contain, frequfntiy en!iv-,,f,re''k language." I-i.f. Rev. " It cxliibits -nany proofs of ingcriiity and ex!cnsive"researc!i, ot a mind acu:e and vigorous, and habitually, £.nd oflinsucceSifully,' employed ir, philosoiihical inrcsligationi." Am. Books printed for Longjnan and Co. 9^ INSTITUTES OF LATIN GRAMMAR. By JOHN GRANT, A. M. In 8vo. Price 1()5. 6d. in Boards. This Work is chiefly designed for Schools, and is intended not to supersede the Use of our common Grammars, but to supply their Defects. Its primary Object is to furnish the Senior Scholar with a complete Digest of the Rules and Principles of the Latin Language, and to aftbrd the Teacher a uselfnl Book of occasional Reference. "These instiiu'es display considerable abilitv, great diligence, and pbllosophicai insight, into the structure of language." M. Rm A VOCABULARY; Enelish and Greek, anan^ed systematically, to advance the Learner in scientific as well as vtrbal Knowledge. Designed for the Use of «chools. By NATHANIEL HOWARD. Price '3s. " The Greek laneuage is 3o copious that few pt-rsons ever master the vocabulary.- The present work is well calculated to expedite the kno vledtfc ol those terms of natural history, of art, and sctence, which &k commonly the last learned, and the first lorgotun." A CONCISE VIEW of the CONSTITUTION of ENGLAND. By GEORGE CUSTANCE, Third Edition, improved and enlarged, bvow Price \0s. bd. Boards, and in 12mo. Price 7s. Boards. " We most 8incer»4v congratulate the Public on the appearance of a work, which we can safeir recommend as well fitted to su ply a chasm in our system of public instruction. Of the merits of tiie work, the Public may form some judgment, when we inform them that it contains whatever IS mo^l interesting to the general resder m Blackstone, together with much useful inforraation derived Irom Hrofesjor Clirisiian, I)e Lolme, and various other eminent ajthors." Eclectic Rev. An INTRODUCTION to PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC, in Two Parts, with various Notes and occasional Directions for the Use of Learners. By THOMAS MOLINEAUX, many years Teacher of Accounts, Short-hand, and the Mathematics, at the Free School in Maccleshekl. The Eighth Edition, in 12mo. Part 1. Price 2s. 6d. bound. An INTRODUCTION to PRACTICAL ARITHMETIC, in Two Parts, with various Notes, and occasional Directions for the Use of Learners, By THOMAS MOLINEUX, many years Teacher of Accounts, Short-hand, and the Mathematics, at the Free Grammar School in Macclestield. The Third Edition. Part II. Price 2j, bd, THE UNION DICTIONARY; containing all that is truly tiseful iH the Dictionaries of Johnson, Sheridan, and Walker : the Orthography and expla- natory Matter selected from Dr, Johnsoii, trie Pronunciation adjusted according to Mr. Walker, with the Addition of Mr, Sheridan's Pronunciation of those Words wherein these two eminent Orthoepisis differ. The whole designed to present to the Reader, at one View, the Orthography, Expla- nation, PronunciatioJlj and Accentnation of all the purest and most approved Terms m the English Language. With about two Thousand additional Words, deduceo from the best modern Authorities. By THOMAS BROWNE, LL. D Author of a " New Classical Dictionary," Viridarium Poeticum," &c. In 1 vol. crown 8vo. Price 10s. 6d. bound, the Third Edition, with numerous Additions and Improvements. EXERCISES to the ACCIDENCE and GRAMMAR or, aa Exemplification of the several Moods and Tenses, and of the principal Rules of Con- struction ; consisting chiefly of Moral Sentences, collected out of the best Roman Authors, and translated into English, to be rendered back into Latin, the Latin Words being set in the opposite Column, with References to the Latm Syntax; and Notes. By WILLIAM TURNER, M- A. late Master of the Free School at Colchester. The Twentieth Edition. Price 2s. M. bound. TERMINATIONES et EXEMPLA DECLINATIONUM et CONJUGATIONUM ITEMUUE PROPRIA QU^ MARiBUS, Q.\]m. GENUS et AS IN PRiESENri, Englisned and explained, for the Use of young Grammarians. Opera et studio CAROLI HOOLE, M. A. E. Col. e Oxon Scholarchae olim Rotheramiensis egro Ebor. la iBnio. Price U. tict. bound. An ABRIDGMENT, of AINSWORTH'S DICTIONARY, En^tlish and Latin, designed for the Use of Schoids. By THOMAS MORRELL, D. D. Rector of Buckland, in Hertfordshire, and F.S. S. R. and A. In bvo. Price 15s. bound. The Eighth Edition. RULES for ENGLISH COMPOSIITON, and particularly for Theines. Designed for the Use of Schools, and in .Aid of Self-Instruction. By .JOHN RiPPINGHAM, Private Tutor at Westminster School. In 1 vol. 12mo. price 2>s. 6d. A GREEK GRAMMAR, an/> FIRST BOOK FOR CHILDREN. By LINDLEY MURRAY. Sixth Edition. Price 6d. sewed. " This very improved frinier is iniended to prepare the leari;er tor ilic above-menlionid Spelling Book, and is particularly intended by the author to assist mothers in the instruction of their young children." M. Hiv. ENGLISH GRAMMAR, adapted to the different Classes of Learn- ers. With an Appendix, containing Rules and Observations for assisting the mor« advanced Students to write with Perspicuity and Accuracy. By LINDLEY MURRAY, Twenty-tirst Edition. Price 4$. bound. An ABRIDGMENT of MURRAY'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR With an Appendix, containing Exercises in Parsing, in Orthography, in Syntax, anc in Punctuation, Designed for the younger Claises of Learners. Thirty-second Eaition Price Is. bound. ENGLISH EXERCISES, adapted to MURRAY'S ENGLISH GRAMMAR; consisting of Exemplifications of the' Parts ot Speech, Instances of fals( Orthography, Violations of the Rules of Syntax, Defects in Punctuation, and Violation ol' the Rules respecting Perspicuitv and Accvtracy. Designed fo; the Benefit of privali Learners, as well *s foi lUe Uit of Schools. Fifteenth EdUioa. Price 2s. 6ct, Books printed Jor Longman and Co. 1 1 A KEY to the ENGLISH EXERCISES ; calculated to enable prjvata Learners to become their own Instructors in Grammar and Composition. Eleventh Edition. Price 2i. 6d, bound. The Exercises and Key may be had together, I»rice 4y. 6d. f '• Mr. Mirray's English Grammar, English Exercises, and Abrt^Bment of" the Grammar, Cl.nm our aixniioa on accooDl of tlieir being composed on the principle we liarc so frequently r*r sucii pieces as shall answer the d >ub!e purpose of promoting pool principlca, and a correcj and elegant taste. Tins will, no doubt, be found a very useful scbool book," M. R^ " iTie snideni will find his advantage in maki/ig use of this work, as he will be sure ^o form his tastt after the mast correct models." '>'f Rtv INTRODUCTION AU LECTEUR FRANCOIS: on, Recucil de Pieces choises ; avec I'F.xplication des Idiotismes et des Phrases difficiles, qui s'y trouvent. Par LINDLEY MURRAY. In 12mo. Price 3s. 6d. boards. *• Mr. Murray has exercise